FCC ID: FC3ODU7ATXAD 7GHz MTX Radio

 

MTX5000 Transmitter System User and Technical Manual Manual Part No. 400591-1 Rev. A June 2009 NOTE TO USER Overview The MTX5000 Transmitter System (MTX5000) is a state-of-the-

art transmitter system. The MTX5000 Indoor Unit (IDU) contains a central processor used to control all functions and operations of the system. To avoid potential software hang-ups or software corruption, please read and follow the guidelines contained in the following paragraphs. Avoid Potential Operational Problems Information contained in the following paragraphs identify potential problems that can be avoided by reading and following the operating procedures provided in this manual. To avoid potential operational problems, please review the information contained in the Routine Operation Chapter on page 3-1. The Routine Operation Chapter contains step-by-step procedures that, when performed correctly, will eliminate potential problems that could be caused by operator error or by lack of experience with the MTX5000 system. Radio Unable to Transmit or Generally Unstable If the radio is unable to transmit or is generally unstable, perform Select Preset on page 3-24 to select or re-

select the proper Preset. Then verify proper transmitter operation by transmitting and receiving. If the radio remains unstable, it may be necessary to cycle power off and on. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7 to power down and power up the MTX5000. Always wait a minimum of 10 seconds between powering the radio down and then powering the radio up again. After cycling power to off and back to on, perform Select Preset on page 3-24 to select the proper Preset. Then verify proper transmitter operation by transmitting and receiving. If the radio is still unable to transmit or remains unstable, contact MRC Technical Support for assistance. Improper Power Up/Power Down If the radio is unable to transmit, is unstable, or if the software appears to be corrupted, the Preset may have been selected or changed too soon after power was applied or the wrong Preset was selected. Always wait a minimum of 5 seconds after the Main screen is displayed following power up before selecting a Preset. If the wrong Preset is selected, you must wait a minimum of 5 seconds before attempting to select another Preset. Failure to wait 5 seconds minimum between Preset selections will cause software hang-ups. If the radio is unable to transmit, is unstable, or if the software appears to be corrupted, power to the radio may have been removed and reapplied too quickly. The MTX5000 central processor requires a minimum of 10 seconds to properly shutdown to avoid possible software corruption. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual NOTE TO USER i Software corruption can occur if the external input power to the radio was momentarily lost and was then reapplied without waiting a minimum of 10 seconds between loss of power and reapplication of input power. The problem may also occur if the power switch was pressed to off and back to on without waiting a minimum of 10 seconds. To avoid problems, always wait a minimum of 10 seconds between removal or loss of power and reapplication of power to the radio. The problem may also occur if the progress bar was displayed when power was removed from the radio. Always ensure the progress bar is not displayed on the color LCD display panel when power is removed from the radio. If this problem has occurred, press the power switch to off, wait 10 seconds minimum, and press the power switch to on. The internal processor will attempt to perform a self-recovery of the software. During the software recovery attempt, a progress bar will be displayed on the color LCD display panel indicating the progress of the process. This progress bar will take more time to reach 100% than during a normal power up. Do not become impatient during the software recovery process due to the time it may take for recovery. Do not remove and reapply power while the progress bar is displayed during the software self-

recovery process. Software corruption will occur!

When the power up is complete and the Main screen is displayed on the color LCD display panel, verify proper transmitter operation by transmitting and receiving. If the software is corrupted and the Main screen is not displayed, contact MRC Technical Support for assistance. Radio State Incorrect If the radio state is incorrect, the correct Preset may not have been selected. Select the proper Preset per Select Preset on page 3-24. PA Voltage Adjust Setup Software Hang-up When performing Perform PA Voltage Adjust Setup on page 3-

44, ensure the Outdoor Unit (ODU) is properly connected to the IDU. If the ODU is not connected to the IDU and you attempt to perform this procedure, the software will hang up. To avoid software hang-up, always ensure the ODU is connected to the IDU when performing the PA Voltage Adjust Setup procedure. Check the Main screen ODU status indicator. If a major fault exists in the ODU, do not perform the PA Voltage Adjust Setup procedure until the fault has been corrected or until the ODU is connected to the IDU. If the ODU is not connected to the IDU or if the ODU has suffered a failure, the PA Voltage Adjust Setup Screen will remain displayed on the color LCD display panel if the PA Voltage Adjust Setup screen Start option button is selected. If the software hangs up due to the ODU not being connected to the IDU or if the ODU has failed, perform the following:

Press the power switch to off. Connect the ODU to the IDU or go to Troubleshooting on page 4-1 to correct the fault. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual NOTE TO USER ii Press the power switch to on, perform Select Preset on page 3-24 to select the proper Preset. Perform PA Voltage Adjust Setup on page 3-44 and then verify proper transmitter operation by transmitting and receiving. RF Levels Too High If the transmitted RF levels are too high, Perform RF Level Adjust on page 3-49. Software Recovery If the software becomes corrupted, the MTX5000 IDU will attempt to self-recover the software. During the software self-

recovery, the previously configured parameters may be recovered - not the latest parameters. This may happen if a fault occurs when installing software updates. If the software becomes corrupted, press the power switch to off, wait 10 seconds minimum, and press the power switch to on. The internal processor will attempt to perform a self-recovery of the software. During the software recovery attempt, a progress bar will be displayed on the color LCD display panel indicating the progress of the recovery process. This progress bar may take considerably more time to reach 100% than during a normal power up. Do not become impatient during the software recovery process due to the time it may take for recovery. Do not remove and reapply power while the progress bar is displayed during the software recovery process. Software corruption will occur!

When the power up is complete and the Main screen is displayed on the color LCD display panel, you may need to perform Select Preset on page 3-24. Then verify proper transmitter operation by transmitting and receiving. If the software is no longer corrupted, perform Firmware Update on page 5-114 to verify that you have the latest software installed in your MTX5000 IDU. Update the software, as required. If the software is corrupted or if the Main screen is not displayed, contact MRC Technical Support for assistance. Color Bar Generator Operations All MTX5000 Indoor Units (IDU) contain a built-in digital Color Bar Generator (CBG) as standard equipment. The IDU is also available with an optional analog CBG. Potential operator problems can occur when using the optional analog CBG or the built-in digital CBG. Potential operator-induced problems may include the following:

Selection of the CBG On operating mode during test, troubleshooting, or CBG setup and failure to select the Off, A Gen, or A Stby operating mode for normal operation when test, troubleshooting, or CBG setup is completed. Selection of the CBG On, A Gen, or A Stby operating mode when the optional Analog Color Bar Generator is not installed in the MTX5000 IDU. To avoid potential operator problems that can impact operation of the MTX5000 System, the following information is provided:

The optional analog CBG and the digital CBG both include Off, On, A Gen (Auto Generated), or A Stby

(Auto Standby) operating mode options. The CBG mode should only be set to the On operating mode for test, troubleshooting, or for setup of the MTX5000 User and Technical Manual NOTE TO USER iii applicable Color Bar Generator. During normal operation, the CBG Off, A Gen, or A Stby operating mode must be selected for proper operation and video transmission. CBG operating modes are not Preset-specific or mode-

specific. If your IDU contains the optional analog CBG and you select the Off, A Gen, or A Stby operating mode for an analog Preset, the selected option is applicable for all analog Presets, as well as for all digital Presets. If the CBG On operating mode is selected, the output of the MTX5000 IDU will be color bars only, not video, regardless if an analog or a digital Preset is selected. When color bars are set to On (enabled), color bars take priority over all analog and digital Preset settings. If the IDU output consists of color bars only, please verify that the analog and/or digital CBG operation mode is not set to On before you call customer service. The problem may be nothing more than having selected the On operating mode. Perform Select Color Bar Generator Mode on page 3-52 to select the Off, A Gen, or A Stby operating mode. It is possible to select analog CBG options if you do not have the optional CBG installed in your MTX5000 IDU, but the options are not active and will result in transmission problems. Be careful when setting CBG options if you do not have the optional analog CBG installed. If you attempt to set the CBG operating mode to On, A Gen, or A Stby and you do not have the optional analog CBG installed in your MTX5000 IDU, you will have a blank screen displayed for analog Presets. Before calling Customer Service, please verify that the analog CBG operating mode has not been set to On. Go to Select Color Bar Generator Mode on page 3-52 and select the Off, A Gen, or A Stby operation mode. When utilizing a digital Preset with an ASI video input and the digital CBG option setting is A Gen or A Stby, loss of the ASI video input will not display color bars or will not change the MTX5000 IDU operation to standby indicating loss of the ASI signal. This is normal operation for ASI video loss. Using the Color LCD Display Panel Touch Screen CAUTION Avoid damage to the color LCD display panel!

The color LCD display panel touch screen may be damaged if a sharp, hard-pointed object, such as a pencil or a pen, is used to select the displayed options. Touch screen options must only be selected using your fingers, a soft-pointed stylus, or the front panel function keys. Damage to the color LCD display panel caused by using a hard-pointed object or other misuse may void your warranty on the MTX5000 IDU. Whenever you use the MTX5000 IDU color LCD display panel MTX5000 User and Technical Manual NOTE TO USER iv display panel appears to be operating very slowly or has locked up completely, disconnect the Ethernet cable from the ETHERNET connector. This should free up the color LCD display Panel and the IDU should resume operating properly. Notes touch screen to select options, use care to avoid damage. Sharp-pointed objects or excessive force can render the color LCD display Panel touch screen inoperable. Use your fingers, a soft-pointed stylus, or the front panel function keys to select the displayed options. A cotton swab works very well as a soft-pointed stylus. Remote Location Operations It is highly recommended that remote operations be performed using a Microsoft Windows-based PC that meets the following requirements:

1.2 GHz processor 500 MB of system memory 1.0 Gb of free hard disk space Microsoft Windows XP Operating System with SP2 Super VGA 800 x 600 pixels Internet Explorer 7.0 or later Remote location operations must be performed using Internet Explorer 7.0 or later. Note When operating in the remote mode, if the web page on the PC display should become blank when switching between option tabs, select the web browser refresh option. The correct screen will then be displayed Ethernet Connections If you are connected to the Ethernet via the IDU rear panel ETHERNET RJ45 connector and you find that the color LCD MTX5000 User and Technical Manual NOTE TO USER v MTX5000 User and Technical Manual NOTE TO USER vi MTX5000 User and Technical Manual NOTE TO USER vii MTX5000 User and Technical Manual NOTE TO USER viii Notices Notices About This Manual Part number 400591-1 Revision A June 2009 MTX5000 Transmitter System (MTX5000) Copyright The information contained in this manual remains the property of Microwave Radio Communications (MRC) and may not be used, disclosed, or reproduced in any form whatsoever, without the prior written consent of MRC. MRC reserves the right to make changes to equipment and specifications of the product described in this manual at any time without notice and without obligation to notify any person of such changes. 2009 Microwave Radio Communications Microwave Radio Communications 101 Billerica Avenue - Bldg. 6 North Billerica, MA 01862-1256 USA TEL:

800.490.5700

+1.978.671.5700 Printed in U.S.A. The Microwave Radio Communications and Vislink trademarks and other trademarks are registered trademarks in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Grainger is a registered trademark of W.W. Grainger, Inc., in the United States and other countries. McMaster is a registered trademark of McMaster-Carr Supply Company in the United States and other countries. Do It Best is a registered trademark of DoitBest.com or its affiliate, Do It Best Corp., in the United States and other countries. Proprietary Material The information and design contained within this manual was originated by and is the property of MRC. MRC reserves all patent proprietary design, manufacturing, reproduction use, and sales rights thereto, and to any articles disclosed therein, except to the extent rights are expressly granted to others. The foregoing does not apply to vendor proprietary parts. MRC has made every effort to ensure the accuracy of the material contained in this manual at the time of printing. As specifications, equipment, and this manual are subject to change without notice, MRC assumes no responsibility or liability whatsoever for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual or for any decisions based on its use. This manual is supplied for information purposes only and should not be construed as a commitment by MRC. Quality Certification Microwave Radio Communications is certified to ISO 9001:2000. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Notices Notices-i Changes or modifications not expressly approved by MRC could void the users authority to operate the equipment. General Safety Information The following safety requirements, as well as local site requirements and regulations, must be observed by personnel operating and maintaining the equipment covered by this manual to ensure awareness of potential hazards. WARNING - RF Power Hazard High levels of RF power are present in the unit. Exposure to RF or microwave power can cause burns and may be harmful to health. Remove power from the unit before disconnecting any RF cables and before inspecting damaged cables and/or antennas. Avoid standing in front of high gain antennas (such as a dish antenna) and never look into the open end of a waveguide or cable where RF power may be present. RF Exposure - Safe Working Distances MRC provides this warning for safety purposes with the intent to inform the user of the potential hazard to RF exposure. The following guidelines for safe operation were derived from OET bulletin 65, August 1997, as recommended by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). The MTX5000 Transmitter System is a mobile transmitter system designed to provide services to broadcast ENG users under CFR 74 subpart F and 74.601 TV pickup stations. This unit, operated without an antenna, will not create RF energy exceeding 1.0 mW/cm2, the FCC limit for exposure. Once connected to an antenna, the potential for harmful exposure will be greatly enhanced. In this situation, a certain distance from the radiator is to be maintained. Calculations need to be performed to understand what that safe margin for exposure is. This is known as the Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) limit. Note Hazardous RF radiation limits and recommended distances may vary by country. Ensure that all applicable state and federal regulations are observed when using this transmitter. Calculations provided are for common antennas often utilized in the ENG environment. The following formula used is that suggested by OET 65. Calculating MPE EIRP = P * (10 ^ (G / 10)) = (antilog of G/10) * P P = RF power delivered to the antenna in mW G = Power gain of the antenna in the direction of interest relative to an isotropic radiator R = distance to the center of radiation of the antenna in centimeters S = MPE in mW/cm (milliwatts per square centimeters) Conversions dBi to numeric gain = Antilog (dBi/10) Feet to centimeters = Feet * 30.48 Centimeters to Feet = cm * .0328 4 = 12.57 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Notices Notices-ii MRC, in accordance with the requirements set forth by the FCC, provides this information as a guide to the user. It is assumed that the users of this equipment are licensed and qualified to operate the equipment per the guidelines and recommendations contained within the product user guides and in accordance with any FCC rules that may apply. Figure 1 with its corresponding table shows the 2GHz MPE. Figure 1: MTX5000 MPE 2GHz User Input RF power delivered to the antenna = Watts Antenna gain (referenced to isotropic antenna) = dBi Distance from the center of radiation = Feet Calculation steps:

1. 2.

[P] RF power input. Convert watts to milliwatts = Watts *

1000

[G] Antenna gain dBi. Convert to numeric gain = Antilog

(dBi/10)

[EIRP] Multiply P * G

[R] Convert centimeters to feet = Centimeters * .0328 3. 4. 5. Square R 6. Multiply R * 4 7.

[S] Divide (R * 4) into EIRP S = Power Density in milliwatts per square centimeters. Note:

At frequencies above 1500 MHz, S must not be greater than 1. Reference FCC OET Bulletin 65, August 1997 - Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields The examples shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 are typical graphs for an MRC STRATA Transmitter and show the permissible exposure distance for various antennas. Graphs and data will vary, based on the actual transmitter, output power, frequency, and antenna utilized. One plot provides the permissible output of the transmitter for digital modulation, and the other plot for analog modulation. Antenna Gain (dBi) Minimum Dis-

tance from Antenna (cm) Minimum Distance from Antenna (inch) 0 5 16 20 35 28 50 177 279 1569 11.02 19.68 69.67 109.81 617.56 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Notices Notices-iii Conventions Pay special attention to information marked in one of the following ways:

WARNING Follow WARNINGS closely to prevent personal injury or death. CAUTION Follow CAUTIONS to prevent damage to the equipment. Note Notes provide additional information to assist you in using and maintaining the equipment. Figure 2 with its corresponding table shows the 7GHz MPE. Figure 2: MTX5000 MPE 7GHz Antenna Gain (dBi) Minimum Dis-

tance from Antenna (cm) Minimum Distance from Antenna (inch) 0 5 16 20 35 26 46 163 258 1448 10.23 18.11 64.16 101.55 569.93 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Notices Notices-iv Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

(WEEE) - The product must not be disposed of with other waste at the end of its life cycle. It is the users responsibility to dispose of the waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for recycling. Symbols Used The following symbols may be used on the equipment or in this manual:

Symbol Meaning WARNING: General Warning. Risk of Danger. WARNING: Risk of Electric Shock. WARNING: Electrostatic Discharge. Possible Damage to Equipment. Fuse - Identifies fuses or their location. OR Frame or Chassis Ground - Identifies the frame or chassis terminal. Earth Ground - Identifies the earth ground terminal. Protective Earth Ground - Identifies any terminal which is intended for connection to an external conductor for protection against electric shock in case of a fault, or the terminal on a protective earth electrode. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Notices Notices-v MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Notices Notices-vi Contents NOTE TO USER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -i Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i Avoid Potential Operational Problems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i Radio Unable to Transmit or Generally Unstable - - - - - i Improper Power Up/Power Down - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i Radio State Incorrect - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ii PA Voltage Adjust Setup Software Hang-up - - - - - - - - ii RF Levels Too High - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii Software Recovery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii Color Bar Generator Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii Using the Color LCD Display Panel Touch Screen- - - iv Remote Location Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - v Ethernet Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - v Notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i About This Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i Copyright - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i Proprietary Material - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i Quality Certification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i General Safety Information- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ii WARNING - RF Power Hazard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ii RF Exposure - Safe Working Distances - - - - - - - - - - - ii Conventions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iv Symbols Used- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - v Contents - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 For Whom Its Written - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 Related Documents - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 Ordering Documentation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 Calling for Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1 Tell Us What You Think! - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 Product Description- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1 Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1 Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1 General - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1 MPEG Encoding and COFDM Transmission - - - - - - 2-2 Analog Video Encoding and FM Modulation- - - - - - - 2-2 RF Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2 System Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3 IDU Operating Controls- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-4 External Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5 Configuration Options- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-7 IDU Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-7 AC Power - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-7 Remote Control Options- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-7 Antenna Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8 Band and Frequency Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8 System Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8 Single-Band/Dual Antenna Transmission- - - - - - - - - 2-9 Dual-Band Non-Simultaneous Transmission - - - - - - 2-9 Dual-Band Simultaneous Transmission - - - - - - - - - 2-10 Operating System Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-11 General - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-11 Normal User Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-11 System Setup Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-11 For More Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-11 Routine Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1 Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1 Overview of Controls, Indicators, and Connectors - - - - - 3-2 MTX5000 IDU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors- 3-2 MTX5000 ODU Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6 Preparing for Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7 Mobile Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7 Powering the MTX5000 System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7 Using the MTX5000 Screens in Local Mode - - - - - - - - 3-10 Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-10 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Contents Contents-1 Main Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11 Color LCD Display Panel- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13 Touch Screen and Function Keys - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13 Navigation Between Main and Status Screens - - - 3-14 Transmitter Operation Buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14 Local/Remote Control Status Button- - - - - - - - - - - 3-16 Setup Screen Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-16 Radio Screen Options- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17 Select Local/Remote Operation Mode - - - - - - - - - - - 3-20 MTX5000 Local Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-23 Select Preset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24 Select RF Band - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-27 Select/Customize Operating Channels - - - - - - - - 3-30 Select Channel Offset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32 Select Antenna - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33 Select Antenna Polarization - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-34 Enable/Disable Transmitter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-35 Select High/Low Power Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36 Monitor ODU Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36 Monitor IDU Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-37 Monitor SUM Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-38 Monitor Current Preset Status Settings- - - - - - - - - 3-38 Perform PA Voltage Adjust Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-44 Perform RF Level Adjust - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49 Select Color Bar Generator Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-52 Set Time and Date - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-54 Perform IDU Diagnostics- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-56 Review System Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-57 Set Last PA State - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-58 Using the MTX5000 in Remote Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60 Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60 Remote Screen Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-61 Remote Configuration Setting Selections - - - - - - - 3-64 Transmitter Controls - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-66 Alerts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-66 Remote Location Operations- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-67 Select Preset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-67 Select RF Band and Channel Plan - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-68 Select Operating Channel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-69 Select Antenna - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-70 Select Frequency Offset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-70 Select Antenna Polarization - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-70 Enable/Disable Transmitter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-71 Select High/Low RF Power Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-71 Monitor Alerts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-72 Routine vs. Advanced Operation Configuration Settings 3-73 Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1 Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1 Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1 Ethernet Connections- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 Advanced Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1 Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1 Before You Begin- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1 MTX5000 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2 Software - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2 Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2 System Rules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2 Configuration Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3 Local Mode Password Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3 Create or Update Preset Configuration Settings in Local Mode Create or Update Custom Analog Preset Configuration In Local Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7 Create or Update Digital COFDM Preset Configuration Set-

tings in Local Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-17 Create or Update Digital ASI Preset Configuration Settings in Local Mode- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-30 5-6 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Contents Contents-2 Create or Update Digital LMS-T Preset Configuration Set-

tings in Local Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-34 Create or Update Digital DVB-S Preset Configuration Set-

tings in Local Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-47 Create or Update Digital IP Preset Configuration Settings in Local Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-60 Create or Update Preset Configuration Settings in Remote Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-73 Create or Update Custom Analog Preset Configuration in Remote Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-73 Create or Update Custom Digital COFDM Preset Configu-

ration in Remote Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-77 Create or Update Custom Digital ASI Preset Configuration in Remote Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-82 Create or Update Custom Digital LMS-T Preset Configura-

tion in Remote Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-86 Create or Update Custom Digital DVB-S Preset Configura-

tion in Remote Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-91 Create or Update Custom Digital IP Preset Configuration in Remote Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-96 Preset File Management - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-101 Restore Presets to Defaults- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-102 Save Preset Configurations to a File - - - - - - - - - 5-104 Load Preset Configurations from a File- - - - - - - - 5-106 Set Network Addresses for Remote Operation - - - - 5-109 Firmware Update - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-114 License Manager- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-117 Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1 Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1 Unpacking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1 Initial Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2 Damage in Shipment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2 Installing the MTX5000 IDU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2 Site Preparation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2 Mounting the MTX5000 IDU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-3 Power Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4 Power Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4 Power Supply and Distribution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4 Grounding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5 Defining the Wiring Harness - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5 Steps to Define the Harness- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5 Select the Type of RF/Power Cabling - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5 Select the Function Cables Required - - - - - - - - - - - 6-7 Determine the Size of Harness Required - - - - - - - - - 6-9 Cabling Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9 MTX5000 System Type N Connector Interface - - 6-11 MTX5000 System TNC Connector Interface - - - - - 6-12 Installing the Fabricated Harness- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 Installing the Outdoor Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 Site Preparation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 Mounting the ODU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 Making the Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-15 Mast Top Connections- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16 IDU Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16 Wayside Data Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-24 Wayside Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-24 Compatibility - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-24 Audio Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-24 Audio Inputs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-24 Analog Audio Inputs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-25 Digital Audio Inputs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-25 ODU Power - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-26 Remote Control Operations- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-26 Powering Up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-27 Checks Before Power-Up- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-27 Initial Power-Up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-27 Power Down - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-29 Product Modifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-29 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Contents Contents-3 Replacement Parts and Supported Repairs - - - 7-1 Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1 External Cables and Adapters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1 AC Power Fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1 Supported Repairs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1 Theory of Operation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1 Chapter Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1 System Architecture - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1 General - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1 Architecture - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1 MPEG Encoding and COFDM Transmission - - - - - - 8-2 Analog Video Encoding and FM Modulation - - - - - - 8-2 MTX5000 User Interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 ODU RF Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-3 MTX5000 Internal Software - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-3 Outdoor Unit Details - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-5 Installing Triax Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-1 Appendix Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-1 Sealing- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-1 Analog Color Bar Generator- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-1 Appendix Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-1 Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-1 Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-1 Operating Modes- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-1 Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-2 Technical Background - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-2 Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-2 General - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-2 Entering Characters- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-4 Preliminary Setup Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-4 Configure Text Line A - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-8 Configure Text Line B - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-9 Configure Control Line - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-10 Check the Configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-13 Configuration Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-16 Button Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-16 Full Character Set - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-17 Character Subsets- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-18 Delay Values - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-18 Index - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Contents Contents-4 1 Introduction For Whom Its Written 1.1 This manual is intended for use by qualified operators, installers, and service personnel. Users of this manual should already be familiar with the basic concepts of radio, video, and audio. 1.2 Related Documents MTX5000 Preset Settings (part no. 400558-1) Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations (part no. 400576-1) Channels and Frequencies Technical Information (part no. 400580-1) Ordering Documentation 1.3 Any of the above manuals may be ordered by contacting MRC Customer Service:

Business Hours: Monday - Friday 8:00 AM - 5:00 PM Eastern Time (US)

(0800 - 1700 hrs US ET) 800.490.5700 (Press 3)

+1.978.671.5700 (Press 3) customerservice@mrcbroadcast.com Telephone:

E-mail:

When contacting Customer Service, please have the following information available:

Model number and serial number of the unit. This is located on a label on the right-hand side of each unit. Approximate purchase date. Calling for Service 1.4 MRC Technical Support is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. During regular business hours you can reach our expert staff directly. Business Hours: Monday - Friday 8:00 AM - 5:00PM Eastern Time (US)

(0800 - 1700 hrs US ET) Telephone:

888.777.9221 (US and Canada)

+1.978.671.5929 technicalsupport@mrcbroadcast.com E-mail:

After regular business hours and on weekends and holidays, you can also reach our expert staff as follows:

Telephone:

888.777.9221 (US and Canada)

+1.978.671.5929 Your call will be automatically forwarded to the on-call Technical Support specialist. When contacting Technical Support, please have the following information available:

Model number and serial number of the unit. This is located on a label on the right-hand side of each unit. Approximate purchase date. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Introduction 1-1 Tell Us What You Think!

1.5 Wed appreciate any comments or suggestions you have about this manual. The more feedback we get, the better the manuals get!

If youre viewing this manual electronically, its easy - just click on the link below to send us an E-mail. Feedback Or, you can E-mail our Technical Support team at:

technicalsupport@mrcbroadcast.com Be sure to tell us what product youre writing about, and which manual. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Introduction 1-2 2 Product Description Chapter Overview 2.1 This chapter provides an overall description of the MTX5000 Transmitter System (MTX5000), its components, and its capabilities. Here are the topics covered:

Topic Description General MPEG Encoding and COFDM Transmission Analog Video Encoding and FM Modulation RF Control System Components IDU Operating Controls External Connectors Configuration Options IDU Configurations AC Power Remote Control Options Antenna Options Band and Frequency Options System Configurations Single-Band/Dual Antenna Transmission Dual-Band Non-Simultaneous Transmission Dual-Band Simultaneous Transmission Page 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-9 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 Operating System Modes General Normal User Mode System Setup Mode Description General For More Information 2.2 2.2.1 The MTX5000 is a highly reliable, flexible, and compact video microwave transmitter system with modulation and encoding functions. The MTX5000 system includes an Indoor Unit (IDU) consisting of the 19-inch wide, 2-rack unit (2RU) high, rack-

mounted transmitter and a mast-mounted Outdoor Unit (ODU), also called an RF Unit (RFU) or an RF head. For dual band MTX5000 Transmitter System configurations, the system will contain both a 2 GHz and a 7 GHz ODU. All configurations of the MTX5000 IDU provide a 70 MHz IF output and control to the 2 GHz and/or 7 GHz ODU. The MTX5000 is a rack-mounted, RF High Definition (HD)-ready video transmission system with both analog and digital modulation capabilities. The MTX5000 provides a sophisticated user interface with an intuitive keypad scheme and an adjustable color LCD display panel with touch screen control. A fully equipped MTX5000 package is HD-ready and provides a robust HD link from the field to the studio. Several digital video input formats are accepted, as well as analog composite for both COFDM (DVB-T) and analog FM transmission. In addition, the MTX5000 can accept several analog audio inputs for FM analog transmission. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Product Description 2-1 The MTX5000 has two mast-mounted ODU bands available. Consult your Sales Representative or contact the factory for the latest bands available. These ODUs contain integrated RF up-

conversion circuitry and high power RF amplifiers for maximum power and signal quality. With the new demands for digital modulation, the ODUs have been optimized for improved Modulation Error Ratio/Error Vector Magnitude (MER/EVM) performance with COFDM transmission. 2.2.2 MPEG Encoding and COFDM Transmission The MTX5000 is capable of encoding both Standard Definition

(SD) and HD video, depending upon the options contained in your MTX5000 system. Available inputs include SD Serialized Digital video (ASI-SDI), HD-SDI, and composite video. Audio input formats currently include digital AES/EBU and analog formats. Future enhancements will include AC-3 SMPTE-302. The encoder is also capable of encoding an RS-

232 signal as Wayside data. The MTX5000 is capable of generating a fully compliant DVB-T compliant output signal. This provides a robust digital link in any hostile transmission environment. Analog Video Encoding and FM Modulation 2.2.3 When in the analog FM mode, the MTX5000 will accept a standard composite video input. It will also accept analog audio inputs. The FM analog signal is useful when working with older legacy equipment or when an analog transmission is desired. The MTX5000 IDU communicates with the ODU to set operating frequencies and power levels. This interface is also used for calibration of the ODU power supply and to monitor error conditions. RF Control 2.2.4 The MTX5000 IDU (Figure 2-1) is designed to accept a variety of external video and audio signals in different digital format streams and analog signals and to provide a modulated 70 MHz IF output. Figure 2-1: MTX5000 Indoor Unit The MTX5000 IDU allows you to switch between analog and digital modes where both applications are used. The MTX5000 also provides separate video and audio or baseband composite operations. Key features of the MTX5000 IDU are as follows:

Integrated SD/HD MPEG-2/H.264 encoding technologies Switchable Analog or Digital modes SD/HD SDI interfaces with multiplexing FM transmitter modulation technology (analog) DVB-T COFDM modulation technology (digital) Video monitoring output Video and audio inputs for NTSC or PAL video/audio IF (70 MHz) signal input and monitoring signal transmission MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Product Description 2-2 Front panel keypad and touch screen display for operation and control Multiple configuration options available Built-in digital Color Bar Generator Optional analog Color Bar Generator is available. The MRC ODU (See Figure 2-2) performs the signal up-

conversion from 70 MHz IF to RF (2 GHz or 7 GHz) and provides signal amplification, as required. For dual band operation, two separate ODUs are required, one for 2 GHz operation, and one for 7 GHz operation. Figure 2-2: Outdoor Unit - Typical Figure 2-3: Typical MTX5000 Transmitter System Antenna Pan & Tilt Assembly Outdoor Unit (ODU) Conduit (Nycoil) Indoor Unit (IDU)

(Inside Vehicle) Outdoor Unit -

Typical Installation A typical installation is shown in Figure 2-3. The MTX5000 IDU is typically mounted in a standard 19-inch (48.3 cm) rack for mobile installations. The ODU is mounted on an antenna mast. System Components 2.3 The MTX5000 system consists of the IDU and the ODU(s). A typical system is shown in Figure 2-4 on page 2-4. The IDU contains the baseband circuitry, power supply, and control modules. It accepts a wide variety of audio and video inputs, both analog and digital, and generates a 70 MHz IF output. The IDU also accepts IF inputs from external modulators. The IDU can be controlled locally from the front panel controls or it can be controlled remotely. The IDU can be controlled from a PC at a remote location, such as a studio, via the PC web browser. The optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC can also be used to provide remote control of the IDU during mobile operations. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Product Description 2-3 Figure 2-4: MTX5000 System Components - Typical OmniPole Antenna Laptop PC, Remote Access Subnotebook PC, or PC RF Switch Directional Antenna

(MRC 2A20, 7A30, Ellipse 2000, etc.) Pan & Tilt Assem Outdoor RF Unit

(Upconvertor, Power Amp) Conduit (Nycoil) MTX5000 Indoor Uni

(Baseband, Audio/Vid Modules) For digital operation, the IDU is equipped with an internal MPEG/

COFDM module. The ODU contains the upconverters and the power amplifier. The ODU accepts the 70 MHz IF output from the IDU, converts the IF to the RF operating band required, and amplifies the RF output, as required. All installations will include an antenna, either directional, omnidirectional, or both. An MRC RF switch can be mounted on the antenna mast to select the antenna required. When using the mast-mounted antenna(s), a Nycoil conduit sheath covers the wiring harness between the IDU and the ODU. The wiring harness carries the DC power, 70 MHz IF, and antenna band and polarization switching control. Additional wiring is contained in the Nycoil conduit sheath for controlling the antenna pan and tilt mechanism and for implementing additional functions such as off-air monitors, mast lights, etc. 2.4 IDU Operating Controls All controls are located on the front panel of the MTX5000 IDU. There are no controls on the ODU. All transmitter functions are controlled using the color LCD display panel touch screen and/or function keys, as shown in Figure 2-5 on page 2-5. The color LCD display panel with touch screen and function keys are used to select control and diagnostic menu screens for both the IDU and the ODU. Option buttons displayed on the color LCD display panel are used to control Preset selection, RF band selection, channel selection, offset selection, antenna selection, antenna polarization, transmitter operation (on or off), power

(low or high), and to monitor the status of the IDU and ODU. The option buttons displayed on the color LCD display panel may be selected using either the color LCD display panel touch screen or the function keys. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Product Description 2-4 Figure 2-5: MTX5000 Front Panel View MTX5000 Power Switch Color LCD Display Panel with Touch Screen External Connectors 2.5 The rear panels of the MTX5000 IDU configurations contain the I/O connectors and an input fuse, as shown in Figure 2-6 on page 2-6. Connectors contained on the ODU are shown in Figure 2-7 on page 2-6. The MTX5000 system is designed to make upgrading from an older radio as easy as possible. The IDU and ODU can be ordered with a variety of connectors to plug into an existing wiring harness. Connectors available for the cable connection between the IDU and ODU are as follows:

Triax (both ends) Type N (both ends) TNC (both ends). If your MTX5000 system contains the TNC connector option on the IDU, a TNC connector must be attached to the ODU end of the cable for weather and reliability purposes. 1 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9WXYZ

*Shift 0

#Space SEL Keypad (Not Currently Operational) Function Keys All ODU configurations contain a standard Type N connector for connection to the antenna. If your MTX5000 system IDU is equipped with either Type N or TNC connectors, the IDU will contain an 8-pin Weidmuller connector to provide DC power and control to the ODU via the ODU POWER connector. If your system is equipped with Triax connectors, the 8-pin Weidmuller connector will not be present on the rear panel of the IDU. With the Triax connector option, both DC power and control are provided to the ODU via the Triax cable connected between the IDU and the ODU. If the Triax connector option is contained on your MTX5000 system, a POWER connector will not be present on the ODU. For additional information, refer to the Installation Chapter on page 6-1. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Product Description Product Description 2-5 2-5 Figure 2-6: MTX5000 IDU Rear Panel Configurations AUDIO 1 2 WAYSIDE 3 4 BB IN IF MON ASI 1 HD-SDI ASI 2 RFU POWER OUT POWER IN ETHERNET RTN DATA

+ G - + G -

+ G - + G -

ATPC SUM AES/EBU 2 1 VIDEO IN AC-3 IF IN VID MON SDI/ASI ALARM

+ G - + G -

SMPTE 302 ANT CONTROL

1

2 RFU 1 RFU 2 H V LCP ANT2 BAND2 GND

MTX5000 IDU Configuration with Triax Connectors MTX5000 IDU Configuration with Type N or TNC Connectors RFU POWER OUT ANT CONTROL

1

2 RFU 1 RFU 2 H V LCP ANT2 BAND2 GND

Figure 2-7: MTX5000 ODU Connectors T U O F R RF OUT Connector RF IN Connector I D U R F I N The IDU connects to the ODU through the wiring harness between the units. The wiring harness contains DC power, 70 MHz IF, and control for all components mounted on the top of the antenna mast. Functions and control contained in the wiring harness typically include the following:

70 MHz IF, control, and alarms between the IDU and the ODU DC power to the ODU Power and control for an RF switch to select antennas Power and control for antenna switching functions (band, polarization, and power) POWER Connector

(With TNC and Type N RF IN Connector Options Only) MTX5000 User and Technical Manual MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Product Description Product Description 2-6 2-6 Power for mast top lights Control and power for the Pan and Tilt assembly RF and control for an off-air antenna Mast top safety sensors for proximity, high voltage, etc. Since each installation may be different, the harness must be specified for each installation. The harness can be supplied by MRC, or it is often supplied by the van integrator. 2.6 MRC is constantly working to expand and upgrade the capabilities of the MTX5000. Consult your Sales Representative or contact the factory for the latest information. Configuration Options IDU Configurations 2.6.1 Your MTX5000 IDU consists of an MPEG encoder, a COFDM modulator, and an analog FMT module. AC Power 2.6.2 The MTX5000 IDU operates on the following AC power:

120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Fuse ratings for the AC power sources are listed in Table 2-1. Table 2-1: AC Fuse Ratings Operating Voltage Fuse Rating 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 3.0A SB 250V 3AG or 5 x 20 mm 1.5A SB 250V 3AG or 5 x 20 mm AC power is applied to the MTX5000 IDU, which in turn, provides DC power to the ODU via the wiring harness between them. Refer to the Installation Chapter on page 6-1 for additional information. Remote Control Options 2.6.3 For portable mobile operations, the MTX5000 system may be controlled using either a Windows-based laptop PC or by the optional Windows-based Remote Access Subnotebook PC. See Figure 2-8. Figure 2-8: Remote Access Subnotebook PC Using either PC eliminates the need for a separate panel-

mounted remote control panel to control the MTX5000 system. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Product Description 2-7 An RJ-45 crossover cable is required for connection to either PC for mobile remote control operations. The MTX5000 system may also be controlled from a Windows-

based PC at a remote location. When controlling the MTX5000 system from a remote location, the remote PC is connected to the MTX5000 system via the Ethernet. To connect Windows-based PCs to the MTX5000 system, see Select Local/Remote Operation Mode on page 3-20. To connect the optional Windows-based Remote Access Subnotebook PC to the MTX5000 system, refer to the Remote Access Subnotebook PC Operators Guide, part number 400573-1, provided with the optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC. Information and procedures required to control the MTX5000 system for either portable mobile applications or for remote location operations are provided in Using the MTX5000 in Remote Mode on page 3-60 and Remote Location Operations on page 3-67. Procedures required to control the MTX5000 system using either a Windows-based laptop PC, the optional Windows-based Remote Access Subnotebook PC, or a Windows-based PC at a remote location are identical. Antenna Options 2.6.4 The MTX5000 system is fully compatible with a variety of antennas, including:

MRC ProStar, models

2A20 and 2A20SS (2 GHz) 7A30 and 7A30SS (7 GHz) 2A20/7A30 (dual band 2 & 7 GHz) 2A20/7A30SS (dual band 2 & 7 GHz, solid state switching) MRC Ellipse 2000 MRC OmniPole Omnidirectional. Switching functions for band and antenna polarization are controlled from the front panel of the IDU. If your installation involves more than one antenna, this can be easily accommodated by using an MRC RF Switch. The RF Switch is also controlled from the front panel of the IDU. Band and Frequency Options 2.6.5 The MTX5000 system is designed to cover one or more bands. It can be ordered as a single-band unit or as a dual-band configuration to cover the following bands. 2 GHz (17 MHz) 2 GHz (12 MHz) 7 GHz Lower. Band and frequency information is stored in the RFU, which means switching bands after installation is very simple: just plug in the RFU for the new band and the IDU will automatically configure itself for the new band. Within these bands, channels can be pre-programmed at the factory to match either the U.S. broadcast channel plan or a plan specified by the customer. 2.7 The MTX5000 system provides several antenna configuration options to transmit using either an omni antenna or a directional antenna, in either single-band or dual-band operation. System Configurations MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Product Description 2-8 2.7.1 Single-Band/Dual Antenna Transmission The antenna configuration for single-band transmission using either an omni antenna or a directional antenna with one IDU and one ODU is shown in Figure 2-9. The RF switch allows switching between the two types of antennas. Figure 2-9: Single-Band Transmission with Two Antennas Dual-Band Non-Simultaneous 2.7.2 Transmission Figure 2-10 illustrates the antenna configuration for non-

simultaneous transmission using one IDU and two ODUs. In this example, the ODUs are operating on 2 GHz and 7 GHz bands. In addition, an RF switch allows switching between an omni and a directional antenna. Directional OmniPole Figure 2-10: Dual Band Non-Simultaneous Transmission RF SWITCH OmniPole Directional MTX5000 ODU 70 MHz IF

+ CONTROL

+ POWER MTX5000 IDU MPEG Encoder &

COFDM Modulator MRC RF SWITCH ANTENNA SWITCH POWER &

CONTROL NYCOIL CONDUIT MTX5000 ODU 1.99-2.5 GHz POLARIZATION SWITCH MTX5000 ODU 6.4-7.1 GHz ANTENNA SWITCH POWER/

CONTROL 70 MHz IF

+ POWER

+ CONTROL MTX5000 IDU MPEG Encoder &

COFDM Modulator 70 MHz IF

+ POWER

+ CONTROL NYCOIL CONDUIT MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Product Description 2-9 Dual-Band Simultaneous Transmission 2.7.3 Figure 2-11 illustrates the antenna configuration for simultaneous transmissions using two IDUs and two ODUs. In this example, the ODUs are operating on the 2 GHz and 7 GHz bands. In Figure 2-11: Dual-Band Simultaneous Transmission RF SWITCH OmniPole Directional addition, an RF switch allows switching one of the ODUs between an omni and a directional antenna. MTX5000 ODU 1.99-2.5 GHz MTX5000 ODU 6.4-7.1 GHz ANTENNA SWITCH POWER & CONTROL 70 MHz IF

+ POWER

+CONTROL POLARIZATION SWITCH 70 MHz IF

+ POWER

+CONTROL NYCOIL CONDUIT MTX5000 IDU MPEG Encoder &

COFDM Modulator Analog Video 2 Analog Audio Digital Video + Audio SDI DVB/ASI MTX5000 IDU MPEG Encoder &

COFDM Modulator Analog Video 2 Analog Audio Digital Video + Audio SDI DVB/ASI MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Product Description 2-10 Operating System Modes General 2.8 2.8.1 The MTX5000 IDU offers two levels of operating system modes, designed to match the needs of different personnel. These operating modes are the Normal User Mode and the System Setup Mode. Regardless if you are operating in the normal user mode or in the system setup mode, you can read the current settings using the front panel color LCD display panel with either the touch screen or the function keys. The MTX5000 IDU internal software automatically detects what hardware is installed in the system and applies the appropriate configuration. The MTX5000 IDU also offers the ability to operate the system either locally using the IDU front panel color LCD display panel with either the touch screen or the function keys, or remotely via an Ethernet connection to a PC at a remote location. Normal User Mode 2.8.2 For the field operator, the MTX5000 IDU provides multiple Presets that can be selected from the front panel. Each Preset is configured with options applicable to the configuration of your MTX5000 IDU. Each Preset controls key parameters such as modulation and audio and video settings. See Using the MTX5000 Screens in Local Mode on page 3-10 for additional information. All normal user mode operations may be performed either locally at the IDU or remotely via the Ethernet from a PC at a remote location. Normal user mode operations may also be performed remotely during mobile operations using the optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC. See Using the MTX5000 in Remote Mode on page 3-60 for additional information. System Setup Mode 2.8.3 For the advanced operator and technical staff, the MTX5000 IDU allows password control of parameters in the MTX5000. For additional information on the system setup mode, see Advanced Operations on page 5-1. System setup mode operations may be performed locally at the MTX5000 IDU using the front panel color LCD display panel with either the touch screen or the function keys or remotely using the remote web page software. 2.9 Additional detailed technical information about the MTX5000 is listed below:

For More Information Topic Routine Operation Advanced Operation Installation Connections to other equipment Supported Repairs and Repair Parts Theory of Operation Chapter See Chapter 3, Routine Operation See Chapter 5, Advanced Operations See Chapter 6, Installation See Chapter 6, Installation See Chapter 7, Replacement Parts and Supported Repairs See Chapter 8, Theory of Operation MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Product Description 2-11 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Product Description 2-12 3 Routine Operation Chapter Overview 3.1 This chapter provides basic information that will enable you to operate your MTX5000 Transmitter System (MTX5000). Here are the topics covered:

Topic Overview of Controls, Indicators, and Connectors MTX5000 IDU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors MTX5000 ODU Connectors Preparing for Operation Mobile Installation Powering the MTX5000 System Using the MTX5000 Screens in Local Mode Overview Main Screen Color LCD Display Panel Touch Screen and Function Keys Navigation Between Main and Status Screens Transmitter Operation Buttons Local/Remote Control Status Button Setup Screen Options Radio Screen Options Select Local/Remote Operation Mode MTX5000 Local Operations Select Preset Page 3-2 3-2 3-6 3-7 3-7 3-7 3-10 3-10 3-11 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-20 3-23 3-24 Select RF Band Select/Customize Operating Channels Select Channel Offset Select Antenna Select Antenna Polarization Enable/Disable Transmitter Select High/Low Power Mode Monitor ODU Status Monitor IDU Status Monitor SUM Errors Monitor Current Preset Status Settings Perform PA Voltage Adjust Setup Perform RF Level Adjust Select Color Bar Generator Mode Set Time and Date Perform IDU Diagnostics Review System Information Set Last PA State Using the MTX5000 in Remote Mode Overview Remote Screen Display Remote Configuration Setting Selections Transmitter Controls Alerts Remote Location Operations Select Preset Select RF Band and Channel Plan Select Operating Channel 3-27 3-30 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-38 3-44 3-49 3-52 3-54 3-56 3-57 3-58 3-60 3-60 3-61 3-64 3-66 3-66 3-67 3-67 3-68 3-69 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-1 Select Antenna Select Frequency Offset Select Antenna Polarization Enable/Disable Transmitter Select High/Low RF Power Mode Monitor Alerts 3-70 3-70 3-70 3-71 3-71 3-72 3-73 Overview of Controls, Indicators, Routine vs. Advanced Operation Configuration Settings 3.2 and Connectors This section describes the controls, indicators, and connectors used on the MTX5000 Indoor Unit (IDU) and Outdoor Unit

(ODU). 3.2.1 MTX5000 IDU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Each of the controls, indicators, and connectors contained on the MTX5000 IDU are described in the following paragraphs. Controls and indicators contained on all configurations of the IDU are identical and are identified in Figure 3-1. Controls, indicators, and connectors contained on the front panel of the IDU are described in the following paragraphs. Topic Power Switch Color LCD Display Panel with Touch Screen Alphanumeric Keypad Function keys USB 2.0 Connector Page 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 Figure 3-1: MTX5000 IDU Front Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connector MTX5000 1 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9WXYZ

*Shift 0

#Space SEL Power Switch Color LCD Display Panel with Touch Screen Alphanumeric Keypad Function Keys USB 2.0 Connector MTX5000 User and Technical Manual MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation Routine Operation 3-2 3-2 Select local or remote operating mode. All option selections are made using the color LCD display panel and either the color LCD display panel touch screen or the function keys, as required. Alphanumeric Keypad (The front panel alphanumeric keypad is currently inactive.) Function keys The Left, Right, Up, and Down arrow keys may be used to select options displayed on the color LCD display panel. Pressing the SEL (select) key selects the option button required after the option button has been selected using the arrow keys. For ease of operation in low-light conditions, the keys are illuminated when power is applied to the unit. USB 2.0 Connector The front panel USB 2.0 connector provides the connection required to upgrade software into the MTX5000 using a USB flash drive and a USB-A to USB-B adapter. Rear panel connectors contained on the IDU are shown in Figure 3-2 on page 3-4 and are described in the following paragraphs. Power Switch The power switch is located on the front panel and controls application of power to the MTX5000 system. When power is applied to the MTX5000 system, the symbol on the switch illuminates. Color LCD Display Panel with Touch Screen The front panel color LCD display panel with touch screen is mounted on a tilting mechanism that allows you to adjust the viewing angle, based on the rack-mounted location and lighting conditions. The color LCD display panel is used in conjunction with the touch screen or function keys to make option selections displayed on the color LCD display panel. The color LCD display panel provides user interface control of the MTX5000 IDU and provides full monitoring capability for the system. The color LCD display panel, in conjunction with the touch screen or function keys, allows you to perform the following:

Recall Presets Select RF head and/or RF band Select operating channel Select channel offset Select between two antennas Set antenna polarization Select between low and high power operation of the transmitter Turn the transmitter on and off Monitor error conditions within the MTX5000 IDU and the ODU Monitor RF power output Monitor individual Preset settings MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-3 Figure 3-2: MTX5000 IDU Rear Panel Connectors - Typical ETHERNET WAYSIDE AUDIO 1 thru 4 BB IN IF MON ASI 1 HD-SDI ASI 2 AUDIO 1 2 WAYSIDE 3 4 BB IN IF MON ASI 1 HD-SDI ASI 2 RFU POWER OUT POWER IN ETHERNET RTN DATA

+ G - + G -

+ G - + G -

ATPC SUM AES/EBU 2 1 VIDEO IN AC-3 IF IN VID MON SDI/ASI ALARM

+ G - + G -

SMPTE 302 ANT CONTROL

1

2 RFU 1 RFU 2 H V LCP ANT2 BAND2 GND

AC Power Fuse

(Behind Cover) POWER IN RTN DATA ATPC SUM ALARM AES/EBU 1 and 2 VIDEO IN AC-3 SMPTE 302 IF IN SDI/ASI ANT CONTROL RFU 1

(Triax Option) VID MON RFU 2

(Triax Option) RFU POWER OUT (With Type N or TNC RFU 1 and RFU 2 Connector Options Only) RFU POWER OUT ANT CONTROL

1

2 RFU 1 RFU 2 H V LCP ANT2 BAND2 GND

RFU 1 (Type N or TNC Options) RFU 2 (Type N or TNC Options) Topics covered are as follows:

Topic ETHERNET Connector WAYSIDE Connector AUDIO 1 thru 4 Connectors BB IN Connector IF MON Connector Page 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 ASI 1 Connector HD-SDI Connector ASI 2 Connector RFU POWER OUT Connector AC Power Fuse POWER IN Connector Assembly RTN DATA Connector 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation Routine Operation 3-4 3-4 ATPC Connector SUM ALARM Connector AES/EBU Connectors VIDEO IN Connector AC-3 SMPTE 302 Connector IF IN Connector VID MON Connector SDI/ASI Connector ANT CONTROL Connector RFU 1 Connector RFU 2 Connector 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 ETHERNET Connector The ETHERNET RJ-45 connector provides connection via your web browser to a PC at a remote location or to the optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC for remote control of the MTX5000 IDU. WAYSIDE Connector The WAYSIDE 9-pin male D-connector provides connection for the MPEG encoder Wayside input data. AUDIO 1 thru 4 Connectors The AUDIO 1 thru 4 male 3-pin Weidmuller connectors provide analog/digital switchable stereo audio signal inputs to the FMT or MPEG modules. BB IN Connector The BB IN 75 ohm BNC female connector provides baseband input video from an external baseband source. IF MON Connector The IF MON 75 ohm BNC female connector provides a 70 MHz output for external signal monitoring purposes. ASI 1 Connector (The 75 ohm BNC female ASI 1 connector is currently inactive.) HD-SDI Connector The HD-SDI 75 ohm BNC female connector provides the HD-SDI data stream input to the MTX5000. ASI 2 Connector (The 75 ohm BNC female ASI 2 connector is currently inactive.) RFU POWER OUT Connector The RFU POWER OUT 8-pin Weidmuller male connector is present only if the RFU 1 and RFU 2 connectors are type N or TNC connectors. The RFU POWER OUT connector is not present on IDU configurations that have Triax RFU 1 and RFU 2 connectors. The RFU POWER OUT connector provides DC power to Outdoor Units (ODU) RFU 1 and RFU 2 via DC on coax. AC Power Fuse The AC power fuse provides AC input power protection for the unit. POWER IN Connector Assembly The POWER IN connector assembly provides connection to the removable external AC power cable. The AC power connector contains the AC input power fuse. RTN DATA Connector (The RTN DATA RJ-45 connector is currently inactive.) ATPC Connector (The ATPC 9-pin male D-connector is currently inactive.) SUM ALARM Connector (The SUM ALARM 2-pin male Weidmuller connector is currently inactive.) AES/EBU Connectors The AES/EBU 1 and 2 male 3-pin Weidmuller connectors provide channel 1 and 2 external AES/

EBU digital audio inputs to the unit. VIDEO IN Connector The 75 ohm BNC female VIDEO IN connector receives the analog video input to the unit. AC-3 SMPTE 302 Connector (The AC-3 SMPTE 302 75 ohm BNC female connector is currently inactive.) IF IN Connector The IF IN 75 ohm BNC female connector provides the 70 MHz IF input to the unit. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-5 VID MON Connector The VIDEO MON 75 ohm BNC female connector provides a video output for external monitoring purposes. SDI/ASI Connector The SDI/ASI 75 ohm BNC female connector provides SDI and ASI inputs to the unit. ANT CONTROL Connector The ANT CONTROL 7-pin male Weidmuller connector provides control for antenna polarization, antenna band selection, and the RF switch. The connector also provides DC power for the antenna and the RF switch. RFU 1 Connector The RFU 1 connector will either be a Triax, type N, or TNC, depending upon the options ordered with your MTX5000 system. This connector provides 70 MHz IF output to RF unit 1. If your IDU contains a Triax RFU 1 connector, the RFU POWER OUT connector will not be present. If your IDU contains a Triax connector, 70 MHz IF will be supplied to RFU 1 and DC power to RFU 1 will be supplied via DC on coax from the IDU. If your IDU contains a type N or TNC RFU 1 connector, 70 MHz IF will be supplied to RFU 1 and DC power to RFU 1 will be supplied via the RFU POWER OUT connector. RFU 2 Connector The RFU 2 connector will either be a Triax, type N, or TNC, depending upon the options ordered with your MTX5000 system. This connector provides 70 MHz IF output to RF unit 2. If your IDU contains a Triax RFU 2 connector, the RFU POWER OUT connector will not be present. If your IDU contains a Triax connector, 70 MHz IF will be supplied to RFU 2 and DC power to RFU 2 will be supplied via DC on coax from the IDU. If your MTX5000 contains a type N or TNC RFU 1 connector, 70 MHz IF will be supplied to RFU 2 and DC power to RFU 2 will be supplied via the RFU POWER OUT connector. 3.2.2 MTX5000 ODU Connectors Controls and indicators contained on the MTX5000 ODU (See Figure 3-3) are described in the following paragraphs. Topics covered are as follows:

Topic RF OUT Connector RF IN Connector POWER Connector Figure 3-3: MTX5000 ODU Connectors T U O F R RF OUT Connector Page 3-6 3-6 3-7 POWER Connector RF IN Connector I D U R F I N RF OUT Connector The Type N RF OUT connector provides the RF output connection to the antenna or antenna switch. This connector is a type N connector for all configurations of the ODU. RF IN Connector The RF IN connector is either a Type N, TNC, or Triax, as applicable to the options ordered with your MTX5000 system. The RF IN connector receives 70 MHz IF from the IDU for up-conversion to the 2 GHz or 7 GHz bands and amplification, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-6 Preparing for Operation If the RF IN connector option is a Type N or TNC, DC power to the ODU is provided from the IDU via the ODU POWER connector. If the RF IN connector is a Triax connector, DC power and control is provided to the ODU from the IDU via the RF IN connector. POWER Connector The POWER connector receives DC power from the IDU via the wiring harness between the IDU and the ODU. The POWER connector is present on the ODU only if your MTX5000 system contains either the TNC or Type N RF IN connector options. 3.3 The procedures required to use the color LCD display panel with touch screen and function keys locally, in the normal user mode of operation, are contained in the following paragraphs. The color LCD display panel is used in conjunction with the color LCD display panel touch screen or the function keys to make selections displayed on the color LCD display panel. The normal user mode is designed for you to recall existing system Presets in order to properly transmit the video stream back to the studio from a remote location. Along with recalling a Preset that is appropriate for a given broadcast situation, you can select between two antennas, select between two ODUs (if your system contains two ODUs), select an operating band, select a channel within the operating band, select a channel offset, and select antenna polarization. You can also select between high and low power operation of the transmitter, you can turn the transmitter on and off, and you can monitor any fault conditions that may exist within the MTX5000 IDU and/or ODU. When power is applied to the MTX5000, it automatically enters the local normal user operation mode. The MTX5000 will remember the last settings that were in use, regardless if they were a stored Preset or user-defined settings, and will return to those settings. If the MTX5000 was transmitting when power was removed, the IDU will not automatically return to the transmit mode. If the MTX5000 was in the remote mode when power was removed, the IDU will not return to the remote mode. 3.3.1 Mobile Installation For mobile applications, the MTX5000 is typically mounted in a bulkhead or compartment in a 19-inch (48.3 cm) rack and the ODU is mounted on the vehicle antenna mast. The cabling is permanently installed and power comes from the mobile AC power source. Each installation or deployment will have its own specific tasks according to the application and the installed hardware options. For additional information, refer to the Installation section on page 6-1. 3.3.2 Powering the MTX5000 System CAUTION Corruption of software contained in the MTX5000 may occur if proper power down or power up of the MTX5000 does not occur. The MTX5000 must be properly powered up and powered down to prevent possible corruption of the software contained in the radio. It will take approximately 60 seconds for the MTX5000 to power up properly. As with a personal computer, it takes time for the internal software to become initialized and the Main screen to be displayed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-7 When the power switch is pressed to on and power is applied to the MTX5000, a blank display initially appears on the color LCD display panel. After a short delay, the introduction screen will be displayed and a status bar will appear on the introduction screen. Then, after a very short delay, the Main screen will be displayed. Power to the MTX5000 must never be cycled off and on without a minimum delay of 10 seconds between removal of power and application of power. Just like a personal computer, a proper shutdown of the MTX5000 is required to prevent corruption of software. CAUTION The MTX5000 must never be powered down when the progress bar is displayed. The software will become corrupted and the MTX5000 may have to be returned to the factory for repair. Conversely, power to the MTX5000 must never be cycled to on and then immediately to off, as corruption of software contained in the radio may also occur. The MTX5000 must only be powered down when the Main screen is displayed. CAUTION Under no circumstances should you remove and re-apply power to the MTX5000 when the progress bar is displayed during a self-

recovery. The software will become corrupted and the MTX5000 may have to be returned to the factory for repair. If power to the MTX5000 is lost and is then re-applied immediately or if the power switch is set to off and then to on in less than 10 seconds, the MTX5000 internal software will attempt a self-recovery when the power switch is set to on. During the self-recovery process, the blank screen will initially appear, followed by the introduction screen. The progress bar will appear on the introduction screen, but progress will be much slower than during a normal power up. Do not interrupt the self-

recovery process by cycling power to off and then to on, as software corruption will occur. Power Up The steps required to properly power up the MTX5000 system are contained in the following steps. CAUTION If power is accidentally lost or if the power switch is pressed to off, do not immediately power up the MTX5000 again. Internal software corruption may occur if power is applied immediately after a power loss or if the power switch is pressed to off and immediately back to on. To avoid possible software corruption, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before applying power or before pressing the power switch to on. Note If you are unsure of the power requirements or connections to the MTX5000, refer to the Installation section on page 6-1. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-8 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Verify the power cable is properly connected to the MTX5000 IDU rear panel AC POWER IN connector. Verify all coaxial cables and cable connectors are properly connected to the rear panel connectors and verify the ODU or ODUs, as applicable to your system options, are properly connected. Connect the MTX5000 IDU power cable to AC power of the correct type and voltage. Verify the power source is turned on. Press the power switch and observe the symbol on the switch illuminates. Notes When power is applied to the MTX5000, it will automatically enter the local normal user mode of operation. The MTX5000 will return to the last settings that were in use when the unit was powered down, but the MTX5000 will not resume transmitting if the unit was transmitting when it was powered down. If the MTX5000 was in the remote mode when power was removed, the IDU will not return to the remote mode. 6. The normal power-up sequence is as follows:

- After approximately 30 seconds, the introduction screen will be displayed on the color LCD display panel. See Figure 3-4.

- A progress bar will also be displayed indicating power up progress and, approximately 30 seconds after the introduction screen is displayed, the Main screen will be displayed on the color LCD display panel. See Figure 3-5. Figure 3-4: Introduction Screen Progress Bar (Typical) Figure 3-5: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L CAUTION Always wait a minimum of 5 seconds after the Main screen is displayed following power up before selecting a Preset. 7. Select the Preset required per Select Preset on page 3-24. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-9 Power Down The steps required to properly power down the MTX5000 system are contained in the following steps. CAUTION To allow proper shutdown of MTX5000 internal software, the progress bar must not be displayed when the power switch is pressed to off. Failure to properly power down the MTX5000 may corrupt the internal software. 1. Verify the Main screen is displayed on the color LCD display panel. See Figure 3-6. Figure 3-6: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 2. 3. Press the power switch and observe the symbol on the switch goes off. Set the power source off, as required. Using the MTX5000 Screens in 3.4 Local Mode Once the MTX5000 is powered up, you will be able to monitor and/or change certain operating parameters through the use of the options displayed on the color LCD display panel. All options are dependent upon the actual configuration of your MTX5000 and the Preset settings. The sections listed in Table 3-1 describe use of the screens displayed on the color LCD display panel in the local operating mode. Table 3-1: Using MTX5000 Menus Topic Overview Main Screen Color LCD Display Panel Touch Screen and Function Keys Navigation Between Main and Status Screens Transmitter Operation Buttons Local/Remote Control Status Button Setup Screen Options Radio Screen Options Page 3-10 3-11 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 3-16 3-16 3-17 Overview 3.4.1 As you use the MTX5000, you will interact exclusively with the color LCD display panel. All operations are performed using either the color LCD display panel touch screen or function keys to select options. See Figure 3-7 on page 3-11. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-10 Figure 3-7: MTX5000 Front Panel Color LCD Display Panel with Touch Screen Function Keys MTX5000 1 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9WXYZ

*Shift 0

#Space SEL 3.4.2 Main Screen The Main screen is your starting point for navigating through the various status screens. The Main screen provides access to the current values of the selected Preset options. The top level menu hierarchy is illustrated in Figure 3-8 on page 3-12. From the top level menu page, you will descend into the lower levels of the menu hierarchy until the operational parameter required is reached. All routine operations and options are described in the following paragraphs. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-11 Figure 3-8: Top Level Main Menu Hierarchy M ain Page Preset R F B and R F O utput C hannel O ffset A ntenna A nt. P ol. PA Status Setup R F O D U ID U SU M L/R P reset R F B and R F O utput C hannel O ffset A ntenna A nt. P ol. P A Select Preset A thru J or Preset 1 thru XX , as required S elect R FU 1 or R FU 2, as required M onitor current R F output level S elect channel 1 thru 10 (2 G H z band) or channel 1 thru 14 (7 G H z band), as required Select (m inus), 0 (center), or +

(plus), as required S elect A nt. 1 or A nt. 2, as required Select H , V , R C , or LC , as required S elect P A or PA O ff, as required S tatus Setup R F O D U ID U S U M L/R O bserve current Preset settings S elect U ser or R adio, as required Select L (Low ) or H (H igh) pow er, as required M onitor current O D U status M onitor current ID U status M onitor current sum m ary (SU M ) alarm status U ser option is Passw ord protected . See A dvanced O perations C hapter R adio option selected Select L (Local) operation m ode. R (R em ote) m ode can only be selected in Setup m ode Each menu page has multiple selections available. Once you have navigated to the menu page required, you can observe or change an operating parameter, as required. To observe or change a parameter, different screens are displayed, indicating the different options available. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation Routine Operation 3-12 3-12 Color LCD Display Panel 3.4.3 All menus and screens displayed on the color LCD display panel consist of active option buttons, setting indicators, or status indicators. See Figure 3-9. The currently selected active option button will be blue with white text. Active option buttons that may be selected are grey with black text or white text on the blue background (e.g., the Preset option button). Grey option buttons with dark grey text are inactive and cannot be selected. Figure 3-9: Color LCD Display Panel - Typical Active Option Buttons (Blue Background) - Typical Current Preset Description - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Setting Indicators

(Black Outlines) -

Typical Status Indicators PA Operation Button Navigation Option Buttons - Typical Local/Remote Status Button On the Main screen, a brief description of the currently selected Preset is displayed in white with red text, surrounded by a black outline. 3.4.4 Touch Screen and Function Keys CAUTION Avoid damage to the color LCD display panel!

The color LCD display panel touch screen may be damaged if a sharp, hard-pointed object, such as a pencil or a pen, is used to select the displayed options. Touch screen options must only be selected using your fingers, a soft-pointed stylus, or the front panel function keys. Damage to the color LCD display panel caused by using a hard-pointed object or other misuse may void your warranty on the MTX5000 IDU. The color LCD display panel touch screen or function keys may be used to select active option buttons displayed on the color LCD display panel. To select a specific active option button using the touch screen, simply touch the required active option button on the color LCD display panel to select the option. When active option buttons are selected, the option button will change from grey to blue and the text color will change accordingly. Setting indicators are white with black text, surrounded by a black outline. Active option buttons are selected using either the color LCD display panel touch screen or the function keys. To use the function keys (See Figure 3-10 on page 3-14) to select a specific active option, use the Up, Down, Left, and Right function keys to select the required active option button, press MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-13 the SEL (select) function key, and observe the required option screen is displayed. Figure 3-10: Function Keys Function Keys 1 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9WXYZ

*Shift 0

#Space SEL Navigation Between Main and Status 3.4.5 Screens Different Status screens are displayed depending upon the Preset mode (Analog or Digital) selected. At the bottom of each Main screen, navigation option buttons are provided that point to the Status screen(s). When a navigation option button that points to a Status screen is selected, the applicable Status screen will be displayed. At the bottom of most Status screens, navigation option buttons pointing to the Main screen and the next Status screen, if any, are provided. When navigation option buttons pointing to the Main or Status screens are selected, the applicable screen will be displayed. Transmitter Operation Buttons 3.4.6 Transmitter operation buttons are displayed on most screens to indicate or to change the current state of the transmitter. Transmitter operation buttons are described in the following paragraphs. PA Operation Button The PA operation button status indicator is blue when selected, is labelled PA Off when the transmitter is off, indicates PA with an amber button in warm-up mode, and is green and is labelled PA On when the transmitter is on

(transmitting). When the PA operation button is selected using the touch screen or the function keys and SEL key, the state of the transmitter (PA On or PA Off) will change. The PA status indicator will then change to the alternate green (on) or grey (off) indicator, as applicable. RF Operation Button The RF operation button will display a blue background when selected. The operation button will display a yellow status indicator labelled L (low power) when the transmitter is operating in the low power mode and will display a green status indicator labelled H (high power) when the transmitter is operating in the high power mode. When the RF operation button is selected using the touch screen or the function keys and SEL key, the functional state of the transmitter will change and the RF status indicator will change to the alternate yellow (low power) or green (high power) status indicator, indicating the current state of the transmitter. ODU Status Button The ODU status button displays the current Outdoor Unit (ODU) alarms. The ODU status button will display a green status indicator to indicate no alarm conditions exist in the ODU. The ODU status button will display a yellow status indicator if a minor alarm is detected that does not adversely affect transmit operations. The ODU status button will display a red status indicator if the ODU is reporting at least one major alarm that adversely affects transmit operations. When the ODU status button is selected using the touch screen or the function keys and SEL key, the ODU Status screen (See Figure 3-11 on page 3-15) will be displayed indicating the current MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-14 ODU alarms. If no alarms are present, the dialog box will indicate No Errors. If alarms are present, the alarms will be listed in the dialog box. See Error Messages on page 4-1 for a list of possible alarms that may be listed in the dialog box. The screen contains an OK option button that, when selected, removes the screen from the display. Figure 3-11: ODU Status Dialog Box - Typical O DU Status xxxxxxxxxxx OK IDU Status Button The IDU status button displays the current condition of the Indoor Unit (IDU). The IDU status button will display a green status indicator indicating no alarm conditions exist in the IDU. The IDU status button will display a yellow status indicator if a minor alarm is detected that does not adversely affect transmit operations. The IDU status button will display a red status indicator if the IDU is reporting at least one major alarm that adversely affects transmit operations. When the IDU status button is selected using the touch screen or the function keys and SEL key, the IDU Status screen (See Figure 3-12) will be displayed indicating the current status of the IDU. Figure 3-12: IDU Status Dialog Box - Typical IDU Status xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx OK If no alarms are present, the dialog box will indicate No Errors. If alarms are present, the alarms will be listed in the dialog box. See Error Messages on page 4-1 for a list of possible alarms that may be listed in the dialog box. The screen contains an OK option button that, when selected, removes the screen from the display. SUM Status Button The SUM status button displays the summary alarm status. The SUM status button will display a green status indicator to indicate no alarms exist in the MTX5000 system. The SUM status button will display a yellow status indicator if a minor IDU and/or ODU alarm is detected that does not adversely affect transmit operations. The SUM option button will display a red status indicator if the IDU and/or ODU is reporting at least one major alarm that adversely affects transmit operations. The SUM status button will not display a red status indicator for all alarm conditions reported by the ODU or the IDU. Only alarm conditions that are considered major to the operation of the transmitter will change the state of the SUM status button status indicator to red. When the SUM status button is selected using the touch screen or the function keys and SEL key, the Summary Alarm screen

(See Figure 3-13 on page 3-16) will be displayed indicating the current status of the MTX5000 system. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-15 Figure 3-13: Summary Alarm Dialog Box - Typical Summary Alarm xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx OK If no alarms are present, the dialog box will indicate No Errors. If alarms are present, the IDU and/or ODU alarms will be listed in the dialog box. See Error Messages on page 4-1 for a list of possible alarms that may be listed in the dialog box. The screen contains an OK option button that, when selected, removes the screen from the display. Local/Remote Control Status Button 3.4.7 The Main page local/remote L/R status button indicates the MTX5000 is in either the local operation mode or in the remote operation mode. When the L option is displayed, the status indicator will be green. When the R option is selected, the status indicator will be amber. When the option button is in the L mode, all control operations must be performed at the MTX5000. When in the R mode and the MTX5000 is connected via your web browser to a PC at a remote location or to the optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC during mobile operations, the operations must be performed at the remote PC. You can connect to the MTX5000 from a remote location when the MTX5000 is in either the local or remote operation mode. If you are connected to the MTX5000 via your web browser from a remote location or to the optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC and the MTX5000 is in the local operation mode, you can monitor status settings from the remote location, but no settings may be changed from the remote PC. You must be in the remote operation mode to monitor and control the MTX5000 remotely. To select the remote operation mode, you must use the Setup screens. To change from the remote mode to the local mode, you must select the Main screen L/R status button. Selection of the local/remote operating mode can only be performed at the MTX5000. You cannot change the local/

remote operating mode from the remote location. For information on using the MTX5000 in the remote operating mode, see Using the MTX5000 in Remote Mode on page 3-60. Setup Screen Options 3.4.8 The Main screen Setup option button and the associated setup option screens are described in the following paragraphs. Setup Screen The Main screen Setup option button provides you with access to the Setup screen when the Setup option button is selected. See Figure 3-14. Figure 3-14: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-16 The Setup screen provides User, Radio, and Main option buttons. The option buttons are described in the following paragraphs. Main Option Button Selection of the Main option button provides return from the Setup screen to the Main screen. User Option Button The User option button is password-

controlled and provides access to custom radio Preset settings. For information on the User option button, see Advanced Operations on page 5-1. Radio Option Button Selection of the Setup screen Radio option button provides entry into the Radio screen. See Figure 3-15. Figure 3-15: Radio Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next Back Option Button Selection of the Radio screen Back option button provides return from the Radio screen to the Setup screen. Main Option Button Selection of the Radio screen Main option button provides return from the Radio screen to the Main screen. Next Option Button Selection of the Radio screen Next option button takes you to the Radio- 2 screen. See Figure 3-16. Figure 3-16: Radio - 2 Screen Radio - 2 Presets Option Remote Ctrl Option PA State Option Load Presets from File Save Presets to File Restore Presets to Defaults Back Main Radio Screen Options 3.4.9 The option buttons contained on the Radio screen are described in the following paragraphs. Network Config Option Button When the Radio screen Network Config option button is selected, the Network Config screen is displayed. See Figure 3-17. Figure 3-17: Network Config Screen Network Config Radio Network File Network Trap Config Back Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-17 When the Network Config screen Radio Network option button is selected, the Radio Network screen is displayed. See Figure 3-18. Figure 3-18: Radio Network Screen - Typical Radio Network IP Address 10.4.3.213 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 Gateway 10.4.1.1 DNS Server 10.4.1.21 Back Main Selection of the Radio IP, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server option buttons allows you to change the network addresses required to operate your MTX5000 System from a remote location. Any changes to your network addresses must be coordinated with your Network Administrator. Calibration Option Button When the Setup screen Calibration option button is selected, the PA Voltage Adjust Setup screen will be displayed. See Figure 3-19. The PA Voltage Adjust Setup screen provides you with the ability to calibrate the PA DC power for individual ODUs (RF Units), as applicable to the options contained in your MTX5000 system, by selecting the Start option button. The Factory option button is password-protected for factory use only. Figure 3-19: PA Voltage Adjust Setup Screen This process will allow you to calibrate the PA DC voltage for each specific frequency band. Once you have the Radio connected to the ODU and are ready to start calibration, Press the START Button below Start

<-Previous Main Factory->

Time & Date Option Button When the Date & Time option button is selected, the Time/Date screen is displayed. See Figure 3-20. This screen allows you to set the current time and date. Figure 3-20: Date & Time Screen - Typical Time / Date Tue Mar 17, 2009 08:30:30 Date Year 2009 Month 3 Day Time Hour 8 Min. 30 Sec. 17 30 Submit Main Cancel Level Adjust Option Button When the Setup screen Level Adjust option button is selected, the RF Output Level Adjust screen will be displayed. See Figure 3-21 on page 3-19. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-18 Figure 3-21: RF Output Level Adjust Screen Figure 3-22: Diagnostics Screen - Typical RF Output Level Adjust Attenuation Output Power Auto 40.0 dBm Back Main The RF Output Level Adjust screen is used to adjust the RF power output level, as applicable to the options contained in your MTX5000 system. The Attenuation level and the resulting Output Power level are adjusted by selecting the Attenuation Up or Down arrow option keys, as required, using either the touch screen or function keys and SEL key to toggle through the Attenuation level options. License Key Option Button The License Key option button allows you to add optional factory licensed options to your MTX5000 IDU without having to return your IDU to the factory for upgrade. This option button should only be used by the technical staff. In order to add a licensed option to your MTX5000 IDU, you must purchase the license key applicable to the option required. This license key is available only from MRC. For information on adding licensed features to your MTX5000 IDU, see License Manager on page 5-117. Diagnostics Option Button This option is provided to assist in troubleshooting the IDU. See Figure 3-22. Diagnostics IDU +24V +26.41V IDU +12V +13.12V IDU -12V -13.20V IDU +5.5V +5.3V IDU Fan monitor 329.28mA IDU Temperature +0.00oC Back Color Bars Option Button When the Color Bars option button is selected, the Color Bars screen will be displayed. See Figure 3-23. Figure 3-23: Color Bars Screen Color Bars Off On A Gen A Stby Back Main Note A digital color bar generator is contained in each MTX5000 IDU. An optional analog color bar generator is also available. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-19 The Color Bar Generator (CBG) has four operating modes that may be selected as follows:

Off - Color bars and audio test tones are turned off. On - Color bars and audio test tones are continuously turned on. This mode should be used for test or troubleshooting only. A Gen (Auto Generated) - If a loss of video signal occurs, color bars and/or audio test tones are transmitted after a specified delay. A Stby (Auto Standby) - If a loss of video signal occurs, the transmitter is automatically placed into standby (PA is turned off). Change Pwd Option Button The Change Pwd option button provides the means to change the system password. This option button should only be used by the technical staff. For information on changing the system password, see Local Mode Password Control on page 5-3. System Info Option Button When the System Info option button is selected, the System Info screen will be displayed. See Figure 3-24. The System Info screen will display the current software versions contained in the MTX5000 IDU. Figure 3-24: System Info Screen - Typical System Info MPEG Software MTX5000 Control Software V.00.04.XX Serial #: XXXXX_XX Date of Manufacture: 03.17.09 System Type Type 11 2.0.0 Analog Software 2.0.1 SCM Software 3.0.1 Back Select Local/Remote Operation 3.5 Mode CAUTION Avoid damage to the color LCD display panel!

The color LCD display panel touch screen may be damaged if a sharp, hard-pointed object, such as a pencil or a pen, is used to select the displayed options. Touch screen options must only be selected using your fingers, a soft-pointed stylus, or the front panel function keys. Damage to the color LCD display panel caused by using a hard-pointed object or other misuse may void your warranty on the MTX5000 IDU. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-20 Note Remote operations must performed using Internet Explorer 7.0 or later. Note The procedure required to select the local or remote operation mode is contained in the following steps. In order to operate the MTX5000 remotely, you must connect the MTX5000 to a PC via your web browser. In order to operate the MTX5000 via remote control using the optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC, refer the Remote Access Subnotebook PC Operators Guide, part no. 400573-1. Selection of the local/remote operation modes can only be performed at the MTX5000. Note When performing steps at the MTX5000 in the following steps, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

25. Figure 3-25: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L To select the local operation mode when the MTX5000 is in the remote mode, perform step 2 and step 3. To select the remote operation mode when the MTX5000 is in the local mode and you do not know the MTX5000 IP address, go to step 4. If you know the IP address, go to step 9. Observe the L/R option button label indicates R. Select the L/R option button and observe the L/R option button label changes to L. Procedure is complete. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. Select the Network Config option button and observe the Network Config screen is displayed. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. Record the IP Address, select the Main option button, and observe the Main screen is displayed. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Local/

Remote

(L/R) Option Button Note 9. In the following step, XX.X.X.XXX is the IP address of your MTX5000 IDU. At the remote PC, open your web browser, enter the IP address for your MTX5000, and press the PC keyboard Enter key. The IP address should be entered as follows:

MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-21 http://XX.X.X.XXX/nfs/main.html After a short delay, observe the remote log in screen is displayed. See Figure 3-26. 10. Figure 3-26: Remote Log In Screen - Typical Figure 3-27: MTX5000 Main Page - Typical 12. 13. At the MTX5000, verify the L/R option button indicates L. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 3-28. 11. Enter your user name in the User Name text box, enter your password in the Password text box, select the Log In option button, and observe the MTX5000 Main Page is displayed. See Figure 3-27. Figure 3-28: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-22 14. Select the Radio tab and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 3-29 on page 3-23. Figure 3-29: Radio Screen Figure 3-31: Select Remote Ctrl Opt Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 15. Select the Next tab and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. See Figure 3-30. Figure 3-30: Radio - 2 Screen Radio - 2 Presets Option Remote Ctrl Option PA State Option Load Presets from File Save Presets to File Restore Presets to Defaults Back Main 16. Select the Remote Ctrl Option option button and observe the Select Remote Ctrl Opt screen is displayed. See Figure 3-31. Select Remote Ctrl Opt Local Remote Back 17. 18. 19. 20. Select the Remote option button and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Observe the L/R status button label indicates R and the option button status indicator is amber. Observe the Local Mode status indicator disappears from the remote screen PC display. 3.6 MTX5000 Local Operations CAUTION Avoid damage to the color LCD display panel when performing the following procedures!

The color LCD display panel touch screen may be damaged if a sharp, hard-pointed object, such as a pencil or a pen, is used to select the displayed options. Touch screen options must only be selected using your fingers, a soft-pointed stylus, or the front panel function keys. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-23 Damage to the color LCD display panel caused by using a hard-pointed object or other misuse may void your warranty on the MTX5000 IDU. Note If you are connected to the Ethernet via the IDU rear panel ETHERNET RJ45 connector and you find that the color LCD display panel appears to be operating very slowly or has locked up completely, disconnect the Ethernet cable from the ETHERNET connector. This should free up the color LCD display Panel and the IDU should resume proper operation. Once the MTX5000 is powered up, you will be able to check its configuration and monitor and control its operation in the local operating mode. The procedures required to use the Main and Status screens in the local operating mode are as follows:

Topic Select Preset Select RF Band Select/Customize Operating Channels Select Channel Offset Select Antenna Select Antenna Polarization Enable/Disable Transmitter Select High/Low Power Mode Page 3-24 3-27 3-30 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 Monitor ODU Status Monitor IDU Status Monitor SUM Errors Monitor Current Preset Status Settings Perform PA Voltage Adjust Setup Perform RF Level Adjust Select Color Bar Generator Mode Set Time and Date Perform IDU Diagnostics Review System Information Set Last PA State 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-38 3-44 3-49 3-52 3-54 3-56 3-57 3-58 Select Preset 3.6.1 During performance of this procedure, you may select from a list of factory Default Presets or from a list of custom User Presets. Factory Default Presets are identified alphabetically from Preset A thru Preset J. Custom User Presets are identified numerically from Preset 1 thru Preset XX, with XX being the last Preset available. Notes If selecting factory Default Presets in the following steps, Preset J is not currently active. Preset F and I are active only if your MTX5000 IDU contains the applicable licensed factory options. The procedure required to select a different Preset is contained in the following steps. You can select a different Preset from a list of factory-configured Presets and multiple custom Presets. When performing the following steps, a Main option button to MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-24 return you to the Main screen will be displayed at the bottom of the Preset screen. If the MTX5000 IDU is transmitting when a Preset is selected, the PA operation button will become greyed out, indicating the system is no longer transmitting. The PA operation button must then be selected to resume transmitting. CAUTION If you select the wrong Preset in the following steps, wait a minimum of 5 seconds before attempting to select another Preset. Failure to wait a minimum of 5 seconds between selection of Presets may cause unstable operation. When a Preset is selected, the Main screen will be displayed after a short delay, the Preset on the Main screen will be updated to display the selected Preset, and the updated system settings and status of the selected Preset will be displayed. If the Main option button is selected to return to the Main screen without selecting a different Preset, the Main screen will be displayed and no changes will be made to the current MTX5000 settings. Note In the following steps, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

32. Figure 3-32: Main Screen - Typical Preset X Option Button Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Note To switch between factory Default or custom User defaults, go to step 2. If you do not need to switch between factory Default or custom User defaults, go to step 8. 2. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 3-33. Figure 3-33: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-25 3. Select the Radio tab and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 3-34. the Select Preset Option screen is displayed. See Figure 3-36. Figure 3-34: Radio Screen Figure 3-36: Select Preset Option Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 4. Select the Next tab and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. See Figure 3-35. Figure 3-35: Radio - 2 Screen Radio - 2 Presets Option Remote Ctrl Option PA State Option Load Presets from File Save Presets to File Restore Presets to Defaults Back Main 5. Select the Presets Option option button and observe Select Preset Option Default User Back 6. 7. 8. Select the Default or User option button, as required, and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Select the Main screen Preset X option button and observe the Presets screen is displayed. See Figure 3-37. Figure 3-37: Preset X Screen - Typical Presets A B C D Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev Analog 4.83 & 6.2, 4MHz Vid Dev Digital COFDM QPSK 4:2:0,8,1/2,1/8,comp Digital COFDM 16 QAM 4:2:0,8,5/6,1/8,HD 1080i PA Off

<- Previous Main Next ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L Preset Description Text Box -

Typical MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-26 Note If you decide not to select a different Preset in the following step and select the Main option button instead, no configuration changes will be made, the RECONFIGURING RADIO screen will not be displayed, the Main screen will be displayed, and no changes will be displayed in the Preset description box. 9. Use the Previous and Next option buttons, as required, select the required Preset option button, and observe the RECONFIGURING RADIO screen is displayed. See Figure 3-38. Figure 3-38: RECONFIGURING RADIO Screen - Typical RECONFIGURING RADIO. PLEASE WAIT!

60 %

DO NOT POWER OFF RADIO UNTIL RECONFIGURED!

10. After a short delay, observe the Main screen is displayed and observe the new Preset and status data applicable to the Preset is displayed. See Figure 3-39. Figure 3-39: Main Screen - Typical Preset Description Text Box Preset Option Button Preset E Digital - COFDM QPSK, 8, 3/4, 1/8, ASI RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 11. Select the PA operation button to resume transmitting, as required. Select RF Band 3.6.2 The procedure required to select an RF band ODU is contained in the following steps. If your MTX5000 system is a dual band configuration containing both a 2 GHz and a 7 GHz ODU (RF head), the procedure required to select the RF head required for either 2 GHz or 7 GHz operation is contained in the following steps. This procedure is also used to select either the 2 GHz, 17 MHz channel plan or the 2 GHz, 12 MHz channel plan, as required for 2 GHz operation. In a dual band configuration, the 2 GHz RF head is typically connected to the IDU RFU 1 rear panel connector and the 7 GHz RF head is typically connected to the RFU 2 rear panel connector. The RF heads may, however, be connected to either MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-27 rear panel connector. The MTX5000 software automatically detects the 2 GHz and 7 GHz RF heads and assigns RFU1 and RFU2 to the respective RF heads on the RF Band screen, as required. If your MTX5000 system is a single 2 GHz or 7 GHz configuration, the RF head may be connected to either the IDU RFU 1 or RFU 2 rear panel connector. The MTX5000 software automatically detects the RF head configuration and connection and assigns RFU1 or RFU2 to the RF head on the RF Band screen, as applicable. When performing the following steps, a navigation option button to return you to the Main screen will be displayed at the bottom of the RF Band screen. When the new RF head is selected, the updated system status associated with the RF Band option button will display the new selected RF head, after a short delay. The Main option button must then be selected to return to the Main screen. If the Main option button is selected to return to the Main screen without selecting a new RF head, the Main screen will be displayed and no changes will be made to current MTX5000 settings. Note In the following steps, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

40. Figure 3-40: Main Screen - Typical RF Band Option Button 2. Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Select the RF Band option button and observe the RF Band screen is displayed and the current RF band option button is highlighted. See Figure 3-41, Figure 3-42 on page 3-29, Figure 3-43 on page 3-29, or Figure 3-44 on page 3-29. Figure 3-41: RF Band 2 GHz RFU1 Option Screen RF Band Option Buttons RFU1 2GHz Change Plan RF Band RFU2 PA On Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Main Screen Option Button MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-28 Figure 3-42: RF Band 2 GHz RFU2 Option Screen Figure 3-44: RF Band 7 GHz RFU2 Option Screen RF Band Option Buttons RFU1 RF Band RFU2 2GHz Change Plan PA On Main RF Band Option Buttons RF H RF IDU SUM L/R L RFU1 RF Band RFU2 2GHz Change Plan PA On Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Main Screen Option Button Main Screen Option Button Figure 3-43: RF Band 7 GHz RFU1 Option Screen RF Band Option Buttons RFU1 7GHz Change Plan RF Band RFU2 PA On Main RF H ODU IDU SUM SUM L Main Screen Option Button 3. Select the RFU1 or RFU2 2 GHz or 7 GHz RF head option button, as required, and observe the RECONFIGURING RADIO screen is displayed. See Figure 3-45. Figure 3-45: RECONFIGURING RADIO Screen - Typical RECONFIGURING RADIO. PLEASE WAIT!

60 %

DO NOT POWER OFF RADIO UNTIL RECONFIGURED!

MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-29 4. After a short delay, observe the new RF Band is active

(blue), select the Main option button, and observe the new RF band setting is displayed. See Figure 3-46. Figure 3-46: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 2G17M RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L New RF Band Setting 5. To select a new operating channel, perform Select/

Customize Operating Channels, as required. 3.6.3 Select/Customize Operating Channels The procedure required to select an operating channel or to prepare a customized channel is contained in the following steps. When performing the following steps, a navigation option button to return you to the Main screen will be displayed at the bottom of the Channel screen. When the new channel options are selected, the Main screen will be displayed and the updated system status associated with the Channel option button will display the newly selected channel. When a channel is customized, the channel number that was changed will not automatically be displayed on the Main page unless that channel was already selected. If a channel is customized that was not selected on the Main page, the customized channel number must be selected from the Main page using the Channel option button and the Channel screen. If the Main option button is selected to return to the Main screen without selecting a new channel, the Main screen will be displayed and no changes will be made to current MTX5000 settings. Note Note In the following steps, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. To select the operating channel only, perform step 1 thru step 3. To customize individual channels, go to step 4. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

47. Figure 3-47: Main Screen - Typical Channel Option Button Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-30 2. Select the Channel option button and observe the Channel screen is displayed. See Figure 3-48. Figure 3-48: Channel Screen - Typical Channel Option Buttons Channel 7 1 8 2 9 3 10 4 5 6 User Def CH 1 1.999000 GHz PA Off Main RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 3. 4. Select the Channel option button required, observe the Main screen is displayed, and observe the Channel option has been changed. Procedure is complete. Select the Main screen Channel option button and observe the Channel screen is displayed. See Figure 3-49. Figure 3-49: Channel Screen - Typical User Def Option Button Channel 7 1 8 2 9 3 10 4 5 6 User Def CH 1 1.999000 GHz PA Off Main RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 5. Select the User Def option button and observe the USER CHANNEL screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

50. Figure 3-50: USER CHANNEL Screen - Typical USER CHANNEL Frequency 2.031500 GHz Offset Chan. Select 3 0 Cancel Save 6. Select the Frequency option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 3-51. Figure 3-51: Numeric Keypad 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 DEL 2 5 8 0 7. Enter frequency required, select the ENT option button, and observe the USER CHANNEL screen is displayed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-31 Note The ++ offset option is not a valid option for 2 GHz and 7 GHz channel plans. 8. 9. Select the Offset pull-down menu and select -

(minus), 0 (center), or + (plus) offset, as required. Select the Chan. Select option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 3-52. Figure 3-52: Numeric Keypad 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC Note In the following step, channels 1 thru 10 may be selected for the 2 GHz band; channels 1 thru 14 may be selected for the 7 GHz band. 10. 11. 12. Enter the channel number required, select the ENT option button, and observe the USER CHANNEL screen is displayed. Select the Save option button and observe the Channel screen is displayed. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Select Channel Offset 3.6.4 The procedure required to select the channel frequency offset is contained in the following steps. When performing the following steps, a navigation option button to return you to the Main screen will be displayed at the bottom of the Offset screen. When the new offset is selected, the Main screen will automatically be displayed and the updated system status associated with the Offset option button will display the new offset. If the Main option button is selected to return to the Main screen without selecting a new offset, the Main screen will be displayed and no changes will be made to current MTX5000 settings. Note In the following steps, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

53. Figure 3-53: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Offset Option Button MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-32 2. Select the Offset option button and observe the Offset screen is displayed. See Figure 3-54. Figure 3-54: Offset Screen - Typical Offset Option Buttons Offset

0

PA On Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Main Screen Option Button 3. Select the Offset option button required, observe the Main screen is displayed, and observe the new offset setting is displayed. See Figure 3-55. Figure 3-55: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm _ V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L New Offset Setting Select Antenna 3.6.5 The procedure required to select a different antenna is contained in the following steps. When performing the following steps, a navigation option button to return you to the Main screen will be displayed at the bottom of the Antenna screen. When the new antenna is selected, the Main option button must be selected, the Main screen will automatically be displayed, and the updated system status associated with the Antenna option button will display the new selected antenna. If the Main option button is selected to return to the Main screen without selecting a different antenna, the Main screen will be displayed and no changes will be made to current MTX5000 settings. Note In the following steps, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

56. Figure 3-56: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Antenna Option Button MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-33 2. Select the Antenna option button and observe the Antenna screen is displayed. See Figure 3-57. Figure 3-57: Antenna Screen - Typical Antenna Option Buttons Antenna Ant. 1 Antenna1 Ant. 2 Antenna2 PA On Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L 3. Select the Antenna option button required, select the Main option button, observe the Main screen is displayed, and observe the antenna selected is displayed. See Figure 3-58. Figure 3-58: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 2 Offset Antenna Antenna2 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L New Antenna Setting Select Antenna Polarization 3.6.6 The procedure required to select the antenna polarization is contained in the following steps. When performing the following steps, a navigation option button to return you to the Main screen will be displayed at the bottom of the Antenna Polarity screen. When the new antenna polarization is selected, the Main option button must be selected, the Main screen will be displayed, and the updated system status associated with the Ant. Pol. option button will display the new selected antenna polarization. The options available are H (Horizontal), V (Vertical), RC (Right Circular), and LC (Left Circular). If the Main option button is selected to return to the Main screen without selecting a new antenna polarization setting, the Main screen will be displayed and no changes will be made to current MTX5000 settings. Note In the following steps, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

59. Figure 3-59: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Ant.Pol. Option Button 3-34 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 2. Select the Ant. Pol. option button and observe the Antenna Polarity screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

60. Enable/Disable Transmitter 3.6.7 The procedure required to enable or disable the transmitter is contained in the following steps. Figure 3-60: Antenna Polarity Screen - Typical Antenna Polarity Option Buttons Antenna Polarity H V RC LC PA On Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L 3. Select the Antenna Polarity option button required, select the Main option button, observe the Main screen is displayed, and observe the new antenna polarization is displayed. See Figure 3-61. Figure 3-61: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L New Antenna Polarization Setting Note Note In the following procedure, the PA option button may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. The transmitter may be enabled or disabled from the Main screen or from any screen that is accessible from the Main screen. The screen shown in Figure 3-62 on page 3-36 is therefore typical. In the following steps, selecting the PA option button will change the state of the transmitter from enabled to disabled or from disabled to enabled. When the transmitter is disabled (not transmitting), the PA option button will be grey and the label will display PA Off. When the option button is selected, an orange indicator will initially be displayed indicating the PA is preparing to transmit and the option button label will indicate PA. When the unit begins to transmit, the indicator will change to green and the option button label will change to PA On. Note To enable the transmitter, perform step 1 only. To disable the transmitter, go to step 2. 1. Select the PA operation button, observe the PA option button becomes active (green) after a short delay, and MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-35 the option button label changes to read PA On. See Figure 3-62. Figure 3-62: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L PA Option Button 2. Select the PA option button and observe the option button label changes to PA Off. Select High/Low Power Mode 3.6.8 The procedure required to select the transmitter high or low power output mode is contained in the following steps. Note In the following procedure, the RF option button may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. Notes The transmitter output power mode may be selected from the Main screen or from any screen that is accessible from the Main screen. The screen shown in Figure 3-63 is therefore typical. In the following steps, selecting the RF option button will change the state of the transmitter from low power to high power or from high power to low power. When the transmitter is in the low power mode, the RF status indicator will be yellow and the button label will display L. When the transmitter is in the high power mode, the RF status indicator will be green and the button label will display H. 1. Select the RF option button and observe the RF option button becomes active. See Figure 3-63. Figure 3-63: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L RF Option Button 2. Select the RF option button, as required, until the RF status indicator changes to the required state. 3.6.9 Monitor ODU Status The procedure required to monitor the current alarm status of the ODU is contained in the following steps. Note In the following procedure, the ODU status button may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-36 Note The ODU status button may be selected from the Main screen or from any screen that is accessible from the Main screen. The screen shown in Figure 3-64 is therefore typical. 1. Select the ODU status button. See Figure 3-64. Figure 3-64: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L ODU Status Button 3. When review of ODU Status messages is complete, select the OK option button and observe the ODU Status screen is no longer displayed. 3.6.10 Monitor IDU Status The procedure required to monitor the current alarm status of the IDU is contained in the following steps. Note Note In the following procedure, the IDU status button may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. The IDU status button may be selected from the Main screen or from any screen that is accessible from the Main screen. The screen shown in Figure 1 is therefore typical. 1. Select the IDU status button. See Figure 3-66. 2. Observe the ODU Status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-65. Figure 3-66: Main Screen - Typical Figure 3-65: ODU Status Dialog Box - Typical O DU Status xxxxxxxxxxx OK Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L IDU Status Button MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-37 2. Observe the IDU Status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-67. Figure 3-67: IDU Status Dialog Box - Typical IDU Status xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Figure 3-68: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H OK PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L SUM Status Button 3. When review of IDU Status messages is complete, select the OK option button and observe the IDU Status screen is no longer displayed. 3.6.11 Monitor SUM Errors The procedure required to monitor current summary alarms in the MTX5000 Transmitter System is contained in the following steps. Note Note In the following procedure, the SUM status button may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. The SUM status button may be selected from the Main screen or from any screen that is accessible from the Main screen. The screen shown in Figure 3-68 on page 3-38 is therefore typical. 1. Select the SUM status button. See Figure 3-68. 2. Observe the Summary Alarm screen is displayed. See Figure 3-69. Figure 3-69: Summary Alarm Dialog Box - Typical Summary Alarm xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx OK 3. When review of Summary Alarm messages is complete, select the OK option button and observe the Summary Alarm screen is no longer displayed. 3.6.12 Monitor Current Preset Status Settings The procedure required to monitor Preset status settings are contained in the following steps. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-38 Note In the following steps, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Select the Preset to be monitored per Select Preset on page 3-24, as required. Notes If the Preset to be monitored is an External IF Input Preset, status settings are not applicable. If the Preset to be monitored is an analog Preset, go to step 2. If the Preset to be monitored is a digital COFDM ASI Preset, go to step 5. If the Preset to be monitored is a digital COFDM, LMS-T, DVB-S, or digital IP Preset, go to step 11. 2. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

70. Figure 3-70: Main Screen (Analog Mode) - Typical RF H Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev 3. Select either Status option button and observe the selected analog Preset status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-71. Figure 3-71: Status Screen (Analog Mode) - Typical Video Composite Audio 4830 KHz 4830 KHz 4830 KHz 4830 KHz Y Y N N On On On On Video Deviation 3MHz Modulation FM RF Out xx dB PA On

<- Main Setup Main ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L 4. 5. When review of the analog Preset Status screen is complete, select either of the Main option buttons and observe the Main screen is displayed. Procedure is complete. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

72 on page 3-40. RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

ODU IDU SUM L/R L MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-39 Figure 3-72: Main Screen (Digital ASI Preset) - Typical Figure 3-74: COFDM Status Screen Preset E Digital - COFDM QPSK, 8, 3/4, 1/8, ASI RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L COFDM Status Constellation QPSK RF B/W 8 MHz FEC 3/4 Guard Interval 1/8 Data Rate 8.294 Mbps RF Output 38.4 dBm PA On Back Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L 6. Select either Status option button and observe the COFDM Mode Status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-73. Figure 3-73: COFDM Mode Status Screen COFDM Mode Status 8. 9. When review of the COFDM Status screen is complete, select the Back option button and observe the COFDM Mode Status screen is displayed. Select the Video option button and observe the Video Status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-75. Figure 3-75: Video Status Screen - Typical COFDM Encoder Video Audio PID IP Transfer Main 7. Select the COFDM option button and observe the selected Preset COFDM Status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-74. Video Status Video In Noise Reduction HD Test Pattern ASI Input Off Off FrameRate 29.97HZ Video Loss Bars SDI Auto Line Off Off PA On Back Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-40 10. When review of the Video Status screen is complete, select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Procedure is complete. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

76. 11. Figure 3-76: Main Screen (Digital COFDM/LMS-T/DVB-S/

Digital IP Preset) - Typical Preset C Digital - COFDM QPSK, 4:2:0,8, 1/2, 1/8, comp RF Band RFU1 2G17M RF Output Channel 9 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 12. Select either Status option button and observe the COFDM Mode Status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-77. Figure 3-77: COFDM Mode Screen COFDM Mode Status COFDM Encoder Video Audio PID IP Transfer Main 13. Select the COFDM option button and observe the COFDM Status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-78. Figure 3-78: COFDM Status Screen - Typical COFDM Status Constellation 16QAM RF B/W 10 MHz FEC 2/3 Guard Interval 1/8 Data Rate 18.431 Mbps RF Output 0.0 dBm PA On Back Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L 14. When review of the COFDM Status screen is 15. complete, select the Back option button and observe the COFDM Mode Status screen is displayed. Select the Video option button and observe the Video Status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-79 on page 3-42. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-41 Figure 3-79: Video Status Screen - Typical Video Status Video In Noise Reduction HD Test Pattern ASI Input Off Off FrameRate 29.97HZ Video Loss Bars SDI Auto Line Off Off PA On Back Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L 16. When review of the Video Status screen is complete, select the Back option button and observe the COFDM Mode Status screen is displayed. Select the Encoder option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. See Figure 3-80. 17. Encoder Status 2 screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

81. Figure 3-81: Encoder Status Screen - Typical Encoder Status 2 GOP Length 15 Bit Rate Auto On Bit Rate 4.900 Mbps Network Name Net 1 Service Name Service 01 PA On Back Main Encoder 1 PA H RF ODU IDU SUM L 19. When review of the Encoder Status 2 screen is complete, select the Back option button and observe the COFDM Mode Status screen is displayed. Select the Audio option button and observe the Audio 1 Status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-82. Figure 3-80: Encoder Screen - Typical 20. Mode Horizontal Resolution Spectrum Invert PTS per Picture Standard Delay Chroma 4:2:0 720 Aspect Ratio Normal Color Bars Off VBI 4:3 Off Off PA On Back Main Encoder 2 RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L 18. When review of the Encoder screen is complete, select the Encoder 2 option button and observe the Figure 3-82: Audio 1 Status Screen - Typical Audio 1 Status Mode Dual Mono Input Analog Standard MPEG Bit Rate 128kb PA On Back Main Audio 2 RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-42 21. When review of the Audio 1 Status screen is complete, select the Audio 2 option button and observe the Audio 2 Status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-83. Figure 3-83: Audio 2 Status Screen - Typical Audio 2 Status Mode Dual Mono Input Analog Standard MPEG Bit Rate 192kb Balance Unbal-

anced PA On Back Main Audio 1 RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L 22. When review of the Audio 2 Status screen is complete, select the Back option button and observe the COFDM Mode Status screen is displayed. Select the PID option button and observe the PID Status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-84. 23. Figure 3-84: PID Status Screen - Typical PID Status VIDEO AUDIO A PMT 300 200 32 DATA AUDIO B 100 201 PCR 8190 PA On Back Main Next RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L 24. When review of the PID Status screen is complete, select the next option button and observe the PID Status-2 screen is displayed. See Figure 3-85. Figure 3-85: PID Status-2 Screen - Typical PID Status-2 Program ID Transport ID 3 1 Network ID 1 PA On Back Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-43 Note If the Preset being monitored is a digital COFDM, LMS-T, or DVB-S Preset, go to step 25. If the Preset being monitored is a digital IP Preset, go to step 26. 25. When review of the PID Status-2 screen is complete, select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Procedure is complete. 26. When review of the PID Status-2 screen is complete, select the Back option button and observe the PID Status screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the COFDM Mode Status screen is displayed. Select the IP Transfer option button and observe the IP Status screen is displayed. See Figure 3-86. 27. 28. Figure 3-86: IP Status Screen - Typical IP Status Max Bit Rate 19.350 Mbps IP Transfer Mode IP Rate 12.441 Mbps IP + Video Video Bitrate 5.2 Mbps Back Main 29. When review of the IP Status screen is complete, select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Procedure is complete. 3.6.13 Perform PA Voltage Adjust Setup The procedure required to calibrate the PA DC voltage for each Standard ODU (RF Unit) is contained in the following steps. This procedure is to be performed for Standard ODUs only. Do not perform this procedure for High Power ODUs. The PA voltage for High Power ODUs is fixed and cannot be adjusted. CAUTION To avoid potential software hang-ups, always ensure the ODU is connected to the IDU before attempting to perform this procedure. Do not attempt to perform this procedure if the ODU is not connected to the IDU, as the software will hang up. CAUTION To avoid potential software hang-ups, check the Main screen ODU status indicator and verify no major faults exist in the ODU. If faults exist in the ODU, they must be corrected prior to performing this procedure. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-44 Note This procedure should be performed following initial installation of the MTX5000 System with a Standard ODU, after replacement of the IDU or Standard ODU, or following any repairs to the cable assembly providing power from the IDU to the Standard ODU. Note In the following procedure, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Verify the ODU status indicator does not indicate a major fault (indicator is not red). See Figure 3-87. Figure 3-87: Main Screen - Typical RF Band Option Button Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Setup Option Button ODU Status Indicator Notes If your MTX5000 system is a single band system, go to step 5. If your MTX5000 system is a dual band system, perform step 2 thru step 12 for both bands. 2. Select the RF Band option button and observe the RF Band screen is displayed and the current RF band option button is highlighted. See Figure 3-88, Figure 3-89 on page 3-46, Figure 3-90 on page 3-46, or Figure 3-91 on page 3-46. Figure 3-88: RF Band Screen - Typical RF Band Option Buttons RFU1 2GHz Change Plan RF Band RFU2 PA On Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Main Screen Option Button MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-45 Figure 3-89: RF Band 2 GHz RFU2 Option Screen Figure 3-91: RF Band 7 GHz RFU2 Option Screen RF Band Option Buttons RFU1 RF Band RFU2 2GHz Change Plan PA On Main RF Band Option Buttons RF H RF IDU SUM L/R L RFU1 RF Band RFU2 2GHz Change Plan PA On Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Main Screen Option Button Main Screen Option Button Figure 3-90: RF Band 7 GHz RFU1 Option Screen RF Band Option Buttons RFU1 7GHz Change Plan RF Band RFU2 PA On Main RF H ODU IDU SUM SUM L Main Screen Option Button Note In the following step, the RECONFIGURING RADIO screen (Figure 3-92 on page 3-47) will be displayed only if the RF Band RFU1 or RFU2 option switch option is changed. 3. Select the RFU1 or RFU2 option button, as required, and observe the RECONFIGURING RADIO screen

(Figure 3-92 on page 3-47) is displayed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-46 Figure 3-92: RECONFIGURING RADIO Screen - Typical Figure 3-94: Setup Screen RECONFIGURING RADIO. PLEASE WAIT!

60 %

DO NOT POWER OFF RADIO UNTIL RECONFIGURED!

Setup User Radio Main 4. After a short delay, observe the RF Band screen is displayed, select the Main option button, and observe the RF band setting required is displayed. See Figure 3-93. Figure 3-93: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L RF Band Setting 6. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 3-95. Figure 3-95: Radio Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 5. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 3-94. 7. Select the Calibration option button and observe the PA Voltage Adjust Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 3-96 on page 3-48. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-47 Figure 3-96: PA Voltage Adjust Setup Screen This process will allow you to calibrate the PA DC voltage for each specific frequency band. Once you have the Radio connected to the ODU and are ready to start calibration, Press the START Button below Start

<-Previous Main Factory->

Notes If using the function keys and SEL key to select the Start option button, go to step 8. If using the touch screen, go to step 9. 8. Select the Start option button and observe the Start option button becomes active (blue). See Figure 3-97. Figure 3-97: PA Voltage Adjust Setup Screen - Start Welcome to the PA Voltage Adjust Setup Screen!

This process will allow you to calibrate the PA DC voltage for each specific frequency band. Once you have the Radio connected to the ODU and are ready to start calibration, press the START Button below Start

<-Previous Main Factory->

Notes When the Start option button is selected in the following step, calibration will begin and the Start option button indicator will change from green to red. It will take approximately 30 seconds for the calibration process to be completed. When calibration is complete, the Start option button indicator will change from red to green. 9. Select the Start option button and observe the Start option button indicator turns red and the Starting the Calibration... message is displayed. See Figure 3-98. Figure 3-98: Starting Calibration Starting the Calibration... Start

<-Previous Main Factory->

Note Do not select the Factory option button. The Factory option button is used for factory test only. 10. When calibration is complete, observe the Calibration Successful message is displayed. See Figure 3-99 on page 3-49. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-48 Figure 3-99: Calibration Successful Calibration Successful This procedure provides the means to adjust the RF level output manually (not recommended), if required. This procedure also provides the steps to select the Auto mode (recommended). CAUTION It is highly recommended that the RF output level be set to the Auto mode for optimum performance. Manually setting the RF output level runs the risk of exceeding the FCC mask or of deteriorating digital performance. Notes The RF output level can only be adjusted if you are operating in the digital mode with a digital Preset selected. The RF output level cannot be adjusted if you are operating in the analog mode. Note In the following procedure, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

101 on page 3-50. Start

<-Previous Main Next->

11. Select the Previous option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 3-100. Figure 3-100: Radio Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 12. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. 3.6.14 Perform RF Level Adjust The procedure required to adjust the RF output level when operating in the digital mode is contained in the following steps. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-49 Figure 3-101: Main Screen - Typical Figure 3-102: RF Band Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L RF Band Option Button RF Band Option Buttons RFU1 2GHz Change Plan RF Band RFU2 PA On Main RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Setup Option Button Main Screen Option Button 2. Select a digital Preset per Select Preset on page 3-

24, as required. Note If your MTX5000 system is a dual band system, step 3 thru step 10 must be performed for both bands. 4. 5. Select the RF band option button required, observe the RF Band screen is displayed, select the Main option button, observe the Main screen is displayed, and observe the new RF band setting is displayed. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 3-103. 3. Select the RF Band option button and observe the RF Band screen is displayed and the current RF band option button is highlighted. See Figure 3-102. Figure 3-103: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-50 6. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 3-104. CAUTION Figure 3-104: Radio Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 7. Select the Level Adjust option button and observe the RF Output Level Adjust screen is displayed. See Figure 3-105. Figure 3-105: RF Output Level Adjust Screen RF Output Level Adjust Attenuation Output Power Auto 40.0 dBm Back Main It is highly recommended that the RF output level be set to the Auto mode for optimum performance. Manually setting the RF output level runs the risk of exceeding the FCC mask or deteriorating digital performance. Notes In the following steps, Attenuation level options available are Auto or 0 to 15. The Auto option is the optimum attenuation level set at the factory and is the recommended Attenuation level option. 8. 9. Select the RF Output Level Adjust screen Up or Down arrow option buttons to select the Attenuation level required. Options are Auto or 0 to 15 (Auto recommended). When the Attenuation setting required has been selected, select the Back option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 3-106 on page 3-52. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-51 Figure 3-106: Setup Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 10. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. 3.6.15 Select Color Bar Generator Mode All MTX5000 IDUs contain a built-in digital Color Bar Generator

(CBG). An optional analog CBG is available. The procedure required to select the CBG operating mode is contained in the following steps. The CBG has four operating modes that may be selected as follows:

Off - Color bars and audio test tones are turned off. On - Color bars and audio test tones are continuously turned on. This mode should be used for test or troubleshooting only. A Gen (Auto Generated) - If a loss of video signal occurs, color bars and/or audio test tones are transmitted after a specified delay. A Stby (Auto Standby) - If a loss of video signal occurs, the transmitter is automatically placed into standby (PA is turned off). The same Color Bars screen is displayed when making either analog or digital CBG option selections. When configuring your IDU CBG options, the following rules must be observed:

If you have the optional analog CBG contained in your IDU, selection of the Color Bars screen Off, On, A Gen, or A Stby option will be applicable to all analog and digital Presets. You cannot select different Color Bars screen options for different Presets. If you do not have the optional analog CBG installed in your IDU, selection of the Color Bars screen On, A Gen, or A Stby option will be applicable to digital Presets only. No options are available for analog Presets if you do not have the optional analog CBG. If you do not have the optional analog CBG installed in your IDU and you select the Color Bars screen On, A Gen, or A Stby option, selection of an analog Preset will result in no audio, video, or color bar outputs. CAUTION CAUTION If you do not have the optional Analog Color Bar Generator installed in your MTX5000 IDU and you set the Color Bar Generator to On, A Gen, or A Stby, a blank screen will be displayed for all analog Presets. To avoid potential problems that could impact operation of the MTX5000 System, always select the Color Bars screen Off, A Gen, or A Stby options for normal operation. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-52 The On operating mode should only be selected when testing or troubleshooting. When the On option is selected, color bars take priority over all Preset settings. Selection of the On option will transmit color bars at all times in both analog and digital Presets if you have the optional analog CBG and will transmit color bars at all times in digital Presets only, if you do not have the optional analog CBG. 2. 3. 4. Select any Preset per Select Preset on page 3-24, as required. Verify the Main screen is displayed. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 3-108. Figure 3-108: Setup Screen Setup Note In the following procedure, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

107. Figure 3-107: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Setup Option Button User Radio Main 5. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 3-109. Figure 3-109: Radio Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-53 6. Select the Color Bars option button and observe the Color Bars screen is displayed. See Figure 3-110. Note Figure 3-110: Color Bars Screen In the following procedure, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

111. Figure 3-111: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Setup Option Button 2. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 3-112 on page 3-55. Color Bars Off On A Gen A Stby Back Main Note If the On operating mode option is selected in the following step for test or troubleshooting, repeat step 7 to select Off, A Gen, or A Stby, as required, when test or trouble-shooting is complete. 7. 8. Select the Off, On, A Gen, or A Stby operating mode option button, as required. Select the Color Bars screen Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. 3.6.16 Set Time and Date The procedure required to set the date and time is contained in the following steps. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-54 Figure 3-112: Setup Screen Figure 3-114: Time / Date Screen - Typical Setup Time / Date User Radio Main Tue Mar 17, 2009 08:30:30 Date Year 2009 Month 3 Day Time Hour 8 Min. 30 Sec. 17 30 Submit Main Cancel 3. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 3-113. 5. Select the Year, Month, Day, Hour, Min., and/or Sec. option buttons, as required, and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 3-115. Figure 3-113: Radio Screen Radio Figure 3-115: Keypad Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 4. Select the Time & Date option button and observe the Time/Date screen is displayed. See Figure 3-114. 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC 6. 7. 8. Enter the value required, select the ENT key, and observe the Time / Date screen is displayed. When all date and time entries are complete, select the Submit option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-55 3.6.17 Perform IDU Diagnostics The procedure required to perform IDU diagnostics are contained in the following steps. Figure 3-117: Setup Screen Setup Note In the following procedure, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

116. Figure 3-116: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Setup Option Button 2. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 3-117. User Radio Main 3. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 3-118. Figure 3-118: Radio Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 4. Select the Diagnostics option button and observe the Diagnostics screen is displayed. See Figure 3-119 on page 3-57. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-56 Figure 3-119: Diagnostics Screen - Typical Figure 3-120: Main Screen - Typical Diagnostics IDU +24V +26.41V IDU +12V +13.12V IDU -12V -13.20V IDU +5.5V +5.3V IDU Fan monitor 329.28mA IDU Temperature +0.00oC Back 5. 6. When review of the Diagnostics screen is complete, select the Back option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. 3.6.18 Review System Information The procedure required to review the current software versions contained in your MTX5000 IDU is contained in the following steps. Note In the following procedure, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

120. Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Setup Option Button 2. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 3-121. Figure 3-121: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main 3. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 3-122 on page 3-58. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-57 Figure 3-122: Radio Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 3.6.19 Set Last PA State The IDU can be configured to return the PA to the last operating state (PA Off, PA On, or always PA Off) when the unit is powered down and is then powered up again. After powering down, the next time the IDU is powered up, the PA will return to the state selected. The procedure required to set the last PA state is contained in the following steps. Note In the following procedure, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 4. Select the System Info option button and observe the System Info screen is displayed. See Figure 3-123. 1. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 3-

124. Figure 3-123: System Info Screen - Typical Figure 3-124: Main Screen - Typical System Info MPEG Software MTX5000 Control Software V.00.04.XX Serial #: XXXXX_XX Date of Manufacture: 03.17.09 System Type Type 11 2.0.0 Analog Software 2.0.1 SCM Software 3.0.1 Back 5. 6. When review of the System Info screen is complete, select the Back option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Setup Option Button 2. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 3-125 on page 3-59. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-58 Figure 3-125: Setup Screen Figure 3-127: Radio - 2 Screen Setup Radio - 2 User Radio Main Presets Option Remote Ctrl Option PA State Option Load Presets from File Save Presets to File Restore Presets to Defaults Back Main 3. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 3-126. Figure 3-126: Radio Screen Radio 5. Select the PA State Option button and observe the Select PA State Option screen is displayed. See Figure 3-128. Figure 3-128: Select PA State Option Screen Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 4. Select the Next option button and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. See Figure 3-127. Select PA State Option Off Last Back MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-59 Note 6. 7. 3.7 Mode Note In the following step, if the Off option button is selected, the PA will return to the PA Off state when the IDU is powered up again. If the Last option button is selected, the IDU will return to the last PA settings that were in use when the unit was powered down, including frequency and power levels and PA On or PA Off state, when the unit is powered up again. Select Off or Last, as required, and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Using the MTX5000 in Remote Remote location operations are best performed using Internet Explorer 7.0 or later. Once the MTX5000 is powered up, you will be able to monitor and/or change certain operating parameters through the use of options displayed on a PC at a remote location. The PC must be connected to your MTX5000 via your web browser. Notes If you are using the optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC for remote control operations, refer to the Remote Access Subnotebook PC Operators Guide, part no. 400573-1, for the procedures required to connect to the MTX5000 IDU and to power up the Remote Access Subnotebook PC. The procedures required to control the MTX5000 IDU remotely using a PC from a remote location or for remote control using the optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC are identical. Overview 3.7.1 As you operate the MTX5000 from a PC at a remote location, you will interact with the MTX5000 via a web browser. The optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC may also be used for mobile remote control operations. In order to control the MTX5000 remotely via either method, perform Select Local/Remote Operation Mode on page 3-20 to place the MTX5000 in the remote mode. The L/R option button on the MTX5000 color LCD display panel touch screen may be selected to change the operating mode to local (L) only. See Figure 3-129 on page 3-61. Selecting the L/

R option button when the system is in the local mode will not change to the remote mode. When the option button is in the local mode, all operations must be performed at the MTX5000. When the option button is in the remote mode, all operations must be performed at the remote PC. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-60 Figure 3-129: MTX5000 Color LCD Display Panel - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 2G17M RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L L/R Option Button Selection of the local/remote operating mode may only be performed at the MTX5000. You cannot change the local/

remote operating mode from the remote PC. 3.7.2 Remote Screen Display Notes Preset configuration settings will be displayed in the local mode when you are connected to the MTX5000 IDU via your web browser. All configuration option settings are inactive in the local mode, however. When you are connected to the MTX5000 via your web browser and are logged in as a user, the display shown in Figure 3-130 will appear on your remote PC display. When the MTX5000 is in the local mode, the Local Mode indicator on the remote screen Main tab will be displayed after logging in using the user password. In the local mode, the current MTX5000 Preset configuration settings may be monitored from the remote PC, but no settings can be changed in the local mode. When the MTX5000 is in the remote mode, no indicator is displayed on the remote screen. Figure 3-130: Remote Screen Display - Typical Local Mode Indicator In the remote mode, the following MTX5000 settings can be monitored and/or changed using the remote PC. These settings are controlled using the Main tab. Select Preset Select RF Band Select Channel Plan Select frequency Channel Select Antenna Monitor current RF Output level Select channel frequency Offset MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-61 Select Antenna Polarity Select PA Control (transmitter) operation Select RF Power level Monitor ODU, IDU, and SUM (summary) alarms Monitor currently selected Preset configuration settings. See Figure 3-131 on page 3-63 for the top level remote menu hierarchy. The remote screen Main tab is your starting point for navigating through various option selections available. The remote screen provides access to options available in your MTX5000 through the use of various tabs and pull-down menus. When a tab is selected, the tab is grey. Tabs will be blue when they are not selected. The mouse cursor will change to a hand icon () when the cursor is moved over an active tab. If an active tab is selected and the cursor is moved over the active tab, the cursor will not change to the hand icon, however. When an active tab is selected, any additional active tabs associated with the active tab may be selected. For example, if an analog Preset is selected, the Main, Status, and Log Out tabs will be active. The Setup tab is active only when a custom user or the system administrator has logged in. Tab options available from the Status tab are those applicable to the licensed options contained in your MTX5000 IDU only. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-62 Figure 3-131: Top Level Remote Menu Hierarchy Main Tab Preset RF Band Channel Plan Channel Antenna RF Output Offset Antenna Polarity PA Control RF Power ODU IDU SUM Status Tab Main Tab

(All Tabs) Status Tab Preset RF Band Channel Plan Channel Antenna ODU IDU SUM Select factory or custom Presets Select RFU1 or RFU2 Select 2GHz Upper, 2GHz Lower, 2GHz BAS, 5 GHz, 7GHz Upper, 7GHz Lower, or 13 GHz Select 1 thru 10, 1 thru 14, or 1 thru 22, as applicable to the channel plan Select Antenna 1 or Antenna 2 Monitor current ODU alarms Monitor current IDU alarms Monitor current summary alarms Select Radio, Analog, Digital, IP, or SCM tabs, as required, to review Preset configuration settings applicable to the licensed options contained in your MTX5000 IDU RF Output Offset Antenna Polarity PA Control RF Power Monitor current RF output level Select -, 0, +, or

++, as applicable to the channel plan Select H, V, RC, or HC Select Off or On Select Low power or High power MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-63 3.7.3 Remote Configuration Setting Selections When you interact with the MTX5000 remotely, you will use the remote screen display (Figure 3-132) Main tab to make operation option selections. Figure 3-132: Remote Screen Display - Typical Figure 3-133: Preset Pull-Down Menu - Typical Option selections are discussed in the following paragraphs. Option Selections MTX5000 IDU option selections are made using the Main tab General settings pull-down menus such as the Preset pull-down menu shown in Figure 3-133. Preset selection options consist of both factory Presets and custom Presets. Other option pull-down menu selections include RF Band, Channel Plan, Channel, Antenna, Offset, Antenna Polarity, PA Control, and RF Power. Please note that when pull-down menu options, other than the Preset pull-down menu option, are selected, the change occurs almost instantaneously. When a new Preset pull-down menu option is selected, it will take a short time to change all of the current Preset settings in the IDU. When a new Preset is selected, a progress bar will be displayed on the MTX5000 display, the PA Control state will change to Off if the IDU was transmitting when the new Preset was selected, and the Reconfiguring Radio. Please Wait... screen will be displayed. See Figure 3-134 on page 3-65. If the IDU was transmitting, it may be necessary to select the PA Control pull-down menu On option to resume transmitting. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-64 Figure 3-134: Reconfiguring Radio. Please Wait... Screen -

Typical Figure 3-135: Radio Tab - Typical Preset Configuration Settings After selecting a new Preset, the new Preset configuration settings will be displayed on the Radio, Analog, Digital, or IP tabs, as applicable to the Preset selected and the licensed options contained in your MTX5000 IDU. If the Preset selected is analog, the selected Preset information will be displayed on the Radio tab (Figure 3-135) and on the Analog tab (Figure 3-136). Figure 3-136: Analog Tab - Typical If the Preset selected is digital or IP, Preset information will be displayed on the tabs applicable to the Preset selected. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-65 Transmitter Controls 3.7.4 Control option selections are made using the PA Control and RF Power pull-down menus. See Figure 3-137. Figure 3-137: Transmitter Controls Pull-Down Menus Figure 3-138: Alert Option Buttons PA Control Pull-Down Menu Selection of the PA Control pull-

down menu options enable or disable the transmitter (On or Off). RF Power Pull-Down Menu Selection of the RF Power pull-

down menu options allow you to set the power output to Low or High. Alerts 3.7.5 The alerts status indicators display the current Outdoor Unit

(ODU), Indoor Unit (IDU), and Summary (SUM) alarms. See Figure 3-138. If an error exists in either the IDU or ODU, the status indicators will change from green (no faults) to yellow, indicating a fault is present that does not affect transmit operations, or will change to red, indicating a major fault exists that adversely affects transmit operations. If one or both of the ODU or IDU status indicators are yellow or red, the SUM indicator will also reflect yellow or red. Selecting the applicable option button(s) will display error message windows applicable to the current faults in the system. See Figure 3-139. Figure 3-139: Alert Error Message Window - Typical Select the OK option button to close the error message window. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-66 3.8 Remote Location Operations 3.8.1 Select Preset Note You must be in the remote operation mode to perform the following procedures. CAUTION Once the MTX5000 system is powered up and has been set for remote operation per Select Local/Remote Operation Mode on page 3-20, you will be able to check the MTX5000 configuration and monitor and/or control its operation from a PC at a remote location. The procedures required to use the remote screen in the remote operating mode are as follows:

Topic Select Preset Select RF Band and Channel Plan Select Operating Channel Select Antenna Select Frequency Offset Select Antenna Polarization Enable/Disable Transmitter Select High/Low RF Power Mode Monitor Alerts Page 3-67 3-68 3-69 3-70 3-70 3-70 3-71 3-71 3-72 If you select the wrong Preset in the following steps, wait a minimum of 5 seconds before attempting to select another Preset. Failure to wait a minimum of 5 seconds between selection of Presets may cause unstable operation. The procedure required to select a new Preset is contained in the following steps. You can select a new Preset from a list of 10 factory-configured individual Presets or from up to 99 custom Presets. If factory Default Presets were selected locally on the MTX5000 IDU Main screen, only Default Presets may be selected remotely by the user. If User Presets were selected, only User Presets may be selected remotely by the user. When a new Preset is selected in the following steps, the new Preset will be displayed in the Main tab Preset pull-down menu. The Preset parameters will also be displayed on the Status tab Radio, Analog, Digital, and/or IP tabs, as applicable to the Preset selected, after a short delay. The PA Control state will also change to Off, if you were transmitting prior to selecting the new Preset, and it may be necessary to select the PA Control pull-down menu On option to resume transmitting. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 system is powered up and the system is in the remote operating mode. Observe the remote screen is displayed on the remote PC display. See Figure 3-140 on page 3-68. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-67 Figure 3-140: Remote Screen Display - Typical 3. Select the Main tab Preset pull-down menu (Figure 3-

141) and select the Preset required. Figure 3-141: CONFIGURATION - Preset Pull-Down Menu -

Typical CAUTION It may take approximately 30 seconds to change Presets from the remote location. Do not become impatient during the configuration process in the following steps. If you do not allow processing to complete, software corruption will occur!

4. 5. 6. Observe the Reconfiguring Radio. Please Wait... window is displayed until the MTX5000 has been re-

configured. Observe the parameters for the selected Preset are displayed in the Status tab Analog, Digital, and/or IP tabs, as applicable. Select the Main tab PA Control pull-down menu On option to resume transmitting, as required. Select RF Band and Channel Plan 3.8.2 The procedure required to select an RF band (RFU) and a channel plan from a remote location is contained in the following steps. If your MTX5000 system is a dual band configuration, the procedure required to select the RFU required for dual band operation is contained in the following steps. This procedure is also used to select the channel plan required for operation. In a typical 2 GHz and 7 GHz dual band configuration, the 2 GHz RF head is typically connected to the IDU RFU 1 rear panel connector and the 7 GHz RF head is typically connected to the RFU 2 rear panel connector. The RF heads may, however, be connected to either rear panel connector. The MTX5000 software automatically detects the RF heads and assigns RFU1 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-68 and RFU2 to the respective RF heads on the RF Band drop-

down menu, as required. If your MTX5000 system is a single band configuration, the RF head may be connected to either the IDU RFU 1 or RFU 2 rear panel connector. The MTX5000 software automatically detects the RF head configuration and connection and assigns RFU 1 or RFU 2 to the RF head, as applicable. When the required RF head is selected, the RF Band pull-down menu will display the selected RF head. After selecting the RF head, the Channel Plan pull-down menu option must be selected. When the Channel Plan pull-down menu option required is selected, the Channel Plan pull-down menu will display the selected RF band. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 system is powered up and the system is in the remote operating mode. Observe the remote screen is displayed on the remote PC display. See Figure 3-142. Figure 3-142: Remote Screen Display - Typical 3. 4. Select the Main tab RF Band pull-down menu and select the RFU1 or RFU2 option required. Select the Channel Plan pull-down menu and select the Channel Plan option required. Select Operating Channel 3.8.3 The procedure required to select an operating channel is contained in the following steps. When the Channel pull-down menu option required is selected, the Channel pull-down menu will display the selected channel. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 system is powered up and the system is in the remote operating mode. Observe the Remote screen is displayed on the remote PC display. See Figure 3-143. Figure 3-143: Remote Screen Display - Typical MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-69 3. Select the Main tab Channel pull-down menu and select the Channel pull-down menu option required. Select Antenna 3.8.4 The procedure required to select the operating antenna is contained in the following steps. When the Antenna pull-down menu option is selected, the Antenna pull-down menu will display the selected antenna. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 system is powered up and the system is in the remote operating mode. Observe the Remote screen is displayed on the remote PC display. See Figure 3-144. Figure 3-144: Remote Screen Display - Typical contained in the following steps. When the Offset pull-down menu is selected, the Offset pull-down menu will display the selected channel offset. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 system is powered up and the system is in the remote operating mode. Observe the Remote screen is displayed on the remote PC display. See Figure 3-145. Figure 3-145: Remote Screen Display - Typical 3. Select the Main tab Antenna pull-down menu and select the Antenna pull-down menu option required. Select Frequency Offset 3.8.5 The procedure required to select the operating channel offset is 3. Select the Main tab Offset pull-down menu and select the Offset menu option required. Select Antenna Polarization 3.8.6 The procedure required to select antenna polarization is contained in the following steps. When the new antenna polarization is selected, the updated Antenna Polarity pull-

down menu will display the selected antenna. 1. Verify the MTX5000 system is powered up and the system is in the remote operating mode. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-70 2. Observe the Remote screen is displayed on the remote PC display. See Figure 3-146. Figure 3-146: Remote Screen Display - Typical Figure 3-147: Remote Screen Display - Typical 3. Select the Main tab Antenna Polarity pull-down menu and select the Antenna Polarity pull-down menu option required. Enable/Disable Transmitter 3.8.7 The procedure required to enable or disable the Power Amplifier

(PA) (transmitter) is contained in the following steps. When the new power amplifier operating mode is selected, the PA Control pull-down menu will display the new operating mode. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 system is powered up and the system is in the remote operating mode. Observe the Remote screen is displayed on the remote PC display. See Figure 3-147. 3. Select the Main tab PA Control pull-down menu and select the PA Control pull-down menu option required. Select High/Low RF Power Mode 3.8.8 The procedure required to select the power amplifier

(transmitter) high or low RF power output is contained in the following steps. When the power amplifier output power mode is selected, the RF Power pull-down menu will display the new operating mode. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 system is powered up and the system is in the remote operating mode. Observe the Remote screen is displayed on the remote PC display. See Figure 3-148 on page 3-72. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-71 Figure 3-148: Remote Screen Display - Typical 3. Select the Main tab RF Power pull-down menu and select the RF Power pull-down menu option required. 3.8.9 Monitor Alerts The procedure required to monitor the current alarm status of the ODU, IDU, and summary (SUM) alarms is contained in the following steps. The ODU, IDU, and SUM status indicators will be green if no alarms are present in the system. If a minor IDU and/or ODU alarm is detected that does not adversely affect transmit operations, the applicable status indicator will be yellow. If a major alarm is detected in either the IDU or ODU that adversely impacts transmit operations, the IDU or ODU status indicators will be red. The SUM status indicator will display a red status indicator if the IDU and/or ODU is reporting at least one major alarm that adversely affects transmit operations. The SUM status indicator will not display a red status indicator for all alarm conditions reported by the ODU or the IDU. Only alarm conditions that are considered major to the operation of the transmitter will change the state of the SUM status indicator status indicator to red. Note This procedure may be used to select either the ODU, IDU, or SUM option buttons to review the current alert status of the MRX5000 System. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 system is powered up and the system is in the remote operating mode. Observe the Remote screen is displayed on the remote PC display. See Figure 3-149. Figure 3-149: Remote Screen Display - Typical 3. Observe the ODU, IDU, and SUM status indicators. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-72 Note

4. 5. In the following step, if no alerts are present, the No Errors window will be displayed. If alerts are present, the alerts will be displayed in the alert window. Refer to the Error Messages section on page 4-1 for a list of possible alarms and suggested corrective actions. Select the ODU, IDU, or SUM option button, as required. If a green status indicator is selected, a No Errors window will be displayed. If a red or yellow status indicator is selected, an alert window will be displayed indicating all current alert messages. When review of the alerts window is complete, select the OK option button, observe the alerts window closes, and observe the Remote screen is displayed. Routine vs. Advanced Operation 3.9 Configuration Settings The design of the MTX5000 and the internal software makes commonly available settings accessible from the MTX5000 color LCD display during routine operations and during advanced operations. A summary of settings that can be controlled by each method is shown in Table 3-2. Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting Parameter Preset in use Preset text RF Band Channel Offset Antenna Antenna Polarity Power Amplifier (PA) select mode RF power select (RF) Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Factory Default Presets: A thru J Custom Presets:

1 thru 99 Any alphanumeric characters Dependent upon system options Dependent upon system options:

2 GHz Band:

Channels 1 thru 10 7 GHz Band:

Channels 1 thru 14

-, 0, or +

Antenna 1 Antenna 2 Horizontal (H) Vertical (V) Right Circular

(RC) Left Circular (LC) PA Off PA On Low (L) High (H) MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-73 Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Parameter Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Radio:

Network Configuration:

Radio IP Subnet Mask Gateway DNS Server File Network IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Enter address Enter address Enter address Enter address Enter address Enter address Enter address Trap Configuration Destination Address Port #

Level Adjust Color Bars RF Calibration Enter address Enter port number Perform Output Level Adjust Off On A Gen A Stby Perform PA Voltage Adjust Parameter License Key Change Pwd

(Password) Time & Date Diagnostics Presets Option Remote Control Option PA State Option Restore Presets to Defaults System Info Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Enter alphanumeric key to activate licensed option Enter alphanumeric password, as required Enter time and date Perform IDU diagnostics test Select factory default or custom user Presets Select remote control Select PA off or last state option Restore all Presets to factory defaults

(deletes all custom user Presets) Review software revision number MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-74 Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Parameter Analog Presets:

User:

FMT Setup:

Video Deviation 3 MHz 4 MHz Video Deviation Video Input Composite Baseband Audio CH1, CH2, CH3, and CH4 Enable Frequency On Off 4830 kHz 5200 kHz 5800 kHz 6200 kHz 6800 kHz 7020 kHz 7500 kHz 8065 kHz 8300 kHz 8590 kHz Custom On Off Digital COFDM Presets:

User:

Pre-

Emphasis Parameter COFDM Setup:

FEC Guard Interval Constel-

lation RF B/W MPEG Setup:

Video In Input (SD NTSC Mode) Input (SD PAL Mode) Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation 1/2 2/3 3/4 5/6 7/8 1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 QPSK 16-QAM 64-QAM 6 MHz 7 MHz 8 MHz NTSC NTSC No Pedestal SDI 525 PAL PAL-M PAL-N SDI 625 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-75 Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Parameter Input (HD Mode) Noise Reduction SDI Auto Line HD Test Pattern Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation 720p50 720p59 720p60 1080i25 1080i29 1080i30 1080p24 1080p25 1080p29 1080p30 1080psf23 1080psf24 1080psf25 1080psf29 1080psf30 On Off On Off On Off Audio In AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 Mode Stereo Dual Mono Parameter Standard Bit Rate Input Balance

(AUDIO 2 Only) Spectrum Invert Encoder Mode Bit Rate Bit Rate

(Manual) Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Linear PCM Off MPEG Layer II MPEG Layer I Analog SDI EMB Unbalanced Balanced 128 Kbps 160 Kbps 192 Kbps 224 Kbps 256 Kbps 320 Kbps 384 Kbps Test Tone Normal Inverted Standard Low Delay MP@ML 422P@ML Enter bit rate required MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-76 Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Parameter Bit Rate Auto GOP Length Horiz Resolution Aspect Ratio PTS per Picture VBI PID Data Default PMT VIDEO DATA AUDIO A AUDIO B PCR Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation On Off Enter Group of Pictures (GOP) length as required 720 704 544 528 480 352 4:3 16:9 On Off On Off Select default PIDs Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required Parameter Encoding Service Name Network Name EBS/BISS Wayside data Data Enable Baud Rate Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Enter service name Enter network name Enable encryption

(license required) TTV Format Off CJM2 Format Low Delay CJM2 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Digital ASI Presets:

User:

ASI Setup:

FEC 1/2 2/3 3/4 5/6 7/8 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-77 Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Parameter Guard Interval Constel-

lation RF B/W Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation 1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 QPSK 16-QAM 64-QAM 6 MHZ 7 MHZ 8 MHZ Digital LMS-T Presets:

User:

LMS-T Setup Constel-

lation RF B/W Guard Interval FEC MPEG Setup:

Video In Input (SD NTSC Mode) QPSK 16-QAM 10 MHZ 20 MHZ 1/16 1/8 2/3 NTSC NTSC No Pedestal SDI 525 Parameter Input (SD PAL Mode) Input (HD Mode) Noise Reduction SDI Auto Line HD Test Pattern Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation PAL PAL-M PAL-N SDI 625 720p50 720p59 720p60 1080i25 1080i29 1080i30 1080p24 1080p25 1080p29 1080p30 1080psf23 1080psf24 1080psf25 1080psf29 1080psf30 On Off On Off On Off MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-78 Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Parameter Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Parameter Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Audio In AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 Mode Standard Bit Rate Input Balance

(AUDIO 2 only) Spectrum Invert Encoder Mode Linear PCM Stereo Dual Mono Off MPEG Layer II MPEG Layer I Analog SDI EMB Unbalanced Balanced 128 Kbps 160 Kbps 192 Kbps 224 Kbps 256 Kbps 320 Kbps 384 Kbps Test Tone Normal Inverted Standard Low Delay Bit Rate Bit Rate

(Manual) Bit Rate Auto GOP Length Horiz Resolution Aspect Ratio PTS per Picture VBI PID Data Default PMT VIDEO DATA AUDIO A MP@ML 422P@ML Enter bit rate required On Off Enter Group of Pictures (GOP) length as required 720 704 544 528 480 352 4:3 16:9 On Off On Off Select default PIDs Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-79 Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Parameter AUDIO B PCR Encoding Service Name Network Name EBS/BISS Wayside data Data Enable Baud Rate Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Parameter Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter service name Enter network name Enable encryption

(license required) TTV Format Off CJM2 Format Low Delay CJM2 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Digital DVB-S Presets User:

COFDM Setup:

FEC Guard Interval Constel-

lation RF B/W 1/2 2/3 3/4 5/6 7/8 1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 QPSK 16-QAM 64-QAM 6 MHz 7 MHz 8 MHz DVB-S Setup:

DVBS Roll Off 20%

25%

35%

MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-80 Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Parameter MPEG Setup:

Video In Input (SD NTSC Mode) Input (SD PAL Mode) Input (HD Mode) Noise Reduction Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation NTSC NTSC No Pedestal SDI 525 PAL PAL-M PAL-N SDI 625 720p50 720p59 720p60 1080i25 1080i29 1080i30 1080p24 1080p25 1080p29 1080p30 1080psf23 1080psf24 1080psf25 1080psf29 1080psf30 On Off Parameter SDI Auto Line HD Test Pattern Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation On Off On Off Audio In AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 Mode Standard Bit Rate Input Balance

(AUDIO 2 only) Spectrum Invert Linear PCM Stereo Dual Mono Off MPEG Layer II MPEG Layer I Analog SDI EMB Unbalanced Balanced 128 Kbps 160 Kbps 192 Kbps 224 Kbps 256 Kbps 320 Kbps 384 Kbps Test Tone Normal Inverted MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-81 Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Parameter Encoder Mode Bit Rate Bit Rate

(Manual) Bit Rate Auto GOP Length Horiz Resolution Aspect Ratio PTS per Picture VBI PID Data Default PMT Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Standard Low Delay MP@ML 422P@ML Enter bit rate required On Off Enter Group of Pictures (GOP) length as required 720 704 544 528 480 352 4:3 16:9 On Off On Off Select default PIDs Enter PID required Parameter VIDEO DATA AUDIO A AUDIO B PCR Encoding Service Name Network Name EBS/BISS Wayside data Data Enable Baud Rate Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter service name Enter network name Enable encryption

(license required) TTV Format Off CJM2 Format Low Delay CJM2 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-82 Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Parameter Digital IP Presets:

User:

IP Setup:

IP Config FEC Guard Interval Constel-

lation RF B/W 1/2 2/3 3/4 5/6 7/8 1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 QPSK 16-QAM 64-QAM 6 MHZ 7 MHZ 8 MHz IP Setup IP Transfer Mode Video Bitrate IP Only IP + Video Enter bit rate required Parameter MPEG Setup:

Video In Input (SD NTSC Mode) Input (SD PAL Mode) Input (HD Mode) Noise Reduction Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation NTSC NTSC No Pedestal SDI 525 PAL PAL-M PAL-N SDI 625 720p50 720p59 720p60 1080i25 1080i29 1080i30 1080p24 1080p25 1080p29 1080p30 1080psf23 1080psf24 1080psf25 1080psf29 1080psf30 On Off MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-83 Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Parameter SDI Auto Line HD Test Pattern Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation On Off On Off Audio In AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 Mode Standard Bit Rate Input Balance

(AUDIO 2 only) Spectrum Invert Linear PCM Stereo Dual Mono Off MPEG Layer II MPEG Layer I Analog SDI EMB Unbalanced Balanced 128 Kbps 160 Kbps 192 Kbps 224 Kbps 256 Kbps 320 Kbps 384 Kbps Test Tone Normal Inverted Parameter Encoder Mode Bit Rate Bit Rate

(Manual) Bit Rate Auto GOP Length Horiz Resolution Aspect Ratio PTS per Picture VBI PID Data Default PMT Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Standard Low Delay MP@ML 422P@ML Enter bit rate required On Off Enter Group of Pictures (GOP) length as required 720 704 544 528 480 352 4:3 16:9 On Off On Off Select default PIDs Enter PID required MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-84 Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Table 3-2: Front Panel vs. Configuration Setting (Continued) Parameter VIDEO DATA AUDIO A AUDIO B PCR Encoding Service Name Network Name EBS/BISS Wayside data Data Enable Baud Rate PMT VIDEO DATA Parameter AUDIO A AUDIO B PCR Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required Available Settings Routine Operation Advanced Operation Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter service name Enter network name Enable encryption

(license required) TTV Format Off CJM2 Format Low Delay CJM2 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Enter PID required Enter PID required Enter PID required MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-85 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Routine Operation 3-86 4 Troubleshooting Error Messages Chapter Overview 4.1 This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your MTX5000 Transmitter System (MTX5000). 4.2 The MTX5000 has a library of diagnostic error messages to help you pinpoint any problems. Errors detected during normal operation of the MTX5000 system will cause the MTX5000 Indoor Unit (IDU) color LCD display panel Main screen ODU, IDU, or SUM status indicators to turn yellow or red, alerting you to investigate the problem. See Figure 4-1. not impact transmit operations. Green status indicators indicate no faults are present. The applicable ODU, IDU, or SUM status button must be selected using the IDU color LCD display panel touch screen or front panel function keys and SEL key to view the error messages. The error messages are displayed on the MTX5000 color LCD display screen ODU Status, IDU Status, or Summary Alarm dialog boxes. See Figure 4-2, Figure 4-3, and Figure 4-4 on page 4-2. Figure 4-2: ODU Status Dialog Box - Typical O DU Status xxxxxxxxxxx Figure 4-1: Color LCD Display Panel - Typical OK Preset 1 Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7L RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Direct Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L Figure 4-3: IDU Status Dialog Box - Typical IDU Status xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx OK Red ODU, IDU, or SUM status indicators indicate at least one major fault is present that adversely effects transmit operation. Yellow status indicators indicate a minor fault is present that does MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Troubleshooting 4-1 Figure 4-4: Summary Alarm Dialog Box - Typical Table 4-1: IDU Error Messages Summary Alarm xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx OK In all cases, the error message will uniquely identify the problem, i.e., +5.5V Powersupply Error. To isolate possible IDU problems, see Perform IDU Diagnostics on page 3-56. See Table 4-1 for a list of Indoor Unit (IDU) error messages and what to do when they appear. Table 4-1: IDU Error Messages Error Message Error Type

+5.5V Powersupply Error

+12V Powersupply Error Major Suggested Technical Staff Action Indicates internal power supply failure and potential unstable operation. Verify IDU input power. Call MRC Technical Support. Error Message Error Type

+24V Powersupply Error

-12V Powersupply Error Minor Ext IF Level Too High Minor Suggested Technical Staff Action Indicates minor internal power supply failure. Verify IDU input power. Call MRC Technical Support. Indicates external IF level is above recommended level. Attenuate or disconnect signal to avoid system damage. FMT Fault Alarm Major Call MRC Technical Support. Indicates internal hardware fault. Minor Audio1 Unlocked Audio2 Unlocked Audio3 Unlocked Audio4 Unlocked Analog Video Unlocked Minor Call MRC Technical Support. Verify audio input is connected Verify composite video input is connected. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Troubleshooting 4-2 Table 4-1: IDU Error Messages Error Message Error Type Audio Modulator Fault Minor Suggested Technical Staff Action Indicates internal hardware fault. Digital Modulator Fault Major Call MRC Technical Support. Indicates internal hardware fault. Digital Mod. Transport Unlocked Digital Mod. Video Unlocked Minor Minor Call MRC Technical Support. May indicate internal hardware fault or invalid input. Verify input video connection. See Table 4-2 for a list of Outdoor Unit (ODU) error messages and what to do when they appear. Table 4-2: ODU Error Messages Error Message Error Type

+15V Powersupply Error Major Suggested Technical Staff Action Indicates internal power supply failure and potential unstable operation. Verify IDU input power.

+12V Powersupply Error

+11V Powersupply Error Minor Call MRC Technical Support. Indicates ODU power supply failure. Verify ODU cabling. Call MRC Technical RFU Comm. Error Major Support. Indicates a communication error between the IDU and ODU. Verify DC power is being supplied to the ODU and verify RF cable connection between the IDU and ODU. Call MRC Technical Support. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Troubleshooting 4-3 Table 4-2: ODU Error Messages Error Message Error Type Suggested Technical Staff Action Transmit Power Low Major If error persists for more than 10 seconds, verify cabling between IDU and ODU. If in External IF operating mode, verify 70 MHz input is properly connected. RFU UHF Unlocked RFU Synth. Unlocked Minor Call MRC Technical Support. Indicates RF circuitry is unlocked. Wait 5-

10 seconds and error should clear. Call MRC Technical Support. Ethernet Connections 4.3 If you are connected to the Ethernet via the IDU rear panel ETHERNET RJ45 connector and you find that the color LCD display panel appears to be operating very slowly or has locked up completely, disconnect the Ethernet cable from the ETHERNET connector. This should free up the color LCD display Panel and the IDU should resume operating properly. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Troubleshooting 4-4 5 Advanced Operations Chapter Overview 5.1 This chapter describes how to use the software contained in the MTX5000 to provide password control of advanced operations, to create or update Preset settings in the Local or Remote mode, to set an Internet Protocol (IP) address for remote operations, and to update the MTX5000 software. This information is provided and intended for use by the technical staff. Here are the topics covered:

Topic Before You Begin MTX5000 Software Settings System Rules Configuration Settings Local Mode Password Control Create or Update Preset Configuration Settings in Local Mode Create or Update Custom Analog Preset Configuration In Local Mode Create or Update Digital COFDM Preset Configuration Settings in Local Mode Create or Update Digital ASI Preset Configuration Settings in Local Mode Create or Update Digital LMS-T Preset Configuration Settings in Local Mode Page 5-1 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-6 5-7 5-17 5-30 5-34 Create or Update Digital DVB-S Preset Configuration Settings in Local Mode Create or Update Digital IP Preset Configuration Settings in Local Mode Create or Update Preset Configuration Settings in Remote Mode Create or Update Custom Analog Preset Configuration in Remote Mode Create or Update Custom Digital COFDM Preset Configuration in Remote Mode Create or Update Custom Digital ASI Preset Configuration in Remote Mode Create or Update Custom Digital LMS-T Preset Configuration in Remote Mode Create or Update Custom Digital DVB-S Preset Configuration in Remote Mode Create or Update Custom Digital IP Preset Configuration in Remote Mode Preset File Management Restore Presets to Defaults Save Preset Configurations to a File Load Preset Configurations from a File Set Network Addresses for Remote Operation Firmware Update License Manager 5.2 Before you begin, you should review the following topics. Before You Begin 5-47 5-60 5-73 5-73 5-77 5-82 5-86 5-91 5-96 5-101 5-102 5-104 5-106 5-114 5-114 5-117 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-1 5.2.1 MTX5000 The procedures described in this chapter assume you already know how to operate your MTX5000. If this is not the case, please review the information presented in the following Chapters of this manual:

Introduction Chapter on page 1-1 Product Description Chapter on page 2-1 Routine Operation Chapter on page 3-1 Software 5.2.2 This chapter assumes the MTX5000 software is operating properly on your MTX5000 and that you are familiar with the MTX5000 color LCD display panel screens, touch panel, and function keys. You must also be familiar with both Local and Remote operations. Settings 5.2.3 Before beginning to create, modify, or program a Preset configuration or channel plan into your MTX5000, you must define what settings are required. System Rules 5.2.4 The IDU does not need to be removed from its rack-mounted position to perform these procedures. The procedures can be performed when the IDU is installed in its normal rack-mounted position. It is important, however, that the MTX5000 must not be transmitting when these procedures are performed. When performing procedures contained in this Chapter, you must observe the following CAUTIONS to avoid corrupting software. CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION Do not power down the MTX5000 system when the software update progress bar is displayed, as the software update can become corrupted. Do not attempt to perform IDU software updates or make changes to Preset settings while the MTX5000 system is actively transmitting. Attempts to program software updates or make changes to Preset settings into the IDU when the system is transmitting will interrupt broadcast operations and may corrupt the software. Avoid damage to the color LCD display panel!

The color LCD display panel touch screen may be damaged if a sharp, hard-pointed object, such as a pencil or a pen, is used to select the displayed options. Touch screen options must only be selected using your fingers, a soft-pointed stylus, or the front panel function keys. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-2 Damage to the color LCD display panel caused by using a hard-pointed object or other misuse may void your warranty on the MTX5000 IDU. When configuring your MTX5000 IDU, the following rules must be observed:

You can only select configuration settings applicable to the hardware configuration and the licensed options contained in your MTX5000 IDU. The MTX5000 IDU must not be placed in the transmit mode when performing any procedures contained in this Chapter. Configuration Settings 5.2.5 New configuration settings can be prepared from scratch using an existing factory default Preset or from a custom user Preset. The factory default Presets and your custom user Presets must be used as make-froms to prepare any new Preset from scratch. Preset configuration settings may be prepared in either the Local or Remote operating mode. Other advanced operations must be performed in the Local mode only. Custom user Presets can also be modified, as required. Your MTX5000 IDU was delivered with 10 factory default Presets. The factory default Presets cannot be changed or deleted from your IDU. When preparing a new Preset, you must first select a Preset to be used as a make-from to prepare the new Preset configuration. If a factory Preset is inactive, the licensed option is not contained in your IDU. If you are preparing a new Preset configuration in the Local mode and the licensed option is not contained in your IDU, the option will be inactive (greyed-out) on the IDU color LCD display. If you are preparing a new Preset in the Remote mode and the licensed option is not contained in your IDU, a message window indicating This preset cannot be selected. will be displayed on the remote PC display. Only licensed options contained in your IDU may be used to prepare new custom user Presets. Once a Preset configuration is created or changed, it should be saved. The IDU will remember the last operating state, but there is no guarantee that it will remember the state unless the Preset configuration settings are saved into the Preset list. The steps required to save the settings are contained in the applicable procedures. 5.3 Local Mode Password Control CAUTION Avoid damage to the color LCD display panel!

The color LCD display panel touch screen may be damaged if a sharp, hard-pointed object, such as a pencil or a pen, is used to select the displayed options. Touch screen options must only be selected using your fingers, a soft-pointed stylus, or the front panel function keys. Damage to the color LCD display panel caused by using a hard-pointed object or other misuse may void your warranty on the MTX5000 IDU. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-3 The MTX5000 IDU provides password control of the system to prevent unauthorized personnel from making changes to Preset settings. Local mode password control of the system may only be performed with the MTX5000 IDU in the Local mode of operation. All passwords are case-sensitive. The MTX5000 IDU is delivered with a default password. When your IDU is received from the factory, the default password is PASSWORD. The default password should be changed to your own personal password upon receipt of the MTX5000 System. Your new password should be recorded and should be maintained in a secure location. The procedure required to change the default or current password to another password of your choice is contained in the following steps. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

1. Figure 5-1: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L PA Operation Button 3. 4. 5. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-2. Figure 5-2: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-4 6. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 5-3. Figure 5-3: Radio Screen Radio 8. Select the Enter Old Password option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-5. Figure 5-5: Keyboard Screen Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info

Q W E R T Y

U

I

O A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M

Back Main Next Shift

) P

BS 7. Select the Change Pwd option button and observe the Change Password screen is displayed. See Figure 5-4. Figure 5-4: Change Password Screen Change Password Enter Old Password Enter Password Re-Enter Password Clear Accept Cancel Main Enter Clear Cancel Notes When entering passwords in the following steps, the password is case-sensitive. Passwords may consist of from 1 to 15 alphanumeric characters. If any errors are made when entering a password, an error message will be displayed in the keyboard screen text box. Select the keyboard Clear key and re-enter the correct password. 9. Enter the old password, select the Enter key, and observe the Change Password screen is displayed. See Figure 5-6 on page 5-6. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-5 Figure 5-6: Change Password Screen Change Password Enter Old Password Test Enter Password Re-enter Password Clear Accept Cancel Main 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Observe the Enter Password option button is active, select the Enter Password option button, and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. Enter your new password, select the Enter key, and observe the Change Password screen is displayed. Select the Re-enter Password option button, and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. Re-enter your new password, select the Enter key, and observe the Change Password screen is displayed. Select the Accept option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Create or Update Preset 5.4 Configuration Settings in Local Mode CAUTION Avoid damage to the color LCD display panel when performing the following procedures!

The color LCD display panel touch screen may be damaged if a sharp, hard-pointed object, such as a pencil or a pen, is used to select the displayed options. Touch screen options must only be selected using your fingers, a soft-pointed stylus, or the front panel function keys. Damage to the color LCD display panel caused by using a hard-pointed object or other misuse may void your warranty on the MTX5000 IDU. The procedures required to create or update Preset configuration settings in the Local mode are contained in the following paragraphs. Preset configuration settings may be created or updated for the following types of Presets:

Analog FMT Presets Digital COFDM Presets Digital ASI Presets Digital LMS-T Presets MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-6 Digital DVB-S Presets Digital IP Presets. Please note that an External IF In Preset is also available for normal operation using the factory default External IF In Preset, but no configuration settings may be made to this Preset. No procedures are therefore applicable or are provided in this chapter for External IF In Presets. Create or Update Custom Analog Preset 5.4.1 Configuration In Local Mode The procedure required to create a new custom analog Preset configuration or to update an existing Preset configuration is contained in the following steps. When preparing a new analog Preset, you must first select an existing analog Preset from either one of the analog factory default Presets or from your custom user analog Presets. The selected Preset will be used as a make-from to prepare the new analog Preset configuration. Please note that while factory default analog Presets may be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, these factory default Presets cannot be changed or deleted. They can only be used as make-froms. When the new configuration is prepared using the factory default Preset, it cannot be saved with the factory Preset number or Preset name. A new Preset number and Preset name must be assigned to the new Preset. When using a custom Preset as a make-from, the new Preset should be saved with a new Preset number. When you save the new Preset, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. If you select an existing Preset number when saving the new Preset, the original custom Preset will be overwritten and cannot be recovered. The only way to restore a Preset that has been overwritten is to re-enter the custom Preset data from scratch. If you are updating configuration settings on an existing custom user Preset, when you save the configuration settings, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. You must enter and save the configuration settings using the original Preset number. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

7. Figure 5-7: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L PA Operation Button MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-7 3. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. Notes If you are updating an existing analog Preset configuration, select the Preset to be updated in the following step. If you are creating a new analog Preset configuration, any analog Preset may be selected in the following step. 4. 5. 6. Perform Select Preset on page 3-24 to select the analog Preset required to be updated or to be used as a make-from. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. Select the Main screen Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

8. Figure 5-8: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-9. Figure 5-9: Keyboard Screen

Q W E R T Y

U

I

O A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M

Shift

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel 8. Enter your password, select the Enter key, and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-10. Figure 5-10: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main 7. Select the User option button and observe the 9. Select the FMT option button and observe the FMT SETUP screen is displayed. See Figure 5-11 on page 5-9. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-8 Figure 5-11: FMT SETUP Screen - Typical FMT SETUP 13. Select the Video Deviation option button and observe the FMT VIDEO screen is displayed. See Figure 5-13. Figure 5-13: FMT VIDEO Screen - Typical Audio Deviation Video Deviation Audio CH1 Audio CH2 Audio CH3 Audio CH4 Back Main 10. Select the Audio Deviation option button and observe the Analog Audio Deviation screen is displayed. See Figure 5-12. Figure 5-12: Analog Audio Deviation Screen - Typical Analog Audio Deviation Audio Ch2 0 Audio Ch3 0 Audio Ch1 0 Audio Ch4 0 Back Main 11. 12. Use the up and down arrows, as required, to select the audio deviation for Audio Ch1 thru Audio Ch4. Audio deviation range is 0 thru 31 for each audio channel. Select the Back option button and observe the FMT SETUP screen is displayed. FMT VIDEO VIDEO DEVIATION 3 MHz 4 MHz VIDEO INPUT Composite Back Main Note In the following step, the VIDEO DEVIATION -

4 MHz option button will be active only if the 17 MHz or 25 MHz channel plan is active in your MTX5000 System. 14. 15. Select the VIDEO DEVIATION - 3 MHz or 4 MHz option button, as required, and observe the selected option button becomes active (blue). Select the VIDEO INPUT pull-down menu and select the Composite or Baseband option, as required. See Figure 5-14 on page 5-10. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-9 Figure 5-14: VIDEO INPUT Options - Typical Figure 5-16: AUDIO CH1 Screen - Typical FMT VIDEO AUDIO CH1 VIDEO DEVIATION 3 MHz 4 MHz VIDEO INPUT Composite Composite Baseband Back Main 16. Select the Back option button and observe the FMT SETUP screen is displayed. See Figure 5-15. Notes Figure 5-15: FMT SETUP Screen FMT SETUP Audio Deviation Video Deviation Audio CH1 Audio CH2 Audio CH3 Audio CH4 Back Main 17. Select the Audio CH1 option button and observe the AUDIO CH1 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-16. ENABLE PRE-EMPHASIS Off On FREQUENCY 4830 kHz Back Main The ENABLE setting must be set to On to enable the PRE-EMPHASIS option button and the audio FREQUENCY pull-down menu. If the ENABLE - Off option is required, go to step 18. To enable PRE-EMPHASIS and/or select the audio FREQUENCY, go to step 19. 18. 19. 20. Select the ENABLE option button to select the Off option and observe the PRE-EMPHASIS option button and the FREQUENCY pull-down menu become inactive (greyed-out). Go to step 25. Select the ENABLE option button to select the On option and observe the PRE-EMPHASIS option button becomes active (not greyed-out). Select the PRE-EMPHASIS option button and select On or Off, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-10 Note In the following step, the FREQUENCY pull-down menu may be used to select fixed audio frequencies or you may select the Custom option to create custom audio frequencies. To select a fixed audio frequency, go to step 21. To select a custom audio frequency, go to step 22. 21. Use the FREQUENCY pull-down menu (See Figure 5-

17) to select the frequency option required and go to step 25. Figure 5-17: Frequency Pull-Down Menu - Typical AUDIO CH1 ENABLE PRE-EMPHASIS On On Back Main FREQUENCY 4830 kHz 4830 kHz 5200 kHz 5800 kHz 6200 kHz 22. 23. Use the FREQUENCY pull-down menu to select the Custom option and observe the FREQUENCY option button becomes active (not greyed-out). Select the FREQUENCY option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-18. Figure 5-18: Numeric Keypad 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC 24. 25. 26. Enter the custom audio frequency required (range is 4830 kHz to 8590 kHz), select the ENT key, and observe the AUDIO CH1 screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the FMT SETUP screen is displayed. Select the Audio CH2 option button and observe the AUDIO CH2 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-19. Figure 5-19: AUDIO CH2 Screen - Typical AUDIO CH2 ENABLE PRE-EMPHASIS Off On FREQUENCY 4830 kHz Back Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-11 Notes 27. 28. 29. Note The ENABLE setting must be set to On to enable the PRE-EMPHASIS option button and the audio FREQUENCY pull-down menu. If the ENABLE - Off option is required, go to step 27. To enable PRE-EMPHASIS and/or select the audio FREQUENCY, go to step 28. Select the ENABLE option button to select the Off option and observe the PRE-EMPHASIS option button and the FREQUENCY pull-down menu become inactive (greyed-out). Go to step 34. Select the ENABLE option button and observe the PRE-EMPHASIS option button becomes active (not greyed-out). Select the PRE-EMPHASIS option button and select On or Off, as required. In the following step, the FREQUENCY pull-down menu may be used to select fixed audio frequencies or you may select the Custom option to create custom audio frequencies. To select a fixed audio frequency, go to step 30. To select a custom audio frequency, go to step 31. 30. Use the FREQUENCY pull-down menu (See Figure 5-

20) to select the frequency option required and go to step 34. Figure 5-20: Frequency Pull-Down Menu - Typical AUDIO CH2 ENABLE PRE-EMPHASIS On On Back Main FREQUENCY 4830 kHz 4830 kHz 5200 kHz 5800 kHz 6200 kHz 31. 32. Use the FREQUENCY pull-down menu to select the Custom option and observe the FREQUENCY option button becomes active (not greyed-out). Select the FREQUENCY option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-21. Figure 5-21: Numeric Keypad 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC 33. Enter the custom audio frequency required (range is 4830 kHz to 8590 kHz), select the ENT key, and observe the AUDIO CH2 screen is displayed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-12 34. 35. Select the Back option button and observe the FMT SETUP screen is displayed. Select the Audio CH3 option button and observe the AUDIO CH1 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-22. Figure 5-22: AUDIO CH3 Screen - Typical AUDIO CH3 ENABLE PRE-EMPHASIS Off On FREQUENCY 4830 kHz Back Main Notes The ENABLE setting must be set to On to enable the PRE-EMPHASIS option button and the audio FREQUENCY pull-down menu. If the ENABLE - Off option is required, go to step 36. To enable PRE-EMPHASIS and/or select the audio FREQUENCY, go to step 37. 36. 37. Select the ENABLE option button to select the Off option and observe the PRE-EMPHASIS option button and the FREQUENCY pull-down menu become inactive (greyed-out). Go to step 43. Select the ENABLE option button and observe the 38. Note PRE-EMPHASIS option button becomes active (not greyed-out). Select the PRE-EMPHASIS option button and select On or Off, as required. In the following step, the FREQUENCY pull-down menu may be used to select fixed audio frequencies or you may select the Custom option to create custom audio frequencies. To select a fixed audio frequency, go to step 39. To select a custom audio frequency, go to step 40. 39. Use the FREQUENCY pull-down menu (See Figure 5-

23) to select the frequency option required and go to step 43. Figure 5-23: Frequency Pull-Down Menu - Typical AUDIO CH3 ENABLE PRE-EMPHASIS On On Back Main FREQUENCY 4830 kHz 4830 kHz 5200 kHz 5800 kHz 6200 kHz 40. Use the FREQUENCY pull-down menu to select the Custom option and observe the FREQUENCY option button becomes active (not greyed-out). MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-13 41. Select the FREQUENCY option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-24. Notes Figure 5-24: Numeric Keypad 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC 42. 43. 44. Enter the custom audio frequency required (range is 4830 kHz to 8590 kHz), select the ENT key, and observe the AUDIO CH3 screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the FMT SETUP screen is displayed. Select the Audio CH4 option button and observe the AUDIO CH4 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-25. Figure 5-25: AUDIO CH4 Screen - Typical AUDIO CH4 ENABLE PRE-EMPHASIS Off On FREQUENCY 4830 kHz Back Main The ENABLE setting must be set to On to enable the PRE-EMPHASIS option button and the audio FREQUENCY pull-down menu. If the ENABLE - Off option is required, go to step 45. To enable PRE-EMPHASIS and/or select the audio FREQUENCY, go to step 46. Select the ENABLE option button to select the Off option and observe the PRE-EMPHASIS option button and the FREQUENCY pull-down menu become inactive (greyed-out). Go to step 52. Select the ENABLE option button and observe the PRE-EMPHASIS option button becomes active (not greyed-out). Select the PRE-EMPHASIS option button and select On or Off, as required. In the following step, the FREQUENCY pull-down menu may be used to select fixed audio frequencies or you may select the Custom option to create custom audio frequencies. To select a fixed audio frequency, go to step 48. To select a custom audio frequency, go to step 49. 45. 46. 47. Note 48. Use the FREQUENCY pull-down menu (See Figure 5-

26 on page 5-15) to select the frequency option required and go to step 53. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-14 Figure 5-26: Frequency Pull-Down Menu - Typical AUDIO CH4 ENABLE PRE-EMPHASIS On On Back Main FREQUENCY 4830 kHz 4830 kHz 5200 kHz 5800 kHz 6200 kHz 49. 50. Use the FREQUENCY pull-down menu to select the Custom option and observe the FREQUENCY option button becomes active (not greyed-out). Select the FREQUENCY option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-27. Figure 5-27: Numeric Keypad 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC 51. Enter the custom audio frequency required (range is 4830 kHz to 8590 kHz), select the ENT key, and observe the AUDIO CH4 screen is displayed. 52. 53. Select the Back option button and observe the FMT SETUP screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

28. Figure 5-28: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main Note When the Save As Preset screen is displayed in the following step, the Preset Text and Save text boxes will display the name and identification of the analog Preset currently being used as the analog make-from for this custom Preset. 54. Select the Save As Preset option button and observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed. See Figure 5-29 on page 5-16. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-15 Figure 5-29: Save As Preset Screen - Typical Figure 5-30: Keyboard Screen Save As Preset Preset Text Analog 4.83 & 6.2, 4MHz Vid Dev Save A Back Main Notes In the following steps, if a factory default analog Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, the Preset Text text box and the Save text box must be changed. You cannot change or overwrite any factory default Presets!

If a custom analog Preset was used as a make-

from to prepare this custom Preset, a brief description of the custom Preset should be entered in the Preset Text text box for easy identification purposes. 55. Select the Preset Text option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-30.

Q W E R T Y

U

I

O A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M

Shift

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel 56. 57. Enter a unique analog Preset description, as required, and select the Enter key. Observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed and the Preset Text text box displays the Preset description. Notes When saving the new custom analog Preset in the following step, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number to avoid overwriting an existing Preset. If you wish to overwrite the existing Preset number

(unless it is a factory default Preset), enter the Preset number to be overwritten. A warning message will be displayed asking Are you sure?. Select the Yes option button. Once an existing custom Preset is overwritten, it cannot be recovered. It must be re-entered from scratch. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-16 58. Select the Save option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-31. Figure 5-32: Confirmation Screen Figure 5-31: Numeric Keypad - Typical Next Available Preset Number 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC Are you sure?

Yes No 61. Select the YES option button and observe the Please Wait! message box is displayed. See Figure 5-33. Figure 5-33: Please Wait Message Box Notes When saving Presets in the following steps, Preset A thru Preset J are factory default Presets. The factory default Presets cannot be changed. Please Wait!

Yes No Notes To change the default Preset number, perform step 59 and go to step 60. To accept the next available Preset number, go to step 60. 59. 60. Select the CLR key and enter the Preset number required. Select the ENT key and observe the Are you sure?

confirmation screen is displayed. See Figure 5-32. 62. 63. After a short delay, observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Create or Update Digital COFDM Preset 5.4.2 Configuration Settings in Local Mode The procedure required to create a new custom digital COFDM Preset configuration or to update an existing digital COFDM Preset configuration is contained in the following steps. When preparing a new digital COFDM Preset, you must first select an existing digital COFDM Preset from either one of the MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-17 digital COFDM factory default Presets or from your own custom digital COFDM Presets. The selected Preset will be used as a make-from to prepare the new digital COFDM Preset configuration. Please note that while factory default COFDM Presets may be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, these factory default Presets cannot be changed or deleted. They can only be used as make-froms. When the new configuration is prepared using the factory default Preset, it cannot be saved with the factory Preset number or Preset name. A new Preset number and Preset name must be assigned to the new Preset. When using a custom Preset as a make-from, the new Preset should be saved with a new Preset number. When you save the new Preset, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. If you select an existing Preset number when saving the new Preset, the original custom Preset will be overwritten and cannot be recovered. The only way to restore a Preset that has been overwritten is to re-enter the custom Preset data from scratch. If you are updating configuration settings on an existing custom Preset, when you save the configuration settings, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. You must enter and save the configuration settings using the original Preset number. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. 2. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

34. Figure 5-34: Main Screen - Typical PA Operation Button Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 3. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. Notes If you are updating an existing digital COFDM Preset configuration, select the Preset to be updated in the following step. If you are creating a new digital COFDM Preset configuration, any digital COFDM Preset may be selected in the following step. 4. 5. Perform Select Preset on page 3-24 to select the digital COFDM Preset required to be updated or to be used as a make-from. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-18 6. Select the Main screen Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

35. Figure 5-35: Setup Screen Setup observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-37. Figure 5-37: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode User Radio Main COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main 7. Select the User option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-36. Figure 5-36: Keyboard Screen 9. Select the COFDM option button and observe the COFDM screen is displayed. See Figure 5-38. Figure 5-38: COFDM Screen - Typical

Q W E R A S D F Z X C T V Shift

U

I

O Y G H J K L B N M

) P

BS COFDM FEC Guard Interval Constellation 1/2 1/8 QPSK RF B/W 8 MHz Back Main Enter Clear Cancel 8. Enter your password, select the Enter key, and 10. Use the FEC (Forward Error Correction) pull-down menu and select 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-19 11. 12. 13. 14. Use the Guard Interval pull-down menu and select 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4, as required. Use the Constellation pull-down menu to select QPSK, 16-QAM, or 64-QAM, as required. Use the RF B/W pull-down menu to select 6 MHZ, 7 MHZ, or 8 MHZ, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

39. Figure 5-39: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main Figure 5-40: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 16. Select the Video In option button and observe the Video In screen is displayed. See Figure 5-41. Figure 5-41: Video In Screen - Typical Video In Input NTSC 15. Select the MPEG option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-40. Back Video In2 Note In the following step, select an Input option applicable to the licensed options contained in your MTX5000 IDU only. Selection of an option that is not licensed in your radio will cause the IDU to operate in the NTSC default mode. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-20 17. 18. Use the Input pull-down menu to select the video input option required. Select the Video In2 option button and observe the Video In screen 2 is displayed. See Figure 5-42. Figure 5-42: Video In Screen 2 - Typical Video In Noise Reduction SDI Auto Line Off Off HD Test Pattern Off Back Main 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. Select the Noise Reduction option button for On or Off, as required. Select the SDI Auto Line option button for On or Off, as required. Select the HD Test Pattern option button for On or Off, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the Video In screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-43. Figure 5-43: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 24. Select the Audio In option button and observe the AUDIO 1 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-44. Figure 5-44: AUDIO 1 Screen - Typical AUDIO 1 Mode Standard Bit Rate Dual Mono MPEG Layer II 192 Kbps Input Analog Back Main Audio 2 25. 26. Use the Mode pull-down menu to select Stereo or Dual Mono, as required. Use the Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-21 27. 28. 29. Use the Bit Rate pull-down menu to select 128 Kbps, 160 Kbps, 192 Kbps, 224 Kbps, 256 Kbps, 320 Kbps, or 384 Kbps, as required. Use the Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, or SDI Emb, as required. Select the Audio 2 option button and observe the AUDIO 2 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-45. Figure 5-45: AUDIO 2 Screen - Typical AUDIO 2 Mode Standard Bit Rate Dual Mono MPEG Layer II 192 Kbps Input Analog Balance Unbalanced Back Main 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. Use the Mode pull-down menu to select Stereo or Dual Mono, as required. Use the Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. Use the Bit Rate pull-down menu to select 128 Kbps, 160 Kbps, 192 Kbps, 224 Kbps, 256 Kbps, 320 Kbps, or 384 Kbps, as required. Use the Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, SDI Emb, AES-EBU, or Channel Ide, as required. Use the Balance pull-down menu to select Unbalanced or Balanced, as required. 35. 36. Select the Back option button and observe the AUDIO 1 screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-46. Figure 5-46: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 37. 38. Select the Spectrum Invert option button to select Normal or Inverted, as required. Select the Encoder option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. See Figure 5-47. Figure 5-47: Encoder Screen - Typical Encoder Mode Bit Rate Low delay MP@ML Bit Rate 4.9 Mb/s ASI Bit Rate Bit Rate Auto On GOP Length 5.529 Mb/s 15 Back Main Encoder 2 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-22 39. 40. Select the Mode pull-down menu and select Standard or Low delay, as required. Select the Bit Rate pull-down menu and select MP@ML or 422P@ML, as required. Notes In the following step, if the Bit Rate Auto option button option selected is On, the Bit Rate option button will be inactive (greyed out). Go to step 44. If the Bit Rate Auto option button option selected is Off, the Bit Rate option button will be active. Go to step 42. 41. 42. Select the Bit Rate Auto option button for Off or On, as required. Observe the Bit Rate option button is active. Select the Bit Rate option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-48. Figure 5-48: Numeric Keypad 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 DEL 2 5 8 0 Figure 5-49: Numeric Keypad 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC 45. 46. Enter the Group of Pictures (GOP) number required, select the ENT key, and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. Select the Encoder 2 option button and observe the Encoder screen 2 is displayed. See Figure 5-50. Figure 5-50: Encoder Screen 2 - Typical Encoder Horiz Resolution Aspect Ratio 720 4:3 PID PTS per Picture Off Remux VBI Off Off Back Main 43. 44. Enter the bit rate required, select the ENT key, and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. Select the GOP Length option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-49. 47. 48. Select the Horiz Resolution pull-down menu and select 720, 704, 544, 528, 480, or 352, as required. Select the Aspect Ratio pull-down menu and select 4:3 or 16:9, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-23 49. Select the PID option button and observe the PID screen is displayed. See Figure 5-51. Figure 5-51: PID Screen - Typical PID DEFAULT PMT VIDEO 12 300 DATA AUDIO A AUDIO B 100 200 201 PCR 8190 Back Main Next Notes To select the default PID settings, go to step 50. To enter individual PID settings, go to step 51. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. Select the DEFAULT option button and observe the default PID settings are displayed. Go to step 71. Select the DATA option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the DATA PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the AUDIO A option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the AUDIO A PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the PMT option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. Enter the PMT PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the AUDIO B option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the AUDIO B PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the VIDEO option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Video PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the PCR option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the PCR PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the Next option button and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-52. Figure 5-52: PID-2 Screen - Typical PID-2 Program ID Transport ID 3 1 Network ID 1 Back Main 64. Select the Program ID option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-53 on page 5-25. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-24 Figure 5-53: Numeric Keypad 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 DEL 2 5 8 0 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. Enter the Program ID PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. Select the Network ID option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Network ID PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. Select the Transport ID option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Transport ID PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. Select the Remux option button for On or Off, as required. Select the PTS per Picture option button for On or Off, as required. Select the VBI option button for On or Off, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. 76. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-54. Figure 5-54: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 77. Select the Encoding option button and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. See Figure 5-55. Figure 5-55: Encoding Screen - Typical Encoding Service Name Service 01 Network Name EBS/BISS Wayside data Back Main 78. Select the Service Name option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-56 on page 5-26. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-25 Figure 5-56: Keyboard Screen Figure 5-57: Encryption Screen

Q W E R A S D F Z X C T V Shift

U

I

O Y G H J K L B N M

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel 79. 80. 81. Enter the service name required, select the Enter key, and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. Select the Network Name option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. Enter the network name required, select the Enter key, and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. Notes If your MTX5000 IDU contains a licensed EBS or BISS encryption option, go to step 82. If your MTX5000 IDU does not contain a licensed EBS or BISS encryption option, go to step 88. 82. 83. Observe the EBS/BISS option button is active (not greyed-out). Select the EBS/BISS option button and observe the Encryption screen is displayed. See Figure 5-57. Encryption Scrambling EBS Key BISS-1 Key BISS-E Key xx xx xx Back Main Notes You can only have one licensed encryption option contained in your MTX5000 IDU. When the Scrambling pull-down menu EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E option is selected in the following step, the selected option key will be active, but the two remaining option buttons will become inactive (greyed-out). 84. 85. Select the Scrambling pull-down menu EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E option, as required, and observe the selected EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E Key option button is active. Select the EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E Key option button, as required, and observe the alphanumeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-58 on page 5-27. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-26

 

 

Figure 5-58: Alphanumeric Keypad 1 4 7 2 5 8 DEL CAN 3 6 9 0 0 A B C D E F ENT Note When the Encryption screen is displayed in the following step and the encryption key is entered, the actual encryption key will not be displayed. 86. 87. Enter your encryption key, select the ENT key, and observe the Encryption screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. See Figure 5-59. Figure 5-59: Encoding Screen - Typical Encoding Service Name Service 01 Network Name EBS/BISS Wayside data Back Main 88. Select the Wayside data option button and observe the Wayside Data screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

60. Figure 5-60: Wayside Data Screen - Typical Wayside Data Data Enable Baud Rate Off 2400 Back Main 89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94. Select the Data Enable pull-down menu and select the Off, TTV Format, CJM2 Format, or Low Delay CJM2 option, as required. Select the Baud Rate pull-down menu and select the 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400 option, as required. Select the Submit option button. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

61 on page 5-28. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-27 Figure 5-61: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode Notes COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main Note When the Save As Preset screen is displayed in the following step, the Preset Text and Save text boxes will display the name and identification of the digital COFDM Preset currently being used as the digital COFDM make-from for this custom Preset. 95. Select the Save As Preset option button and observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed. See Figure 5-62. Figure 5-62: Save As Preset Screen - Typical In the following steps, if a factory default digital COFDM Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, the Preset Text text box and the Save text box must be changed. You cannot change or overwrite any factory default Presets!

If a custom digital COFDM Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, a brief description of the custom Preset must be entered in the Preset Text text box for easy identification purposes. 96. Select the Preset Text option button and observe that the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-63. Figure 5-63: Keyboard Screen

Q W E R T Y

U

I

O A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M

) P

BS Save As Preset Shift Preset Text Digital COFDM QPSK 4:2:0,8,1/2,comp Save C Back Main Enter Clear Cancel 97. 98. Enter a unique digital COFDM Preset description, as required, and select the Enter key. Observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed and the Preset Text text box displays the Preset description. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-28 Notes When saving the new custom digital Preset in the following step, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number to avoid overwriting an existing Preset. If you wish to overwrite the existing Preset number

(unless it is a factory default Preset), enter the Preset number to be overwritten. A warning message will be displayed asking Are you sure?. Select the Yes option button. Once an existing custom Preset is overwritten, it cannot be recovered. It must be re-entered from scratch. 99. Select the Save option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-64. Figure 5-64: Numeric Keypad - Typical Notes To change the default Preset number, perform step 100 and go to step 101. To accept the next available Preset number, go to step 101 100. Select the CLR key and enter the Preset number required. 101. Select the ENT key and observe the Are you sure?

confirmation screen is displayed. See Figure 5-65. Figure 5-65: Confirmation Screen Are you sure?

Yes No 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC Next Available Preset Number 102. Select the YES option button and observe the Please Wait! message box is displayed. See Figure 5-66. Figure 5-66: Please Wait Message Box Please Wait!

Yes No Notes When saving Presets in the following steps, Preset A thru Preset J are factory default Presets. The factory default Preset numbers cannot be changed. 103. After a short delay, observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-29 104. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Create or Update Digital ASI Preset 5.4.3 Configuration Settings in Local Mode The procedure required to create a new custom digital ASI Preset configuration or to update an existing digital ASI Preset configuration is contained in the following steps. When preparing a new digital ASI Preset, you must first select an existing digital ASI Preset from either the ASI factory default Preset or from your own custom digital ASI Presets. The selected digital ASI Preset will be used as a make-from to prepare the new digital ASI Preset configuration. Please note that while the ASI factory default Preset may be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, the factory default Preset cannot be changed or deleted. It can only be used as a make-from. When the new configuration is prepared using the factory default Preset, it cannot be saved with the factory Preset number or Preset name. A new Preset number and Preset name must be assigned to the new Preset. When using a custom Preset as a make-from, the new Preset should be saved with a new Preset number. When you save the new Preset, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. If you select an existing Preset number when saving the new Preset, the original custom Preset will be overwritten and cannot be recovered. The only way to restore a Preset that has been overwritten is to re-enter the custom Preset data from scratch. If you are updating configuration settings on an existing custom Preset, when you save the configuration settings, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. You must enter and save the configuration settings using the original Preset number. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

67. Figure 5-67: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L PA Operation Button 3. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-30 Notes If you are updating an existing digital ASI Preset configuration, select the Preset to be updated in the following step. If you are creating a new digital ASI Preset configuration, any digital ASI Preset may be selected in the following step. 4. 5. 6. Perform Select Preset on page 3-24 to select the digital ASI Preset required to be updated or to be used as a make-from. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. Select the Main screen Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

68. Figure 5-68: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main Figure 5-69: Keyboard Screen

Q W E R T Y

U

I

O A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M

Shift

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel 8. Enter your password, select the Enter key, and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-70. Figure 5-70: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main 7. Select the User option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-69. 9. Select the ASI option button and observe the ASI screen is displayed. See Figure 5-71 on page 5-32. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-31 Figure 5-71: ASI Screen - Typical Figure 5-72: Operation Mode Screen ASI Operation Mode FEC Guard Interval Constellation 3/4 1/8 QPSK RF B/W 8 MHz Back Main COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Select the FEC pull-down menu and select the 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8 option, as required. Select the Guard Interval pull-down menu and select the 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4 option, as required. Select the Constellation pull-down menu and select QPSK, 16-QAM, or 64-QAM, as required. Select the RF B/W pull-down menu and select 6 MHZ, 7 MHZ, or 8 MHZ, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

72. Note When the Save As Preset screen is displayed in the following step, the Preset Text and Save text boxes will display the name and identification of the digital ASI Preset currently being used as the digital ASI make-from for this custom Preset. 15. Select the Save As Preset option button and observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed. See Figure 5-73. Figure 5-73: Save As Preset Screen - Typical Save As Preset Preset Text Digital COFDM QPSK 8,3/4,1/8,ASI Save 5 Back MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-32 Notes In the following steps, if a factory default digital ASI Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, the Preset Text text box and Save text box must be changed. You cannot change or overwrite any factory default Presets!

If a custom digital ASI Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, a brief description of the custom Preset must be entered in the Preset Text text box for easy identification purposes. 16. Select the Preset Text option button and observe that the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-74. Figure 5-74: Keyboard Screen

Q W E R A S D F Z X C T V Shift

U

I

O Y G H J K L B N M

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel 17. 18. Enter a unique digital ASI Preset description, as required, and select the Enter key. Observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed and the Preset Text text box displays the Preset description. Notes When saving the new custom digital ASI Preset in the following step, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number to avoid overwriting an existing Preset. If you wish to overwrite the existing Preset number

(unless it is a factory default Preset), enter the Preset number to be overwritten. A warning message will be displayed asking Are you sure?. Select the Yes option button. Once an existing custom Preset is overwritten, it cannot be recovered. It must be re-entered from scratch. 19. Select the Save option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-75. Figure 5-75: Numeric Keypad Next Available Preset Number 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-33 Notes When saving Presets in the following steps, Preset A thru Preset J are factory default Presets. The factory default Preset numbers cannot be changed. Notes To change the default Preset number, perform step 20 and go to step 21. To accept the next available Preset number, go to step 21 20. 21. Select the CLR key and enter the Preset number required. Select the ENT key and observe the Are you sure?

confirmation screen is displayed. See Figure 5-76. Figure 5-76: Confirmation Screen Are you sure?

Yes No 22. Select the YES option button and observe the Please Wait! message box is displayed. See Figure 5-77. Figure 5-77: Please Wait Message Box Please Wait!

Yes No 23. 24. After a short delay, observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Create or Update Digital LMS-T Preset 5.4.4 Configuration Settings in Local Mode The procedure required to create a new custom digital LMS-T Preset configuration or to update an existing digital LMS-T Preset configuration is contained in the following steps. When preparing a new digital LMS-T Preset, you must first select an existing digital LMS-T Preset from either the digital LMS-T factory default Preset or from your own custom digital LMS-T Presets. The selected Preset will be used as a make-from to prepare the new digital LMS-T Preset configuration. Please note that while factory default Presets may be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, these factory default Presets cannot be changed or deleted. They can only be used as make-froms. When the new configuration is prepared using the factory default Preset, it cannot be saved with the factory Preset number or Preset name. A new Preset number and Preset name must be assigned to the new Preset. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-34 When using a custom Preset as a make-from, the new Preset should be saved with a new Preset number. When you save the new Preset, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. If you select an existing Preset number when saving the new Preset, the original custom Preset will be overwritten and cannot be recovered. The only way to restore a Preset that has been overwritten is to re-enter the custom Preset data from scratch. If you are updating configuration settings on an existing custom Preset, when you save the configuration settings, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. You must enter and save the configuration settings using the original Preset number. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

78. Figure 5-78: Main Screen - Typical PA Operation Button Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 3. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. Notes If you are updating an existing digital LMS-T Preset configuration, select the Preset to be updated in the following step. If you are creating a new digital LMS-T Preset configuration, any digital LMS-T Preset may be selected in the following step. 4. 5. 6. Perform Select Preset on page 3-24 to select the digital LMS-T Preset required to be updated or to be used as a make-from. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. Select the Main screen Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

79 on page 5-36. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-35 Figure 5-79: Setup Screen Figure 5-81: Operation Mode Screen Setup Operation Mode User Radio Main COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main 7. Select the User option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-80. 9. Select the LMS-T option button and observe the LMS-T screen is displayed. See Figure 5-82. Figure 5-80: Keyboard Screen Figure 5-82: LMS-T Screen - Typical

Q W E R A S D F Z X C T V Shift

U

I

O Y G H J K L B N M

) P

BS LMS-T Constellation RF B/W Guard Interval 16-QAM 10 MHz 1/8 FEC 2/3 Enter Clear Cancel Back Main Submit 8. Enter your password, select the Enter key, and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-81. 10. Use the Constellation pull-down menu to select QPSK or 16-QAM, as required. Note In the following step, 2/3 is the only LMS-T FEC option available. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-36 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Observe the FEC (Forward Error Correction) pull-

down menu indicates 2/3. Use the RF B/W pull-down menu to select 10 MHZ or 20 MHZ, as required. Use the Guard Interval pull-down menu and select 1/16 or 1/8, as required. Select the Submit option button. Select the Back option button and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

83. Figure 5-83: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main Figure 5-84: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 17. Select the Video In option button and observe the Video In screen is displayed. See Figure 5-85. Figure 5-85: Video In Screen 1 - Typical Video In Input NTSC 16. Select the MPEG option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-84. Back Video In2 Note In the following step, select an Input option applicable to the licensed options contained in your MTX5000 IDU only. Selection of an option that is not licensed in your radio will cause the IDU to operate in the NTSC default mode. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-37 18. 19. Use the Input pull-down menu to select the video input option required. Select the Video In2 option button and observe the Video In screen 2 is displayed. See Figure 5-86. Figure 5-86: Video In Screen 2 - Typical Video In Noise Reduction SDI Auto Line Off Off HD Test Pattern Off Back Main 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. Select the Noise Reduction option button for On or Off, as required. Select the SDI Auto Line option button for On or Off, as required. Select the HD Test Pattern option button for On or Off, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the Video In screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-87. Figure 5-87: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 25. Select the Audio In option button and observe the AUDIO 1 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-88. Figure 5-88: AUDIO 1 Screen - Typical AUDIO 1 Mode Standard Bit Rate Dual Mono MPEG Layer II 192 Kbps Input Analog Back Main Audio 2 26. 27. Use the Mode pull-down menu to select Stereo or Dual Mono, as required. Use the Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-38 28. 29. 30. Use the Bit Rate pull-down menu to select 128 Kbps, 160 Kbps, 192 Kbps, 224 Kbps, 256 Kbps, 320 Kbps, or 384 Kbps, as required. Use the Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, or SDI Emb, as required. Select the Audio 2 option button and observe the AUDIO 2 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-89. Figure 5-89: AUDIO 2 Screen - Typical AUDIO 2 Mode Standard Bit Rate Dual Mono MPEG Layer II 192 Kbps Input Analog Balance Unbalanced Back Main 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. Use the Mode pull-down menu to select Stereo or Dual Mono, as required. Use the Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. Use the Bit Rate pull-down menu to select 128 Kbps, 160 Kbps, 192 Kbps, 224 Kbps, 256 Kbps, 320 Kbps, or 384 Kbps, as required. Use the Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, SDI Emb, AES-EBU, or Channel Ide, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the AUDIO 1 screen is displayed. 36. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-90. Figure 5-90: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 37. 38. Select the Spectrum Invert option button to select Normal or Inverted, as required. Select the Encoder option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. See Figure 5-91. Figure 5-91: Encoder Screen - Typical Encoder Mode Bit Rate Low delay MP@ML Bit Rate 4.9 Mb/s ASI Bit Rate Bit Rate Auto On GOP Length 5.529 Mb/s 15 Back Main Encoder 2 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-39 39. 40. Select the Mode pull-down menu and select Standard or Low delay, as required. Select the Bit Rate pull-down menu and select MP@ML or 422P@ML, as required. Notes In the following step, if the Bit Rate Auto option button option selected is On, the Bit Rate option button will be inactive (greyed out). Go to step 43. If the Bit Rate Auto option button option selected is Off, the Bit Rate option button will be active. Go to step 42. 41. 42. Select the Bit Rate Auto option button for Off or On, as required. Observe the Bit Rate option button is active. Select the Bit Rate option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-92. Figure 5-92: Numeric Keypad 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 DEL 2 5 8 0 Figure 5-93: Numeric Keypad 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC 45. 46. Enter the Group of Pictures (GOP) number required, select the ENT key, and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. Select the Encoder 2 option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. See Figure 5-94. Figure 5-94: Encoder Screen 2 - Typical Encoder Horiz Resolution Aspect Ratio 720 4:3 PID PTS per Picture Off Remux VBI Off Off Back Main 43. 44. Enter the bit rate required, select the ENT key, and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. Select the GOP Length option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-93. 47. 48. Select the Horiz Resolution pull-down menu and select 720, 704, 544, 528, 480, or 352, as required. Select the Aspect Ratio pull-down menu and select 4:3 or 16:9, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-40 49. Select the PID option button and observe the PID screen is displayed. See Figure 5-95. Figure 5-95: PID Screen - Typical PID DEFAULT PMT VIDEO 12 300 DATA AUDIO A AUDIO B 100 200 201 PCR 8190 Back Main Next Notes To select the default PID settings, go to step 50. To enter individual PID settings, go to step 51. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. Select the DEFAULT option button and observe the default PID settings are displayed. Go to step 71. Select the DATA option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the DATA PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the AUDIO A option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the AUDIO A PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the PMT option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. Enter the PMT PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the AUDIO B option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the AUDIO B PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the VIDEO option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Video PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the PCR option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the PCR PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the Next option button and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-96. Figure 5-96: PID-2 Screen - Typical PID-2 Program ID Transport ID 3 1 Network ID 1 Back Main 64. Select the Program ID option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-97 on page 5-42. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-41 Figure 5-97: Numeric Keypad 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 DEL 2 5 8 0 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. Enter the Program ID PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. Select the Network ID option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Network ID PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. Select the Transport ID option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Transport ID PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. Select the Remux option button for On or Off, as required. Select the PTS per Picture option button to select On or Off, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. 75. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-98. Figure 5-98: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 76. Select the Encoding option button and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. See Figure 5-99. Figure 5-99: Encoding Screen - Typical Encoding Service Name Service 01 Network Name EBS/BISS Wayside data Back Main 77. Select the Service Name option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-100. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-42 Figure 5-100: Keyboard Screen Figure 5-101: Encryption Screen

Q W E R A S D F Z X C T V Shift

U

I

O Y G H J K L B N M

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel 78. 79. 80. Enter the service name required, select the Enter key, and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. Select the Network Name option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. Enter the network name required, select the Enter key, and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. Notes If your MTX5000 IDU contains a licensed EBS or BISS encryption option, go to step 81. If your MTX5000 IDU does not contain a licensed EBS or BISS encryption option, go to step 87. 81. 82. Observe the EBS/BISS option button is active (not greyed-out). Select the EBS/BISS option button and observe the Encryption screen is displayed. See Figure 5-101. Encryption Scrambling EBS Key BISS-1 Key BISS-E Key xx xx xx Back Main Notes You can only have one licensed encryption option contained in your MTX5000 IDU. When the Scrambling pull-down menu EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E option is selected in the following step, the selected option key will be active, but the two remaining option buttons will become inactive (greyed-out). 83. 84. Select the Scrambling pull-down menu EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E option, as required, and observe the selected EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E Key option button is active. Select the EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E Key option button, as required, and observe the alphanumeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-102 on page 5-44. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-43 Figure 5-102: Alphanumeric Keypad 1 4 7 2 5 8 DEL CAN 3 6 9 0 0 A B C D E F ENT Note When the Encryption screen is displayed and the encryption key is entered in the following step, the encryption key will not be displayed. 85. 86. Enter your encryption key, select the ENT key, and observe the Encryption screen is displayed. Select the BACK option button and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. See Figure 5-103. Figure 5-103: Encoding Screen - Typical Encoding Service Name Service 01 Network Name EBS/BISS Wayside data Back Main 87. Select the Wayside data option button and observe the Wayside Data screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

104. Figure 5-104: Wayside Data Screen - Typical Wayside Data Data Enable Baud Rate Off 2400 Back Main 88. 89. 90. 91. 92. Select the Data Enable pull-down menu and select the Off, TTV Format, CJM2 Format, or Low Delay CJM2 option, as required. Select the Baud Rate pull-down menu and select the 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400 option, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

105 on page 5-45. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-44 Figure 5-105: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode Notes COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main Note When the Save As Preset screen is displayed in the following step, the Preset Text and Save text boxes will display the name and identification of the digital LMS-T Preset currently being used as the digital LMS-T make-from for this custom Preset. 93. Select the Save As Preset option button and observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed. See Figure 5-106. Figure 5-106: Save As Preset Screen - Typical In the following steps, if a factory default digital LMS-T Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, the Preset Text text box and the Save text box must be changed. You cannot change or overwrite any factory default Presets!

If a custom digital LMS-T Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, a brief description of the custom Preset must be entered in the Preset Text text box for easy identification purposes. 94. Select the Preset Text option button and observe that the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-107. Figure 5-107: Keyboard Screen

Q W E R T Y

U

I

O A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M

) P

BS Save As Preset Shift Preset Text Digital LMS-T 16QAM 4:2:0,10,2/3,1/8,HD 1080i Save 6 Back Enter Clear Cancel 95. 96. Enter a unique digital LMS-T Preset description, as required, and select the Enter key. Observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed and the Preset Text text box displays the Preset description. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-45 Notes When saving the new custom digital LMS-T Preset in the following step, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number to avoid overwriting an existing Preset. If you wish to overwrite the existing Preset number

(unless it is a factory default Preset), enter the Preset number to be overwritten. A warning message will be displayed asking Are you sure?. Select the Yes option button. Once an existing custom Preset is overwritten, it cannot be recovered. It must be re-entered from scratch. Notes When saving Presets in the following steps, Preset A thru Preset J are factory default Presets. The factory default Preset numbers cannot be changed. Notes To change the default Preset number, perform step 98 and go to step 99. To accept the next available Preset number, go to step 99. 98. 99. Select the CLR key and enter the Preset number required. Select the ENT key and observe the Are you sure?

confirmation screen is displayed. See Figure 5-109. 97. Select the Save option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-108. Figure 5-109: Confirmation Screen Figure 5-108: Numeric Keypad Next Available Preset Number 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC Are you sure?

Yes No 100. Select the YES option button and observe the Please Wait! message box is displayed. See Figure 5-110 on page 5-47. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-46 When using a custom Preset as a make-from, the new Preset should be saved with a new Preset number. When you save the new Preset, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. If you select an existing Preset number when saving the new Preset, the original custom Preset will be overwritten and cannot be recovered. The only way to restore a Preset that has been overwritten is to re-enter the custom Preset data from scratch. If you are updating configuration settings on an existing custom Preset, when you save the configuration settings, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. You must enter and save the configuration settings using the original Preset number. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

111 on page 5-48. Figure 5-110: Please Wait Message Box Please Wait!

Yes No 101. After a short delay, observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed. 102. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Create or Update Digital DVB-S Preset 5.4.5 Configuration Settings in Local Mode The procedure required to create a new custom digital DVB-S Preset configuration or to update an existing digital DVB-S Preset configuration is contained in the following steps. When preparing a new digital DVB-S Preset, you must first select an existing digital DVB-S Preset from either the digital DVB-S factory default Preset or from your own custom digital DVB-S Presets. The selected Preset will be used as a make-

from to prepare the new digital DVB-S Preset configuration. Please note that while factory default Presets may be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, these factory default Presets cannot be changed or deleted. They can only be used as make-froms. When the new configuration is prepared using the factory default Preset, it cannot be saved with the factory Preset number or Preset name. A new Preset number and Preset name must be assigned to the new Preset. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-47 Figure 5-111: Main Screen - Typical Figure 5-112: Setup Screen PA Operation Button Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L Setup User Radio Main 3. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. 7. Select the User option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-113. Notes If you are updating an existing digital DVB-S Preset configuration, select the Preset to be updated in the following step. If you are creating a new digital DVB-S Preset configuration, any digital DVB-S Preset may be selected in the following step. 4. 5. 6. Perform Select Preset on page 3-24 to select the digital DVB-S Preset required to be updated or to be used as a make-from. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. Select the Main screen Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

112. Figure 5-113: Keyboard Screen

Q W E R T Y

U

I

O A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M

Shift

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel 8. Enter your password, select the Enter key, and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-114 on page 5-49. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-48 Figure 5-114: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main 9. Select the COFDM option button and observe the COFDM screen is displayed. See Figure 5-115. Figure 5-115: COFDM Screen - Typical COFDM FEC Guard Interval Constellation 1/2 1/8 QPSK RF B/W 8 MHz Back Main 10. 11. 12. Use the FEC (Forward Error Correction) pull-down menu and select 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8, as required. Use the Guard Interval pull-down menu and select 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4, as required. Use the Constellation pull-down menu to select QPSK, 16-QAM or 8-PSK, as required. 13. 14. Use the RF B/W pull-down menu to select 6 MHZ, 7 MHZ, or 8 MHZ, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

116. Figure 5-116: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main 15. Select the DVBS option button and observe the DVBS screen is displayed. See Figure 5-117. Figure 5-117: DVBS Screen - Typical DVBS DVBS Roll Off 35%

Symbol Rate 15.4 Msps Back Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-49 16. 17. Use the DVBS Roll Off pull-down menu to select 20%, 25%, or 35%, as required. Select the Symbol Rate option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-118. Figure 5-118: Numeric Keypad 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 DEL 2 5 8 0 18. 19. 20. Enter the symbol rate required, select the ENT key, and observe the DVBS screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. Select the MPEG option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-119. Figure 5-119: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 21. Select the Video In option button and observe the Video In screen is displayed. See Figure 5-120. Figure 5-120: Video In Screen 1 - Typical Video In Input NTSC Back Video In2 Note In the following step, select an Input option applicable to the licensed options contained in your MTX5000 IDU only. Selection of an option that is not licensed in your radio will cause the IDU to operate in the NTSC default mode. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-50 22. 23. Use the Input pull-down menu to select the video input option required. Select the Video In2 option button and observe the Video In screen 2 is displayed. See Figure 5-121. Figure 5-121: Video In Screen 2 - Typical Video In Noise Reduction SDI Auto Line Off Off HD Test Pattern Off Back Main 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. Select the Noise Reduction option button for On or Off, as required. Select the SDI Auto Line option button for On or Off, as required. Select the HD Test Pattern option button for On or Off, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the Video In screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-122. Figure 5-122: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 29. Select the Audio In option button and observe the AUDIO 1 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-123. Figure 5-123: AUDIO 1 Screen - Typical AUDIO 1 Mode Standard Bit Rate Dual Mono MPEG Layer II 192 Kbps Input Analog Back Main Audio 2 30. 31. Use the Mode pull-down menu to select Stereo or Dual Mono, as required. Use the Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-51 32. 33. 34. Use the Bit Rate pull-down menu to select 128 Kbps, 160 Kbps, 192 Kbps, 224 Kbps, 256 Kbps, 320 Kbps, or 384 Kbps, as required. Use the Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, or SDI Emb, as required. Select the Audio 2 option button and observe the AUDIO 2 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-124. Figure 5-124: AUDIO 2 Screen - Typical AUDIO 2 Mode Standard Bit Rate Dual Mono MPEG Layer II 192 Kbps Input Analog Balance Unbalanced Back Main 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. Use the Mode pull-down menu to select Stereo or Dual Mono, as required. Use the Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. Use the Bit Rate pull-down menu to select 128 Kbps, 160 Kbps, 192 Kbps, 224 Kbps, 256 Kbps, 320 Kbps, or 384 Kbps, as required. Use the Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, SDI Emb, AES-EBU, or Channel Ide, as required. Use the Balance pull-down menu to select Unbalanced or Balanced, as required. 40. 41. Select the Back option button and observe the AUDIO 1 screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-125. Figure 5-125: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 42. 43. Select the Spectrum Invert option button to select Normal or Inverted, as required. Select the Encoder option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. See Figure 5-126. Figure 5-126: Encoder Screen - Typical Encoder Mode Bit Rate Low delay MP@ML Bit Rate 4.9 Mb/s ASI Bit Rate Bit Rate Auto On GOP Length 5.529 Mb/s 15 Back Main Encoder 2 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-52 44. 45. Select the Mode pull-down menu and select Standard or Low delay, as required. Select the Bit Rate pull-down menu and select MP@ML or 422P@ML, as required. Notes In the following step, if the Bit Rate Auto option button option selected is On, the Bit Rate option button will be inactive (greyed out). Go to step 47. If the Bit Rate Auto option button option selected is Off, the Bit Rate option button will be active. Go to step 46. 46. 47. Select the Bit Rate Auto option button for Off or On, as required. Observe the Bit Rate option button is active. Select the Bit Rate option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-127. Figure 5-127: Numeric Keypad 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 DEL 2 5 8 0 48. Enter the bit rate required, select the ENT key, and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. 49. Select the GOP Length option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-128. Figure 5-128: Numeric Keypad 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC 50. 51. Enter the Group of Pictures (GOP) number required, select the ENT key, and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. Select the Encoder 2 option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. See Figure 5-129. Figure 5-129: Encoder Screen 2 - Typical Encoder Horiz Resolution Aspect Ratio 720 4:3 PID PTS per Picture Off Remux VBI Off Off Back Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-53 52. 53. 54. Select the Horiz Resolution pull-down menu and select 720, 704, 544, 528, 480, or 352, as required. Select the Aspect Ratio pull-down menu and select 4:3 or 16:9, as required. Select the PID option button and observe the PID screen is displayed. See Figure 5-130. Figure 5-130: PID Screen - Typical PID DEFAULT PMT VIDEO 12 300 DATA AUDIO A AUDIO B 100 200 201 PCR 8190 Back Main Next Notes To select the default PID settings, go to step 55. To enter individual PID settings, go to step 56. 55. 56. 57. 58. Select the DEFAULT option button and observe the default PID settings are displayed. Go to step 75. Select the DATA option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the DATA PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the AUDIO A option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. Enter the AUDIO A PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the PMT option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the PMT PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the AUDIO B option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the AUDIO B PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the VIDEO option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Video PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the PCR option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the PCR PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the Next option button and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-131. Figure 5-131: PID-2 Screen - Typical PID-2 Program ID Transport ID 3 1 Network ID 1 Back Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-54 69. Select the Program ID option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-132. Figure 5-132: Numeric Keypad 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 DEL 2 5 8 0 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. Enter the Program ID PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. Select the Network ID option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Network ID PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. Select the Transport ID option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Transport ID PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. Select the Remux option button for On or Off, as required. Select the PTS per Picture option button to select On or Off, as required. 79. 80. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-133. Figure 5-133: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 81. Select the Encoding option button and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. See Figure 5-134. Figure 5-134: Encoding Screen - Typical Encoding Service Name Service 01 Network Name EBS/BISS Wayside data Back Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-55 82. Select the Service Name option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-135. Figure 5-136: Encryption Screen Figure 5-135: Keyboard Screen Encryption

Q W E R A S D F Z X C T V Shift

U

I

O Y G H J K L B N M

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel Notes 83. 84. 85. Enter the service name required, select the Enter key, and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. Select the Network Name option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. Enter the network name required, select the Enter key, and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. Notes If your MTX5000 IDU contains a licensed EBS or BISS encryption option, go to step 86. If your MTX5000 IDU does not contain a licensed EBS or BISS encryption option, go to step 91. 86. 87. Observe the EBS/BISS option button is active (not greyed-out). Select the EBS/BISS option button and observe the Encryption screen is displayed. See Figure 5-136. Scrambling EBS Key BISS-1 Key BISS-E Key xx xx xx Back Main You can only have one licensed encryption option contained in your MTX5000 IDU. When the Scrambling pull-down menu EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E option is selected in the following step, the selected option key will be active, but the two remaining option buttons will become inactive (greyed-out). 88. 89. Select the Scrambling pull-down menu EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E option, as required, and observe the selected EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E Key option button is active. Select the EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E Key option button, as required, and observe the alphanumeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-137 on page 5-57. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-56 Figure 5-137: Alphanumeric Keypad 1 4 7 2 5 8 DEL CAN 3 6 9 0 0 A B C D E F ENT Note When the Encryption screen is displayed and the encryption key is entered in the following step, the encryption key will not be displayed. 90. 91. Enter your encryption key, select the ENT key, and observe the Encryption screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. See Figure 5-138. Figure 5-138: Encoding Screen - Typical Encoding Service Name Service 01 Network Name EBS/BISS Wayside data Back Main 92. Select the Wayside data option button and observe the Wayside Data screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

139. Figure 5-139: Wayside Data Screen - Typical Wayside Data Data Enable Baud Rate Off 2400 Back Main 93. 94. 95. 96. 97. 98. Select the Data Enable pull-down menu and select the Off, TTV Format, CJM2 Format, or Low Delay CJM2 option, as required. Select the Baud Rate pull-down menu and select the 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400 option, as required. Select the Submit option button. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

140 on page 5-58. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-57 Figure 5-140: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode Notes COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main In the following steps, if a factory default digital IP Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, the Preset Text text box and the Save text box must be changed. You cannot change or overwrite any factory default Presets!

If a custom digital IP Preset was used as a make-

from to prepare this custom Preset, a brief description of the custom Preset must be entered in the Preset Text text box for easy identification purposes. Note When the Save As Preset screen is displayed in the following step, the Preset Text and Save text boxes will display the name and identification of the digital IP Preset currently being used as the digital IP make-from for this custom Preset. 99. Select the Save As Preset option button and observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed. See Figure 5-141. Figure 5-141: Save As Preset Screen - Typical Save As Preset Preset Text Digital DVB-S QPSK 4:2:0,8,3/4,1/8,comp Save 7 Back 100. Select the Preset Text option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-142. Figure 5-142: Keyboard Screen

Q W E R T Y

U

I

O A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M

Shift

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel 101. Enter a unique digital IP Preset description, as required, and select the Enter key. 102. Observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed and the Preset Text text box displays the Preset description. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-58 Notes When saving the new custom digital IP Preset in the following step, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number to avoid overwriting an existing Preset. If you wish to overwrite the existing Preset number

(unless it is a factory default Preset), enter the Preset number to be overwritten. A warning message will be displayed asking Are you sure?. Select the Yes option button. Once an existing custom Preset is overwritten, it cannot be recovered. It must be re-entered from scratch. 103. Select the Save option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-143. Figure 5-143: Numeric Keypad Notes To change the default Preset number, perform step 104 and go to step 105. To accept the next available Preset number, go to step 105. 104. Select the CLR key and enter the Preset number required. 105. Select the ENT key and observe the Are you sure?

confirmation screen is displayed. See Figure 5-144. Figure 5-144: Confirmation Screen Are you sure?

Yes No 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC Next Available Preset Number 106. Select the YES option button and observe the Please Wait! message box is displayed. See Figure 5-145. Figure 5-145: Please Wait Message Box Please Wait!

Yes No Notes When saving Presets in the following steps, Preset A thru Preset J are factory default Presets. The factory default Preset numbers cannot be changed. 107. After a short delay, observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-59 108. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Create or Update Digital IP Preset 5.4.6 Configuration Settings in Local Mode The procedure required to create a new custom digital IP Preset configuration or to update an existing digital IP Preset configuration is contained in the following steps. When preparing a new digital IP Preset, you must first select an existing digital IP Preset from either the digital IP factory default Preset or from your own custom digital IP Presets. The selected Preset will be used as a make-from to prepare the new digital IP Preset configuration. Please note that while factory default Presets may be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, these factory default Presets cannot be changed or deleted. They can only be used as make-froms. When the new configuration is prepared using the factory default Preset, it cannot be saved with the factory Preset number or Preset name. A new Preset number and Preset name must be assigned to the new Preset. When using a custom Preset as a make-from, the new Preset should be saved with a new Preset number. When you save the new Preset, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. If you select an existing Preset number when saving the new Preset, the original custom Preset will be overwritten and cannot be recovered. The only way to restore a Preset that has been overwritten is to re-enter the custom Preset data from scratch. If you are updating configuration settings on an existing custom Preset, when you save the configuration settings, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. You must enter and save the configuration settings using the original Preset number. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

146. Figure 5-146: Main Screen - Typical PA Operation Button Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 3. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-60 Notes If you are updating an existing digital IP Preset configuration, select the Preset to be updated in the following step. If you are creating a new digital IP Preset configuration, any digital IP Preset may be selected in the following step. 4. 5. 6. Perform Select Preset on page 3-24 to select the digital IP Preset required to be updated or to be used as a make-from. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. Select the Main screen Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

147. Figure 5-147: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main Figure 5-148: Keyboard Screen

Q W E R T Y

U

I

O A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M

Shift

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel 8. Enter your password, select the Enter key, and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-149. Figure 5-149: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main 7. Select the User option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-148. 9. Select the IP option button and observe the IP Config screen is displayed. See Figure 5-150 on page 5-62. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-61 Figure 5-150: IP Config Screen - Typical Figure 5-151: IP Setup Screen - Typical IP Config FEC Guard Interval Constellation 1/2 1/8 QPSK RF B/W 8 MHz Back Main Next IP Setup Max Bit Rate 19.350 Mbps IP Transfer Mode IP + Video Video Bitrate 5.2 Mbps IP Rate 12.902 Mbps Submit Main Back 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Use the FEC pull-down menu to select 1/2. 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8, as required Use the Guard Interval pull-down menu and select 1/32, 1/16, 1/4, or 1/8, as required. Use the Constellation pull-down menu to select QPSK, 16-QAM, or 64-QAM, as required. Use the RF B/W pull-down menu to select 6 MHZ, 7 MHZ, or 8 MHZ, as required. Select the Next option button and observe the IP Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-151. Notes If the IP + Video option is selected in the following step, go to step 16. The Video Bitrate option button is active only if the IP + Video option is selected. If the IP Only option is selected in the following step, go to step 20. 15. 16. 17. Use the IP Transfer Mode pull-down menu to select IP Only or IP + Video, as required, and select the Submit option button. Observe the Video Bitrate option button is active. Select the Video Bitrate option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-152 on page 5-63. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-62 Figure 5-152: Numeric Keypad Figure 5-153: Operation Mode Screen 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 DEL 2 5 8 0 CAUTION When entering the video bit rate in the following step, the bit rate value entered cannot exceed the IP Setup screen Max Bit Rate value minus 1.22 Mbps. Exceeding the Max Bit Rate value minus 1.22 Mbps will result in no video output. For example, a Max Bit Rate value of 19.350 Mbps - 1.22 Mbps = 18.130 Mbps. Therefore, the video bit rate entered in the following step must not exceed 18.130 Mbps. 18. 19. 20. 21. Enter the video bit rate required and select the ENT option button. Select the Submit option button. Select the Back option button and observe the IP Config screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

153. Operation Mode COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main 22. Select the MPEG option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-154. Figure 5-154: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 23. Select the Video In option button and observe the Video In screen is displayed. See Figure 5-155 on page 5-64. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-63 Figure 5-155: Video In Screen 1 - Typical Figure 5-156: Video In Screen 2 - Typical Video In Input NTSC Video In Noise Reduction SDI Auto Line Off Off HD Test Pattern Off Back Video In2 Back Main Note In the following step, select an Input option applicable to the licensed options contained in your MTX5000 IDU only. Selection of an option that is not licensed in your radio will cause the IDU to operate in the NTSC default mode. 24. 25. Use the Input pull-down menu to select the video input option required. Select the Video In2 option button and observe the Video In screen 2 is displayed. See Figure 5-156. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. Select the Noise Reduction option button for On or Off, as required. Select the SDI Auto Line option button for On or Off, as required. Select the HD Test Pattern option button for On or Off, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the Video In screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-157 on page 5-65. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-64 Figure 5-157: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 31. Select the Audio In option button and observe the AUDIO 1 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-158. Figure 5-158: AUDIO 1 Screen - Typical AUDIO 1 Mode Standard Bit Rate Dual Mono MPEG Layer II 192 Kbps Input Analog Back Main Audio 2 32. 33. Use the Mode pull-down menu to select Stereo or Dual Mono, as required. Use the Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. 34. 35. 36. Use the Bit Rate pull-down menu to select 128 Kbps, 160 Kbps, 192 Kbps, 224 Kbps, 256 Kbps, 320 Kbps, or 384 Kbps, as required. Use the Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, or SDI Emb, as required. Select the Audio 2 option button and observe the AUDIO 2 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-159. Figure 5-159: AUDIO 2 Screen - Typical AUDIO 2 Mode Standard Bit Rate Dual Mono MPEG Layer II 192 Kbps Input Analog Balance Unbalanced Back Main 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. Use the Mode pull-down menu to select Stereo or Dual Mono, as required. Use the Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. Use the Bit Rate pull-down menu to select 128 Kbps, 160 Kbps, 192 Kbps, 224 Kbps, 256 Kbps, 320 Kbps, or 384 Kbps, as required. Use the Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, SDI Emb, AES-EBU, or Channel Ide, as required. Use the Balance pull-down menu to select Unbalanced or Balanced, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-65 42. 43. Select the Back option button and observe the AUDIO 1 screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-160. 46. 47. Select the Mode pull-down menu and select Standard or Low delay, as required. Select the Bit Rate pull-down menu and select MP@ML or 422P@ML, as required. Figure 5-160: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 44. 45. Select the Spectrum Invert option button to select Normal or Inverted, as required. Select the Encoder option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. See Figure 5-161. Figure 5-161: Encoder Screen - Typical Encoder Mode Bit Rate Low delay MP@ML Bit Rate 4.9 Mb/s ASI Bit Rate Bit Rate Auto On GOP Length 5.529 Mb/s 15 Back Main Encoder 2 Notes In the following step, if the Bit Rate Auto option button On option is selected, the Bit Rate option button will be inactive (greyed out). Go to step 50. If the Bit Rate Auto option button Off option is selected, the Bit Rate option button will be active. Go to step 49. 48. 49. Select the Bit Rate Auto option button for Off or On, as required. Observe the Bit Rate option button is active. Select the Bit Rate option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-162. Figure 5-162: Numeric Keypad 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 DEL 2 5 8 0 50. Enter the bit rate required, select the ENT key, and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-66 51. Select the GOP Length option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-163. Figure 5-163: Numeric Keypad 55. 56. Select the Aspect Ratio pull-down menu and select 4:3 or 16:9, as required. Select the PID option button and observe the PID screen is displayed. See Figure 5-165. Figure 5-165: PID Screen - Typical 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC 52. 53. Enter the Group of Pictures (GOP) number required, select the ENT key, and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. Select the Encoder 2 option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. See Figure 5-164. Figure 5-164: Encoder Screen 2 - Typical Encoder Horiz Resolution Aspect Ratio 720 4:3 PID PTS per Picture Off Remux VBI Off Off Back Main 54. Select the Horiz Resolution pull-down menu and select 720, 704, 544, 528, 480, or 352, as required. PID DEFAULT PMT VIDEO 12 300 DATA AUDIO A AUDIO B 100 200 201 PCR 8190 Back Main Next Notes To select the default PID settings, go to step 57. To enter individual PID settings, go to step 58. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. Select the DEFAULT option button and observe the default PID settings are displayed. Go to step 78. Select the DATA option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the DATA PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the AUDIO A option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the AUDIO A PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-67 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. Select the PMT option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the PMT PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the AUDIO B option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the AUDIO B PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the VIDEO option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Video PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the PCR option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the PCR PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the Next option button and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-166. Figure 5-166: PID-2 Screen - Typical PID-2 Program ID Transport ID 3 1 Network ID 1 Back Main 71. Select the Program ID option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-167. Figure 5-167: Numeric Keypad 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 DEL 2 5 8 0 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. Enter the Program ID PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. Select the Network ID option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Network ID PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. Select the Transport ID option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Transport ID PID required, select the ENT key, and observe the PID-2 screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the PID screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. Select the Remux option button for On or Off, as required. Select the PTS per Picture option button to select On or Off, as required. Select the VBI option button for On or Off, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoder screen is displayed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-68 83. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. See Figure 5-168. Figure 5-170: Keyboard Screen Figure 5-168: MPEG Screen - Typical MPEG Video In Audio In Spectrum Invert Normal Encoder Encoding Back Main 84. Select the Encoding option button and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. See Figure 5-169. Figure 5-169: Encoding Screen - Typical Encoding Service Name Service 01 Network Name EBS/BISS Wayside data Back Main 85. Select the Service Name option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-170.

Q W E R T Y

U

I

O A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M

Shift

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel 86. 87. 88. Enter the service name required, select the Enter key, and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. Select the Network Name option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. Enter the network name required, select the Enter key, and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. Notes If your MTX5000 IDU contains a licensed EBS or BISS encryption option, go to step 89. If your MTX5000 IDU does not contain a licensed EBS or BISS encryption option, go to step 95. 89. 90. Observe the EBS/BISS option button is active (not greyed-out). Select the EBS/BISS option button and observe the Encryption screen is displayed. See Figure 5-171 on page 5-70. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-69 Figure 5-171: Encryption Screen Figure 5-172: Alphanumeric Keypad Encryption Scrambling EBS Key BISS-1 Key BISS-E Key xx xx xx Back Main 1 4 7 2 5 8 DEL CAN 3 6 9 0 0 A B C D E F ENT Notes You can only have one licensed encryption option contained in your MTX5000 IDU. When the Scrambling pull-down menu EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E option is selected in the following step, the selected option key will be active, but the two remaining option buttons will become inactive (greyed-out). 91. 92. Select the Scrambling pull-down menu EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E option, as required, and observe the selected EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E Key option button is active. Select the EBS, BISS-1, or BISS-E Key option button, as required, and observe the alphanumeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-172. Note When the Encryption screen is displayed and the encryption key is entered in the following step, the encryption key will not be displayed. 93. 94. Enter your encryption key, select the ENT key, and observe the Encryption screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. See Figure 5-173. Figure 5-173: Encoding Screen - Typical Encoding Service Name Service 01 Network Name EBS/BISS Wayside data Back Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-70 95. Select the Wayside data option button and observe the Wayside Data screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

174. Figure 5-174: Wayside Data Screen - Typical Wayside Data Data Enable Baud Rate Off 2400 Back Main 96. 97. 98. 99. Select the Data Enable pull-down menu and select the Off, TTV Format, CJM2 Format, or Low Delay CJM2 option, as required. Select the Baud Rate pull-down menu and select the 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400 option, as required. Select the Back option button and observe the Encoding screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the MPEG screen is displayed. 100. Select the Back option button and observe the Operation Mode screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

175. Figure 5-175: Operation Mode Screen Operation Mode COFDM IP SCM FMT DVBS ASI LMS-T MPEG Save As Preset Back Main Note When the Save As Preset screen is displayed in the following step, the Preset Text and Save text boxes will display the name and identification of the digital IP Preset currently being used as the digital IP make-from for this custom Preset. 101. Select the Save As Preset option button and observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed. See Figure 5-176. Figure 5-176: Save As Preset Screen - Typical Save As Preset Preset Text Digital IP 16QAM 4:2:0,8,7/8,1/8 Save 9 Back MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-71 Notes In the following steps, if a factory default digital IP Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, the Preset Text text box and the Save text box must be changed. You cannot change or overwrite any factory default Presets!

If a custom digital IP Preset was used as a make-

from to prepare this custom Preset, a brief description of the custom Preset must be entered in the Preset Text text box for easy identification purposes. 102. Select the Preset Text option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-177. Figure 5-177: Keyboard Screen

Q W E R A S D F Z X C T V Shift

U

I

O Y G H J K L B N M

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel 103. Enter a unique digital IP Preset description, as required, and select the Enter key. 104. Observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed and the Preset Text text box displays the Preset description. Notes When saving the new custom digital IP Preset in the following step, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number to avoid overwriting an existing Preset. If you wish to overwrite the existing Preset number

(unless it is a factory default Preset), enter the Preset number to be overwritten. A warning message will be displayed asking Are you sure?. Select the Yes option button. Once an existing custom Preset is overwritten, it cannot be recovered. It must be re-entered from scratch. 105. Select the Save option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-178. Figure 5-178: Numeric Keypad Next Available Preset Number 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ENT ESC Notes When saving Presets in the following steps, Preset A thru Preset J are factory default Presets. The factory default Preset numbers cannot be changed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-72 Notes To change the default Preset number, perform step 106 and go to step 107. To accept the next available Preset number, go to step 107. 106. Select the CLR key and enter the Preset number required. 107. Select the ENT key and observe the Are you sure?

confirmation screen is displayed. See Figure 5-179. Figure 5-179: Confirmation Screen Are you sure?

Yes No 108. Select the YES option button and observe the Please Wait! message box is displayed. See Figure 5-180. Figure 5-180: Please Wait Message Box Please Wait!

Yes No 109. After a short delay, observe the Save As Preset screen is displayed. 110. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Create or Update Preset 5.5 Configuration Settings in Remote Mode The procedures required to create or update Preset configuration settings in the Remote mode using a remote PC are contained in the following paragraphs. Preset configuration settings may be created or updated for the following types of Presets:

Analog FMT Presets Digital COFDM Presets Digital ASI Presets Digital LMS-T Presets Digital DVB-S Presets Digital IP Presets. Please note that an External IF In Preset is available for normal operation using the factory default External IF In Preset, but no configuration settings may be made to this Preset. No procedures are therefore applicable or are provided for External IF In Presets. Create or Update Custom Analog Preset 5.5.1 Configuration in Remote Mode The procedure required to create a new custom user analog Preset configuration or to update an existing user Preset configuration in the Remote mode is contained in the following steps. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-73 When preparing a new analog Preset, you must first select an existing analog Preset from either one of the analog factory default Presets or from your custom user analog Presets. The selected Preset will be used as a make-from to prepare the new user analog Preset configuration. Please note that while factory default analog Presets may be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, these factory default Presets cannot be changed or deleted. They can only be used as make-froms. When the new configuration is prepared using the factory default Preset, it cannot be saved with the factory Preset number or Preset name. A new Preset number and Preset name must be assigned to the new Preset. When using a custom user Preset as a make-from, the new Preset should be saved with a new Preset number. If you select an existing user Preset number when saving the new Preset, the original custom Preset will be overwritten and cannot be recovered. The only way to restore a Preset that has been overwritten is to re-enter the custom Preset data from scratch. If you are updating configuration settings on an existing custom user Preset, when you save the configuration settings, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. You must enter and save the configuration settings using the original Preset number. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

181. Figure 5-181: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L PA Operation Button 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Select the L/R option button for L (Local), as required. Select the PA operation button for PA Off, as required Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. Select the Next option button and observe the Radio -

2 screen is displayed. Select the Remote Ctrl Option button and observe the Select Remote Ctrl Opt screen is displayed. Select the Remote option button and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. Select the Main option button, observe the Main screen is displayed, and observe the L/R option button indicates R (Remote). MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-74 Note 11. In the following step, XXX.XXX.X.XX is the IP address of your MTX5000 IDU. At the remote PC, open your web browser, enter the IP address for your MTX5000 IDU, and press the keyboard Enter key. The IP address should be entered as follows:

http://XXX.XXX.X.XX/nfs/main/html 12. After a short delay, observe the remote log in screen is displayed. See Figure 5-182. Figure 5-182: Remote Log In Screen - Typical Figure 5-183: MTX5000 Main Page - Typical 14. Select the Setup tab and observe the Setup page is displayed by default. See Figure 5-184. Figure 5-184: Setup Tab - Typical 13. Enter your administrator user name in the User Name text box, enter your administrator password in the Password text box, select the Log In option button, and observe the MTX50000 Main Page is displayed. See Figure 5-183. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-75 25. 26. Use the Enable pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Pre-Emphasis pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Note In the following step, the Frequency pull-down menus have 11 frequency options and a Custom option. If the Custom option is selected, a frequency text box will be displayed adjacent to the pull-down menu. 27. Use the Frequency pull-down menu to select the frequency option required or select Custom. If Custom is selected, enter the frequency required in the active text box(es), as required. Frequency range is 4830 to 8590 kHz. 28. When Audio CH1 thru Audio CH4 options have all been selected, select the Submit option button. Select the Preset tab and observe the Preset page is displayed. 29. Note 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. In the following step, if a factory default analog Preset is to be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, select the Default option. If a custom user Preset is to be updated or is to be used to prepare a new Preset, select the User option. Use the Presets Option pull-down menu and select Default or User, as required. Use the Color Bars pull-down menu and select Off, On, Auto Gen, or Auto Standby, as required. Use the PA State Option pull-down menu to select Off or Last, as required. Select the Submit option button. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is displayed. Use the Preset pull-down menu to select the default or user custom analog Preset required. Select the Setup tab and observe the Setup page is displayed. Select the FMT tab and observe the FMT page is displayed. Use the Video Deviation pull-down menu to select 3 MHz or 4 MHz, as required. Use the Video Input pull-down menu to select Composite or Baseband, as required. Note Repeat step 25 thru step 27 for Audio CH1 thru Audio CH4, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-76 Notes In the following steps, if a factory Default analog Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, the Preset Text text box and the Preset Number text box must be changed. You cannot change or overwrite any factory default Presets!

If a custom User analog Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, a brief description of the custom Preset should be entered in the Preset Text text box for easy identification purposes. The Preset number must be changed only if you do not wish to overwrite the custom Preset. 30. Select the Preset Text text box and enter a unique analog Preset description. Note If you used a factory Default Preset or a custom User Preset as a make-from and you want to add the new Preset to the list of User Presets contained in your MTX5000 IDU, you must know the highest user Preset number contained in your IDU. To add the new Preset to the list of User Presets, go to step 31. If you used a custom User Preset as a make-

from and you want to use it to replace (overwrite) an existing custom User Preset, go to step 33. 31. Select the Preset Number text box and enter any Preset number that is higher than the current highest user Preset number in your MTX5000 IDU. 32. 33. 34. Select the Submit option button and observe that the Preset Number automatically displays the next higher Preset number available in the Preset User list. Go to step 34. Select the Preset Number text box, enter the Preset number that you wish to overwrite, and select the Submit option button. Observe the new Preset configuration has been loaded into the MTX5000 IDU and the new Preset name and Preset number are displayed on the Main page. Create or Update Custom Digital COFDM 5.5.2 Preset Configuration in Remote Mode The procedure required to create a new custom digital COFDM Preset configuration or to update an existing Preset configuration in the Remote mode is contained in the following steps. When preparing a new user digital COFDM Preset, you must first select an existing digital COFDM Preset from either one of the digital COFDM factory default Presets or from your own custom digital COFDM Presets. The selected Preset will be used as a make-from to prepare the new digital COFDM Preset configuration. Please note that while factory default digital COFDM Presets may be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, these factory default Presets cannot be changed or deleted. They can only be used as make-froms. When the new configuration is prepared using the factory default Preset, it cannot be saved with the factory Preset number or Preset name. A new Preset number and Preset name must be assigned to the new Preset. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-77 When using a custom user Preset as a make-from, the new Preset should be saved with a new Preset number. If you select an existing user Preset number when saving the new Preset, the original custom Preset will be overwritten and cannot be recovered. The only way to restore a Preset that has been overwritten is to re-enter the custom Preset data from scratch. If you are updating configuration settings on an existing custom Preset, when you save the configuration settings, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. You must enter and save the configuration settings using the original Preset number. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

185. Figure 5-185: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L PA Operation Button 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Select the L/R option button for L (Local), as required. Select the PA operation button for PA Off, as required Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. Select the Next option button and observe the Radio -

2 screen is displayed. Select the Remote Ctrl Option button and observe the Select Remote Ctrl Opt screen is displayed. Select the Remote option button and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. Select the Main option button, observe the Main screen is displayed, and observe the L/R option button indicates R (Remote). Note In the following step, XXX.XXX.X.XX is the IP address of your MTX5000 IDU. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-78 Figure 5-187: MTX5000 Main Page - Typical 11. At the remote PC, open your web browser, enter the IP address for your MTX5000 IDU, and press the keyboard Enter key. The IP address should be entered as follows:

http://XXX.XXX.X.XX/nfs/main/html 12. After a short delay, observe the remote log in screen is displayed. See Figure 5-186. Figure 5-186: Remote Log In Screen - Typical 14. Select the Setup tab and observe the Setup page is displayed by default. See Figure 5-188. Figure 5-188: Setup Tab - Typical 13. Enter your administrator user name in the User Name text box, enter your administrator password in the Password text box, select the Log In option button, and observe the MTX50000 Main Page is displayed. See Figure 5-187. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-79 Note In the following step, if a factory default digital COFDM Preset is to be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, select the Default option. If a custom user digital COFDM Preset is to be updated or is to be used to prepare a new Preset, select the User option. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. Use the Presets Option pull-down menu and select Default or User, as required. Use the Color Bars pull-down menu and select Off, On, Auto Gen, or Auto Standby, as required. Use the PA State Option pull-down menu to select Off or Last, as required, and select the Submit option button. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is displayed. Use the Preset pull-down menu to select the default or user custom digital COFDM Preset required. Select the Setup tab and observe the Setup page is displayed. Select the COFDM tab and observe the COFDM page is displayed. Use the Constellation pull-down menu to select QPSK, 16-QAM, or 64-QAM, as required. Use the FEC pull-down menu to select 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8, as required. Use the Guard Interval pull-down menu to select 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4, as required. Use the RF B/W pull-down menu to select 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz, as required. Select the Submit option button. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. Select the MPEG tab and observe the MPEG page is displayed. Use the General - Spectrum Invert pull-down menu to select Normal or Inverted, as required. Use the Video In - Input pull-down menu to select the input required. Use the Video Input - Noise Reduction pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Video Input - SDI Autoline pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Video Input - HD Test Pattern pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Mode pull-down menu to select Dual Mono or Stereo, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, SDI Emb, AES-EBU or Channel Ident, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Bit Rate pull-down menu to select the bit rate required. Use the Audio 2 - Mode pull-down menu to select Dual Mono or Stereo, as required. Use the Audio 2 - Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, SDI Emb, AES-EBU or Channel Ident, as required. Use the Audio 2 - Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. Use the Audio 2 - Bit Rate pull-down menu to select the bit rate required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-80 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. Note Use the Audio 2 - Balance pull-down menu to select Unbalanced or Balanced, as required. Use the Encoder - Mode pull-down menu to select Standard or Low Delay, as required. Use the Encoder - Bit Rate text box to enter the bit rate required. Use the Encoder - Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Encoder - PTS per Picture pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Encoder - Horiz Resolution pull-down menu to select 720, 704, 544, 480 or 352, as required. Use the Encoder - Profile pull-down menu to select MP@HL or 422P@HL, as required. In the following step, if the Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu option selected was On, the ASI Bit Rate text box is inactive and cannot be changed. Go to step 49. If the Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu option selected was Off, the ASI Bit Rate text box is active and the bit rate can be changed. 48. Select the Encoder - ASI Bit Rate text box and enter the bit rate required. Note In the following step, if the Remux pull-down menu On option is selected, the Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu will become inactive, the ASI Bit Rate text box becomes active, and the bit rate can be changed. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. Use the Encoder - Remux pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Select the Encoder - GOP Length text box and enter the group of pictures length required. Use the Encoder - Aspect ratio pull-down menu to select 16:9 or 4:3, as required. Use the Encoder - VBI pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Select the PID - Video text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - PCR text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - PMT text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - Audio 2 text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - Data text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - Audio 1 text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the Encoding - Service Name text box and enter the service name, as required. Select the Encoding - Network Name text box and enter the network name, as required. Use the Encoding - Data Enable pull-down menu to select Off, TTV Format, CJM2 Format, or Low Delay CJM2, as required. Use the Encoding - Baud Rate pull-down menu to select 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400, as required. Select the Submit option button. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-81 64. Select the Preset tab and observe the Preset page is displayed. Notes In the following steps, if a factory default digital COFDM Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, the Preset Text text box and the Preset Number text box must be changed. You cannot change or overwrite any factory default Presets!

If a custom digital COFDM Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, a brief description of the custom Preset should be entered in the Preset Text text box for easy identification purposes. The Preset number must be changed only if you do not wish to overwrite the custom Preset. 65. Select the Preset Text text box and enter a unique digital COFDM Preset description. Note If you used a factory Default Preset or a custom User Preset as a make-from and you want to add the new Preset to the list of User Presets contained in your MTX5000 IDU, you must know the highest user Preset number contained in your IDU. To add the new Preset to the list of User Presets, go to step 66. If you used a custom User Preset as a make-

from and you want to use it to replace (overwrite) an existing custom User Preset, go to step 68. 66. 67. 68. 69. Select the Preset Number text box and enter any Preset number that is higher than the current highest Preset in your MTX5000 IDU. Select the Submit option button and observe that the Preset Number automatically displays the next higher Preset number available in the Preset User list. Go to step 69. Select the Preset Number text box, enter the Preset number that you wish to overwrite, and select the Submit option button. Observe the new Preset configuration has been loaded into the MTX5000 IDU and the new Preset name and Preset number are displayed on the Main page. Create or Update Custom Digital ASI Preset 5.5.3 Configuration in Remote Mode The procedure required to create a new custom digital ASI Preset configuration or to update an existing Preset configuration in the Remote mode is contained in the following steps. When preparing a new digital ASI Preset, you must first select an existing digital ASI Preset from either the digital ASI factory default Preset or from your own custom digital ASI Presets. The selected Preset will be used as a make-from to prepare the new digital ASI Preset configuration. Please note that while factory default digital ASI Presets may be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, these factory default Presets cannot be changed or deleted. They can only be used as make-froms. When the new configuration is prepared using the factory default Preset, it cannot be saved with the factory Preset number or MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-82 Preset name. A new Preset number and Preset name must be assigned to the new Preset. When using a custom Preset as a make-from, the new Preset should be saved with a new Preset number. If you select an existing Preset number when saving the new Preset, the original custom Preset will be overwritten and cannot be recovered. The only way to restore a Preset that has been overwritten is to re-enter the custom Preset data from scratch. If you are updating configuration settings on an existing custom Preset, when you save the configuration settings, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. You must enter and save the configuration settings using the original Preset number. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

189. Figure 5-189: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L PA Operation Button 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Select the L/R option button for L (Local), as required. Select the PA operation button for PA Off, as required Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. Select the Next option button and observe the Radio -

2 screen is displayed. Select the Remote Ctrl Option button and observe the Select Remote Ctrl Opt screen is displayed. Select the Remote option button and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. Select the Main option button, observe the Main screen is displayed, and observe the L/R option button indicates R (Remote). Note In the following step, XXX.XXX.X.XX is the IP address of your MTX5000 IDU. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-83 Figure 5-191: MTX5000 Main Page - Typical 11. At the remote PC, open your web browser, enter the IP address for your MTX5000 IDU, and press the keyboard Enter key. The IP address should be entered as follows:

http://XXX.XXX.X.XX/nfs/main/html 12. After a short delay, observe the remote log in screen is displayed. See Figure 5-190. Figure 5-190: Remote Log In Screen - Typical 14. Select the Setup tab and observe the Setup page is displayed by default. See Figure 5-192. Figure 5-192: Setup Tab - Typical 13. Enter your administrator user name in the User Name text box, enter your administrator password in the Password text box, select the Log In option button, and observe the MTX50000 Main Page is displayed. See Figure 5-191. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-84 Note 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. In the following step, if a factory default digital ASI Preset is to be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, select the Default option. If a custom digital ASI Preset is to be updated or is to be used to prepare a new Preset, select the User option. Use the Presets Option pull-down menu and select Default or User, as required. Use the Color Bars pull-down menu and select Off, On, Auto Gen, or Auto Standby, as required. Use the PA State Option pull-down menu to select Off or Last, as required, and select the Submit option button. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is displayed. Use the Preset pull-down menu to select the default or user custom digital ASI Preset required. Select the Setup tab and observe the Setup page is displayed. Select the COFDM tab and observe the COFDM page is displayed. Use the Constellation pull-down menu to select QPSK, 16-QAM, or 64-QAM, as required. Use the FEC pull-down menu to select 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8, as required. Use the Guard Interval pull-down menu to select 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4, as required. Use the RF B/W pull-down menu to select 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz, as required. 26. 27. Select the Submit option button. Select the Preset tab and observe the Preset page is displayed. Notes In the following steps, if a factory default digital ASI Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, the Preset Text text box and the Preset Number text box must be changed. You cannot change or overwrite any factory default Presets!

If a custom digital ASI Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, a brief description of the custom Preset should be entered in the Preset Text text box for easy identification purposes. The Preset number must be changed only if you do not wish to overwrite the custom Preset. 28. Select the Preset Text text box and enter a unique digital ASI Preset description. Note If you used a factory Default Preset or a custom User Preset as a make-from and you want to add the new Preset to the list of User Presets contained in your MTX5000 IDU, you must know the highest user Preset number contained in your IDU. To add the new Preset to the list of User Presets, go to step 29. If you used a custom User Preset as a make-

from and you want to use it to replace (overwrite) an existing custom User Preset, go to step 31. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-85 29. 30. 31. 32. Select the Preset Number text box and enter any Preset number that is higher than the current highest Preset in your MTX5000 IDU. Select the Submit option button and observe that the Preset Number automatically displays the next higher Preset number available in the Preset User list. Go to step 32. Select the Preset Number text box, enter the Preset number that you wish to overwrite, and select the Submit option button. Observe the new Preset configuration has been loaded into the MTX5000 IDU and the new Preset name and Preset number are displayed on the Main page. Create or Update Custom Digital LMS-T 5.5.4 Preset Configuration in Remote Mode The procedure required to create a new custom digital LMS-T Preset configuration or to update an existing Preset configuration in the Remote mode is contained in the following steps. When preparing a new digital LMS-T Preset, you must first select an existing digital LMS-T Preset from either one of the digital LMS-T factory default Presets or from your own custom digital LMS-T Presets. The selected Preset will be used as a make-

from to prepare the new digital LMS-T Preset configuration. Please note that while factory default digital LMS-T Presets may be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, these factory default Presets cannot be changed or deleted. They can only be used as make-froms. When the new configuration is prepared using the factory default Preset, it cannot be saved with the factory Preset number or Preset name. A new Preset number and Preset name must be assigned to the new Preset. When using a custom Preset as a make-from, the new Preset should be saved with a new Preset number. If you select an existing Preset number when saving the new Preset, the original custom Preset will be overwritten and cannot be recovered. The only way to restore a Preset that has been overwritten is to re-enter the custom Preset data from scratch. If you are updating configuration settings on an existing custom Preset, when you save the configuration settings, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. You must enter and save the configuration settings using the original Preset number. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

193 on page 5-87. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-86 Figure 5-193: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L PA Operation Button 11. At the remote PC, open your web browser, enter the IP address for your MTX5000 IDU, and press the keyboard Enter key. The IP address should be entered as follows:

http://XXX.XXX.X.XX/nfs/main/html 12. After a short delay, observe the remote log in screen is displayed. See Figure 5-194. Figure 5-194: Remote Log In Screen - Typical 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Select the L/R option button for L (Local), as required. Select the PA operation button for PA Off, as required Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. Select the Next option button and observe the Radio -

2 screen is displayed. Select the Remote Ctrl Option button and observe the Select Remote Ctrl Opt screen is displayed. Select the Remote option button and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. Select the Main option button, observe the Main screen is displayed, and observe the L/R option button indicates R (Remote). Note In the following step, XXX.XXX.X.XX is the IP address of your MTX5000 IDU. 13. Enter your administrator user name in the User Name text box, enter your administrator password in the Password text box, select the Log In option button, and observe the MTX50000 Main Page is displayed. See Figure 5-195 on page 5-88. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-87 Figure 5-195: MTX5000 Main Page - Typical 14. Select the Setup tab and observe the Setup page is displayed by default. See Figure 5-196. Figure 5-196: Setup Tab - Typical Note In the following step, if a factory default digital LMS-T Preset is to be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, select the Default option. If a custom digital LMS-T Preset is to be updated or is to be used to prepare a new Preset, select the User option. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. Use the Presets Option pull-down menu and select Default or User, as required. Use the Color Bars pull-down menu and select Off, On, Auto Gen, or Auto Standby, as required. Use the PA State Option pull-down menu to select Off or Last, as required, and select the Submit option button. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is displayed. Use the Preset pull-down menu to select the default or user custom digital LMS-T Preset required. Select the Setup tab and observe the Setup page is displayed. Select the COFDM tab and observe the COFDM page is displayed. Use the Constellation pull-down menu to select QPSK, 16-QAM, or 64-QAM, as required. Use the FEC pull-down menu to select 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8, as required. Use the Guard Interval pull-down menu to select 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4, as required. Use the RF B/W pull-down menu to select 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-88 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. Select the Submit option button. Select the MPEG tab and observe the MPEG page is displayed. Use the General - Spectrum Invert pull-down menu to select Normal or Inverted, as required. Use the Video In - Input pull-down menu to select the input required. Use the Video Input - Noise Reduction pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Video Input - SDI Autoline pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Video Input - HD Test Pattern pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Mode pull-down menu to select Dual Mono or Stereo, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, SDI Emb, AES-EBU or Channel Ident, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Bit Rate pull-down menu to select the bit rate required. Use the Audio 2 - Mode pull-down menu to select Dual Mono or Stereo, as required. Use the Audio 2 - Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, SDI Emb, AES-EBU or Channel Ident, as required. Use the Audio 2 - Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. Note Use the Audio 2 - Bit Rate pull-down menu to select the bit rate required. Use the Audio 2 - Balance pull-down menu to select Unbalanced or Balanced, as required. Use the Encoder - Mode pull-down menu to select Standard or Low Delay, as required. Use the Encoder - Bit Rate text box to enter the bit rate required. Use the Encoder - Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Encoder - PTS per Picture pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Encoder - Horiz Resolution pull-down menu to select 720, 704, 544, 480 or 352, as required. Use the Encoder - Profile pull-down menu to select MP@HL or 422P@HL, as required. In the following step, if the Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu option selected was On, the ASI Bit Rate text box is inactive and cannot be changed. Go to step 49. If the Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu option selected was Off, the ASI Bit Rate text box is active and the bit rate can be changed. 48. Select the Encoder - ASI Bit Rate text box and enter the bit rate required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-89 Note In the following step, if the Remux pull-down menu On option is selected, the Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu will become inactive, the ASI Bit Rate text box becomes active, and the bit rate can be changed. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. Use the Encoder - Remux pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Select the Encoder - GOP Length text box and enter the group of pictures length required. Use the Encoder - Aspect ratio pull-down menu to select 16:9 or 4:3, as required. Use the Encoder - VBI pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Select the PID - Video text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - PCR text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - PMT text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - Audio 2 text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - Data text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - Audio 1 text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the Encoding - Service Name text box and enter the service name, as required. Select the Encoding - Network Name text box and enter the network name, as required. 61. 62. 63. 64. Use the Encoding - Data Enable pull-down menu to select Off, TTV Format, CJM2 Format, or Low Delay CJM2, as required. Use the Encoding - Baud Rate pull-down menu to select 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400, as required. Select the Submit option button. Select the Preset tab and observe the Preset page is displayed. Notes In the following steps, if a factory default digital LMS-T Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, the Preset Text text box and the Preset Number text box must be changed. You cannot change or overwrite any factory default Presets!

If a custom digital LMS-T Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, a brief description of the custom Preset should be entered in the Preset Text text box for easy identification purposes. The Preset number must be changed only if you do not wish to overwrite the custom Preset. 65. Select the Preset Text text box and enter a unique digital LMS-T Preset description. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-90 Note If you used a factory Default Preset or a custom User Preset as a make-from and you want to add the new Preset to the list of User Presets contained in your MTX5000 IDU, you must know the highest user Preset number contained in your IDU. To add the new Preset to the list of User Presets, go to step 66. If you used a custom User Preset as a make-

from and you want to use it to replace (overwrite) an existing custom User Preset, go to step 68. 66. 67. 68. 69. Select the Preset Number text box and enter any Preset number that is higher than the current highest Preset in your MTX5000 IDU. Select the Submit option button and observe that the Preset Number automatically displays the next higher Preset number available in the Preset User list. Go to step 69. Select the Preset Number text box, enter the Preset number that you wish to overwrite, and select the Submit option button. Observe the new Preset configuration has been loaded into the MTX5000 IDU and the new Preset name and Preset number are displayed on the Main page. Create or Update Custom Digital DVB-S 5.5.5 Preset Configuration in Remote Mode The procedure required to create a new custom digital DVB-S Preset configuration or to update an existing Preset configuration in the Remote mode is contained in the following steps. When preparing a new digital DVB-S Preset, you must first select an existing digital DVB-S Preset from either the digital DVB-S factory default Preset or from your own custom digital DVB-S Presets. The selected Preset will be used as a make-

from to prepare the new digital DVB-S Preset configuration. Please note that while factory default digital DVB-S Presets may be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, these factory default Presets cannot be changed or deleted. They can only be used as make-froms. When the new configuration is prepared using the factory default Preset, it cannot be saved with the factory Preset number or Preset name. A new Preset number and Preset name must be assigned to the new Preset. When using a custom Preset as a make-from, the new Preset should be saved with a new Preset number. If you select an existing Preset number when saving the new Preset, the original custom Preset will be overwritten and cannot be recovered. The only way to restore a Preset that has been overwritten is to re-enter the custom Preset data from scratch. If you are updating configuration settings on an existing custom Preset, when you save the configuration settings, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. You must enter and save the configuration settings using the original Preset number. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-91 2. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

197. Figure 5-197: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L PA Operation Button 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Select the L/R option button for L (Local), as required. Select the PA operation button for PA Off, as required Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. Select the Next option button and observe the Radio -

2 screen is displayed. Select the Remote Ctrl Option button and observe the Select Remote Ctrl Opt screen is displayed. Select the Remote option button and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. Select the Main option button, observe the Main screen is displayed, and observe the L/R option button indicates R (Remote). Note 11. In the following step, XXX.XXX.X.XX is the IP address of your MTX5000 IDU. At the remote PC, open your web browser, enter the IP address for your MTX5000 IDU, and press the keyboard Enter key. The IP address should be entered as follows:

http://XXX.XXX.X.XX/nfs/main/html 12. After a short delay, observe the remote log in screen is displayed. See Figure 5-198. Figure 5-198: Remote Log In Screen - Typical 13. Enter your administrator user name in the User Name text box, enter your administrator password in the Password text box, select the Log In option button, and observe the MTX50000 Main Page is displayed. See Figure 5-199 on page 5-93. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-92 Figure 5-199: MTX5000 Main Page - Typical Note 14. Select the Setup tab and observe the Setup page is displayed by default. See Figure 5-200. Figure 5-200: Setup Tab - Typical 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. In the following step, if a factory default digital DVB-S Preset is to be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, select the Default option. If a custom digital DVB-S Preset is to be updated or is to be used to prepare a new Preset, select the User option. Use the Presets Option pull-down menu and select Default or User, as required. Use the Color Bars pull-down menu and select Off, On, Auto Gen, or Auto Standby, as required. Use the PA State Option pull-down menu to select Off or Last, as required, and select the Submit option button. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is displayed. Use the Preset pull-down menu to select the default or user custom digital DVB-S Preset required. Select the Setup tab and observe the Setup page is displayed. Select the COFDM tab and observe the COFDM page is displayed. Use the Constellation pull-down menu to select QPSK, 16-QAM, or 64-QAM, as required. Use the FEC pull-down menu to select 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8, as required. Use the Guard Interval pull-down menu to select 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4, as required. Use the RF B/W pull-down menu to select 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz, as required. Select the Submit option button. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-93 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. Select the MPEG tab and observe the MPEG page is displayed. Use the General - Spectrum Invert pull-down menu to select Normal or Inverted, as required. Use the Video In - Input pull-down menu to select the input required. Use the Video Input - Noise Reduction pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Video Input - SDI Autoline pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Video Input - HD Test Pattern pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Mode pull-down menu to select Dual Mono or Stereo, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, SDI Emb, AES-EBU or Channel Ident, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Bit Rate pull-down menu to select the bit rate required. Use the Audio 2 - Mode pull-down menu to select Dual Mono or Stereo, as required. Use the Audio 2 - Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, SDI Emb, AES-EBU or Channel Ident, as required. Use the Audio 2 - Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. Use the Audio 2 - Bit Rate pull-down menu to select the bit rate required. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. Note Use the Audio 2 - Balance pull-down menu to select Unbalanced or Balanced, as required. Use the Encoder - Mode pull-down menu to select Standard or Low Delay, as required. Use the Encoder - Bit Rate text box to enter the bit rate required. Use the Encoder - Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Encoder - PTS per Picture pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Encoder - Horiz Resolution pull-down menu to select 720, 704, 544, 480 or 352, as required. Use the Encoder - Profile pull-down menu to select MP@HL or 422P@HL, as required. In the following step, if the Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu option selected was On, the ASI Bit Rate text box is inactive and cannot be changed. Go to step 49. If the Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu option selected was Off, the ASI Bit Rate text box is active and the bit rate can be changed. 48. Select the Encoder - ASI Bit Rate text box and enter the bit rate required. Note In the following step, if the Remux pull-down menu On option is selected, the Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu will become inactive, the ASI Bit Rate text box becomes active, and the bit rate can be changed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-94 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. Use the Encoder - Remux pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Select the Encoder - GOP Length text box and enter the group of pictures length required. Use the Encoder - Aspect ratio pull-down menu to select 16:9 or 4:3, as required. Use the Encoder - VBI pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Select the PID - Video text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - PCR text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - PMT text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - Audio 2 text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - Data text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - Audio 1 text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the Encoding - Service Name text box and enter the service name, as required. Select the Encoding - Network Name text box and enter the network name, as required. Use the Encoding - Data Enable pull-down menu to select Off, TTV Format, CJM2 Format, or Low Delay CJM2, as required. Use the Encoding - Baud Rate pull-down menu to select 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400, as required. Select the Submit option button. 64. 65. 66. 67. Select the DVB-S tab and observe the DVB-S page is displayed. Use the Roll Off pull-down menu to select 20%, 25%, or 35%, as required. Select the Symbol Rate text box and enter the symbol rate required. Select the Preset tab and observe the Preset page is displayed. Notes In the following steps, if a factory default digital DVB-S Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, the Preset Text text box and the Preset Number text box must be changed. You cannot change or overwrite any factory default Presets!

If a custom digital DVB-S Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, a brief description of the custom Preset should be entered in the Preset Text text box for easy identification purposes. The Preset number must be changed only if you do not wish to overwrite the custom Preset. 68. Select the Preset Text text box and enter a unique digital DVB-S Preset description. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-95 Note If you used a factory Default Preset or a custom User Preset as a make-from and you want to add the new Preset to the list of User Presets contained in your MTX5000 IDU, you must know the highest user Preset number contained in your IDU. To add the new Preset to the list of User Presets, go to step 69. If you used a custom User Preset as a make-

from and you want to use it to replace (overwrite) an existing custom User Preset, go to step 71. 69. 70. 71. 72. Select the Preset Number text box and enter any Preset number that is higher than the current highest Preset in your MTX5000 IDU. Select the Submit option button and observe that the Preset Number automatically displays the next higher Preset number available in the Preset User list. Go to step 72. Select the Preset Number text box, enter the Preset number that you wish to overwrite, and select the Submit option button. Observe the new Preset configuration has been loaded into the MTX5000 IDU and the new Preset name and Preset number are displayed on the Main page. Create or Update Custom Digital IP Preset 5.5.6 Configuration in Remote Mode The procedure required to create a new custom digital IP Preset configuration or to update an existing Preset configuration in the Remote mode is contained in the following steps. When preparing a new digital IP Preset, you must first select an existing digital IP Preset from either the digital IP factory default Preset or from your own custom digital IP Presets. The selected Preset will be used as a make-from to prepare the new digital IP Preset configuration. Please note that while factory default digital IP Presets may be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, these factory default Presets cannot be changed or deleted. They can only be used as make-froms. When the new configuration is prepared using the factory default Preset, it cannot be saved with the factory Preset number or Preset name. A new Preset number and Preset name must be assigned to the new Preset. When using a custom Preset as a make-from, the new Preset should be saved with a new Preset number. If you select an existing Preset number when saving the new Preset, the original custom Preset will be overwritten and cannot be recovered. The only way to restore a Preset that has been overwritten is to re-enter the custom Preset data from scratch. If you are updating configuration settings on an existing custom Preset, when you save the configuration settings, the Preset number will automatically be increased to the next available Preset number. You must enter and save the configuration settings using the original Preset number. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-96 2. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

201. Figure 5-201: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L PA Operation Button 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Select the L/R option button for L (Local), as required. Select the PA operation button for PA Off, as required Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. Select the Next option button and observe the Radio -

2 screen is displayed. Select the Remote Ctrl Option button and observe the Select Remote Ctrl Opt screen is displayed. Select the Remote option button and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. Select the Main option button, observe the Main screen is displayed, and observe the L/R option button indicates R (Remote). Note 11. In the following step, XXX.XXX.X.XX is the IP address of your MTX5000 IDU. At the remote PC, open your web browser, enter the IP address for your MTX5000 IDU, and press the keyboard Enter key. The IP address should be entered as follows:

http://XXX.XXX.X.XX/nfs/main/html 12. After a short delay, observe the remote log in screen is displayed. See Figure 5-202. Figure 5-202: Remote Log In Screen - Typical 13. Enter your administrator user name in the User Name text box, enter your administrator password in the Password text box, select the Log In option button, and observe the MTX50000 Main Page is displayed. See Figure 5-203 on page 5-98. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-97 Figure 5-203: MTX5000 Main Page - Typical 14. Select the Setup tab and observe the Setup page is displayed by default. See Figure 5-204. Figure 5-204: Setup Tab - Typical Note In the following step, if a factory default digital IP Preset is to be used to prepare a new Preset configuration, select the Default option. If a custom digital IP Preset is to be updated or is to be used to prepare a new Preset, select the User option. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. Use the Presets Option pull-down menu and select Default or User, as required. Use the Color Bars pull-down menu and select Off, On, Auto Gen, or Auto Standby, as required. Use the PA State Option pull-down menu to select Off or Last, as required, and select the Submit option button. Select the Main tab and observe the Main page is displayed. Use the Preset pull-down menu to select the default or user custom digital IP Preset required. Select the Setup tab and observe the Setup page is displayed. Select the COFDM tab and observe the COFDM page is displayed. Use the Constellation pull-down menu to select QPSK, 16-QAM, or 64-QAM, as required. Use the FEC pull-down menu to select 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8, as required. Use the Guard Interval pull-down menu to select 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4, as required. Use the RF B/W pull-down menu to select 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-98 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. Select the Submit option button. Select the MPEG tab and observe the MPEG page is displayed. Use the General - Spectrum Invert pull-down menu to select Normal or Inverted, as required. Use the Video In - Input pull-down menu to select the input required. Use the Video Input - Noise Reduction pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Video Input - SDI Autoline pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Video Input - HD Test Pattern pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Mode pull-down menu to select Dual Mono or Stereo, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, SDI Emb, AES-EBU or Channel Ident, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. Use the Audio 1 - Bit Rate pull-down menu to select the bit rate required. Use the Audio 2 - Mode pull-down menu to select Dual Mono or Stereo, as required. Use the Audio 2 - Input pull-down menu to select Test Tone, Analog, SDI Emb, AES-EBU or Channel Ident, as required. Use the Audio 2 - Standard pull-down menu to select Off, MPEG Layer II, Linear PCM, or MPEG Layer I, as required. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. Note Use the Audio 2 - Bit Rate pull-down menu to select the bit rate required. Use the Audio 2 - Balance pull-down menu to select Unbalanced or Balanced, as required. Use the Encoder - Mode pull-down menu to select Standard or Low Delay, as required. Use the Encoder - Bit Rate text box to enter the bit rate required. Use the Encoder - Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Encoder - PTS per Picture pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Use the Encoder - Horiz Resolution pull-down menu to select 720, 704, 544, 480 or 352, as required. Use the Encoder - Profile pull-down menu to select MP@HL or 422P@HL, as required. In the following step, if the Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu option selected was On, the ASI Bit Rate text box is inactive and cannot be changed. Go to step 49. If the Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu option selected was Off, the ASI Bit Rate text box is active and the bit rate can be changed. 48. Select the Encoder - ASI Bit Rate text box and enter the bit rate required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-99 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. Use the Encoding - Data Enable pull-down menu to select Off, TTV Format, CJM2 Format, or Low Delay CJM2, as required. Use the Encoding - Baud Rate pull-down menu to select 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400, as required. Select the Submit option button. Select the IP tab and observe the IP page is displayed. Use the IP Transfer Mode pull-down menu to select IP Only or IP + Video, as required. Note In the following step, the Video Bit Rate text box is active only if the IP Transfer Mode menu IP +

Video option was selected. 66. 67. 68. Select the Video Bit Rate text box and enter the bit rate required. Select the Symbol Rate text box and enter the symbol rate required. Select the Preset tab and observe the Preset page is displayed. Note In the following step, if the Remux pull-down menu On option is selected, the Bit Rate Auto pull-down menu will become inactive, the ASI Bit Rate text box becomes active, and the bit rate can be changed. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. Use the Encoder - Remux pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Select the Encoder - GOP Length text box and enter the group of pictures length required. Use the Encoder - Aspect ratio pull-down menu to select 16:9 or 4:3, as required. Use the Encoder - VBI pull-down menu to select On or Off, as required. Select the PID - Video text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - PCR text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - PMT text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - Audio 2 text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - Data text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the PID - Audio 1 text box and enter the program identifier, as required. Select the Encoding - Service Name text box and enter the service name, as required. Select the Encoding - Network Name text box and enter the network name, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-100 Notes In the following steps, if a factory default digital IP Preset was used as a make-from to prepare this custom Preset, the Preset Text text box and the Preset Number text box must be changed. You cannot change or overwrite any factory default Presets!

If a custom digital IP Preset was used as a make-

from to prepare this custom Preset, a brief description of the custom Preset should be entered in the Preset Text text box for easy identification purposes. The Preset number must be changed only if you do not wish to overwrite the custom Preset. 71. 72. 73. 5.6 Select the Submit option button and observe that the Preset Number automatically displays the next higher Preset number available in the Preset User list. Go to step 73. Select the Preset Number text box, enter the Preset number that you wish to overwrite, and select the Submit option button. Observe the new Preset configuration has been loaded into the MTX5000 IDU and the new Preset name and Preset number are displayed on the Main page. Preset File Management 69. Select the Preset Text text box and enter a unique digital IP Preset description. CAUTION Note If you used a factory Default Preset or a custom User Preset as a make-from and you want to add the new Preset to the list of User Presets contained in your MTX5000 IDU, you must know the highest user Preset number contained in your IDU. To add the new Preset to the list of User Presets, go to step 70. If you used a custom User Preset as a make-

from and you want to use it to replace (overwrite) an existing custom User Preset, go to step 72. 70. Select the Preset Number text box and enter any Preset number that is higher than the current highest Preset in your MTX5000 IDU. Avoid damage to the color LCD display panel when performing the following procedures!

The color LCD display panel touch screen may be damaged if a sharp, hard-pointed object, such as a pencil or a pen, is used to select the displayed options. Touch screen options must only be selected using your fingers, a soft-pointed stylus, or the front panel function keys. Damage to the color LCD display panel caused by using a hard-pointed object or other misuse may void your warranty on the MTX5000 IDU. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-101 Note Procedures contained in this section may only be performed in the Local mode. The procedures required to save Preset configuration files contained on your MTX5000 IDU to a USB flash drive, also referred to as a thumb drive, memory stick, or memory device, and to load Preset configuration files into your MTX5000 IDU are contained in the following paragraphs. The procedures contained in these paragraphs can only be performed in the Local mode. Restore Presets to Defaults 5.6.1 The procedure required to restore all custom Presets to the factory default Presets is contained in the following steps. Prior to performing this procedure, it is highly recommended that you make a copy of any custom Preset files by performing Save Preset Configurations to a File on page 5-104. When performing the following steps, all custom Presets will be deleted and only the factory default Presets will remain. In addition, the password and IP address will also be changed to the factory defaults. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons and pull-down menu options may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

205. Figure 5-205: Main Screen - Typical PA Operation Button Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 3. 4. 5. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-206. Figure 5-206: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-102 6. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 5-207. Figure 5-209: Are you sure? Screen Figure 5-207: Radio Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 7. Select the Next option button and observe the Radio - 2 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-208. Figure 5-208: Radio - 2 Screen Radio - 2 Presets Option Remote Ctrl Option PA State Option Load Presets from File Save Presets to File Restore Presets to Defaults Back Main 8. Select the Restore Presets to Defaults option button and observe the Are you sure? screen is displayed. See Figure 5-209. Are you sure?

Yes No 9. Select the Yes option button and observe the keyboard screen is displayed. See Figure 5-210. Figure 5-210: Keyboard Screen

Q W E R T Y

U

I

O A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M

Shift

) P

BS Enter Clear Cancel Note When the Enter key is selected in the following step, the MTX5000 IDU will perform an automatic re-boot. It will take approximately two minutes for the re-

boot to be complete. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-103 10. 11. 12. 13. Enter your password, select the Enter key, observe Please Wait is briefly displayed, the Operation Mode screen is briefly displayed, and observe the MTX5000 IDU automatically re-boots. Observe the Main page is displayed and the Preset description text box indicates Default Presets. Perform Select Preset on page 3-24 to select a Preset, as required. Perform Local Mode Password Control on page 5-3. Perform Set Network Addresses for Remote Operation on page 5-109. Save Preset Configurations to a File 5.6.2 The procedure required to save the current Preset configuration settings contained in your MTX5000 IDU to a USB memory device is contained in the following steps. Saving the Preset configuration settings to a USB memory device provides you with a backup of all custom Presets that have been prepared and saved in your MTX5000 IDU. After the Preset configuration settings are saved to a USB memory device, the USB memory device may be used to load the same Preset settings into another MTX5000 IDU. If the Preset settings are to be loaded into another MTX5000 IDU, the IDU must contain the same hardware configuration options and must have the same licensed options as the IDU from which the Preset configuration settings were saved to the USB memory device. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

211. Figure 5-211: Main Screen - Typical PA Operation Button Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 3. 4. 5. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-212 on page 5-105. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-104 Figure 5-212: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main 6. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 5-213. Figure 5-213: Radio Screen Radio 7. Select the Next option button and observe the Radio -

2 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-214. Figure 5-214: Radio - 2 Screen Radio - 2 Presets Option Remote Ctrl Option PA State Option Load Presets from File Save Presets to File Restore Presets to Defaults Back Main 8. Connect a USB memory device to a USB-A to USB-B adapter and connect the adapter to the IDU front panel USB 2.0 connector. See Figure 5-215. Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Figure 5-215: IDU Front Panel USB Connector Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next MTX5000 Radio - 2 Presets Option Remote Ctrl Option PA State Option Load Presets from File Save Presets to File Restore Presets to Defaults Back Main 1 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9WXYZ

*Shift 0

#Space SEL USB 2.0 Connector Note In the following step, Load Presets from File and Save Presets to File screen option buttons will be inactive (greyed-out) until a USB memory device is connected to the MTX5000 IDU front panel USB 2.0 connector. Note The Load Presets from File option button will not be active in the following step if there is currently no Preset setting configuration file on the USB memory device. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-105 9. After a short delay, observe the Save Presets to File option button is active (not greyed-out). See Figure 5-

216. Figure 5-216: Preset File Screen - Typical Radio - 2 Presets Option Remote Ctrl Option PA State Option Load Presets from File Save Presets to File Restore Presets to Defaults Back Main 10. Select the Save Presets to File option button and observe the Are you sure? screen appears. See Figure 5-217. Figure 5-217: Are you sure? Screen Are you sure?

Yes No 11. 12. Select the Yes option button and observe Are you sure? changes to read Please wait. After a short delay, observe the Please Wait! text box disappears. 13. 14. Disconnect the USB memory device and USB-A to USB-B adapter from the IDU front panel USB 2.0 connector. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Load Preset Configurations from a File 5.6.3 The procedure required to load custom Preset configuration settings from a USB memory device into your MTX5000 IDU is contained in the following steps. This procedure may be used to load custom Preset configuration settings from one MTX5000 IDU into another MTX5000 IDU using the USB memory device to clone the IDU custom Preset configuration settings. If the custom Preset settings are to be loaded into another MTX5000 IDU, the IDU must contain the same hardware configuration options and must have the same licensed options as the IDU from which the custom Preset configuration settings were saved to the USB memory device. This procedure may also be used to recover custom Preset configuration settings in the event you suspect that your MTX5000 IDU internal software may have been corrupted during normal operation. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

218 on page 5-107. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-106 Figure 5-218: Main Screen - Typical Figure 5-220: Radio Screen Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L PA Operation Button 3. 4. 5. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-219. Figure 5-219: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main 6. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 5-220. Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next Note In the following step, the Load Presets from File and Save Presets to File option buttons will be inactive (greyed-out) until a USB memory device is connected to the MTX5000 IDU front panel USB 2.0 connector. 7. Select the Next option button and observe the Radio -

2 screen is displayed. See Figure 5-221. Figure 5-221: Radio - 2 Screen Radio - 2 Presets Option Remote Ctrl Option PA State Option Load Presets from File Save Presets to File Restore Presets to Defaults Back Main MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-107 8. Connect a USB memory device to a USB-A to USB-B adapter and connect the adapter to the IDU front panel USB 2.0 connector. See Figure 5-222. Figure 5-222: IDU Front Panel USB Connector MTX5000 Radio - 2 Presets Option Remote Ctrl Option PA State Option Load Presets from File Save Presets to File Restore Presets to Defaults Back Main 1 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9WXYZ

*Shift 0

#Space SEL USB 2.0 Connector Notes Ensure your memory device contains the custom Preset setting configuration file required. The Load Presets from File option button will not be active in the following step if there is no Preset setting configuration file currently contained on the USB memory device. 9. After a short delay, observe the Load Presets from File option button is active (not greyed-out). See Figure 5-223. Figure 5-223: Preset File Screen - Typical Radio - 2 Presets Option Remote Ctrl Option PA State Option Load Presets from File Save Presets to File Restore Presets to Defaults Back Main 10. Select the Load Presets from File option button and observe the Are you sure? screen is displayed. See Figure 5-224. Figure 5-224: Verification Screen Are you sure?

Yes No 11. Select the Yes option button and observe the Please Wait! message box is displayed. See Figure 5-225 on page 5-109. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-108 Figure 5-225: Please Wait Message Box Please Wait!

Yes No 12. When the Please Wait! message box disappears, go 13. 14. to the following step. Disconnect the USB memory device and USB-A to USB-B adapter from the IDU front panel USB 2.0 connector. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Set Network Addresses for 5.7 Remote Operation The steps required to set the radio network, file network, and trap configuration addresses are contained in the following procedures. These procedures may only be performed in the Local mode of operation. CAUTION Avoid damage to the color LCD display panel!

The color LCD display panel touch screen may be damaged if a sharp, hard-pointed object, such as a pencil or a pen, is used to select the displayed options. Touch screen options must only be selected using your fingers, a soft-pointed stylus, or the front panel function keys. Damage to the color LCD display panel caused by using a hard-pointed object or other misuse may void your warranty on the MTX5000 IDU. The procedure required to set the network addresses to allow operation of your MTX5000 System from a remote location is contained in the following steps. Before proceeding with this procedure, you must obtain valid Radio IP, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server addresses from your Network Administrator. All addresses must be properly entered into your MTX5000 IDU before you can operate your MTX5000 System from a remote location. It is important that the MTX5000 must not be transmitting when this procedure is performed. When updating the software in the IDU, you must observe the following CAUTIONS to avoid corrupting software. CAUTION Do not power down the MTX5000 system when the software update progress bar is displayed, as the software update can become corrupted. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-109 CAUTION Do not attempt to perform this procedure while the MTX5000 system is actively transmitting. Attempts to perform this procedure when the system is transmitting will interrupt broadcast operations. 4. 5. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-227. Figure 5-227: Setup Screen Setup Note In the following steps, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

226. Figure 5-226: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L PA Operation Button 3. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. User Radio Main 6. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 5-228. Figure 5-228: Radio Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-110 7. Select the Network Config option button and observe the Network screen is displayed. See Figure 5-229. CAUTION Figure 5-229: Network Config Screen Network Config Radio Network File Network Trap Config In the following steps, the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server addresses must all be entered correctly. If the addresses dont match the configuration of the network to which the MTX5000 IDU is connected, the MTX5000 IDU will not be detected and cannot be used from a remote location. Back Main 8. Select the Radio Network option button and observe the Radio Network screen is displayed. See Figure 5-230. Figure 5-230: Radio Network Screen - Typical Radio Network IP Address 10.4.3.213 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 Gateway 10.4.1.1 DNS Server 10.4.1.21 Back Main 9. Select the IP Address option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-231. Figure 5-231: Numeric Keypad 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 10. 11. 12. 13. Enter the IP address, select the ENT key, and observe the Radio Network screen is displayed. Select the Subnet Mask option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Subnet Mask address, select the ENT key, and observe the Radio Network screen is displayed. Select the Gateway option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-111 14. 15. 16. 17. Note Enter the Gateway address, select the ENT key, and observe the Radio Network screen is displayed. Select the DNS Server option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the DNS Server address, select the ENT key, and observe the Radio Network screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Network Config screen is displayed. If you do not have the IP option installed, the File Network option button will be inactive (greyed-out) in the following step. If the File Network option button is inactive, go to step 25. 18. Select the File Network option button and observe the File Network screen is displayed. See Figure 5-232. Figure 5-232: File Network Screen - Typical File Network IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Back Main Note When entering File Network addresses in the following steps, the addresses cannot be the same as the Radio Network addresses. 19. Select the IP Address option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. See Figure 5-233. Figure 5-233: Numeric Keypad 0 3 6 9 ESC ESC ENT 1 4 7 CLR 2 5 8 0 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. Enter the IP address, select the ENT key, and observe the File Network screen is displayed. Select the Subnet Mask option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Subnet Mask address, select the ENT key, and observe the File Network screen is displayed. Select the Gateway option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the Gateway address, select the ENT key, and observe the File Network screen is displayed. Select the Back option button and observe the Network Config screen is displayed. Select the Trap Config option button and observe the Trap Config screen is displayed. See Figure 5-234 on page 5-113. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-112 Figure 5-234: Trap Config Screen - Typical Trap Config Dest. Address 192.168.1.2 Port #

162 Back Main 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. Select the Dest. Address option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the destination address, select the ENT key, and observe the Trap Config screen is displayed. Select the Port # option button and observe the numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the port number required, select the ENT key, and observe the Trap Config screen is displayed. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. Press the front panel power switch to off, wait a minimum of 10 seconds, and press the power switch to on. When the Main screen is displayed, go to the following step. Notes The following steps verify the correct IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server addresses have been correctly entered by verifying that you can connect to your MTX5000 System from a remote PC. If the addresses have not been correctly entered, you will not be able to connect from a remote PC. Repeat from step 5 to verify or correct addresses. If all addresses have been correctly entered and you cannot connect from a remote PC, contact your Network Administrator for assistance. 33. 34. 35. Verify your MTX5000 IDU ETHERNET connector is properly connected to your network. At the remote PC, open your web browser, enter the IP address for your MTX5000 IDU, and press the PC keyboard Enter key. After a short delay, observe the remote screen display appears on your PC. See Figure 5-235 on page 5-

114. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-113 Figure 5-235: Remote Screen Display - Typical 36. 37. Perform Select Local/Remote Operation Mode on page 3-20 and set the MTX5000 for remote mode operation. Verify operations can be performed from a remote PC by performing any selected procedure contained in Remote Location Operations on page 3-67. 38. When remote operations are verified, select the MTX5000 IDU Main screen L/R option button to change it to L (local mode), as required. Firmware Update 5.8 CAUTION Avoid damage to the color LCD display panel when performing the following procedures!

The color LCD display panel touch screen may be damaged if a sharp, hard-pointed object, such as a pencil or a pen, is used to select the displayed options. Touch screen options must only be selected using your fingers, a soft-pointed stylus, or the front panel function keys. Damage to the color LCD display panel caused by using a hard-pointed object or other misuse may void your warranty on the MTX5000 IDU. The procedure required to update firmware in your MTX5000 Indoor Unit (IDU) is contained in the following steps. Firmware updates must be obtained from the factory. The updates will be installed in the MTX5000 Indoor Unit (IDU) using a USB flash drive. The USB flash drive, also referred to as a thumb drive, memory stick, or memory device is connected to the MTX5000 IDU front panel USB 2.0 connector using a USB-A to USB-B adapter. The firmware update procedure can be performed with the MTX5000 IDU disconnected from the system or can be performed when the IDU is installed in its normal rack-mounted position. It is important that the MTX5000 must not be transmitting when this procedure is performed. When updating the firmware in the IDU, you must observe the following CAUTIONS to avoid corrupting firmware. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-114 CAUTION CAUTION Do not power down the MTX5000 system when the firmware update progress bar is displayed, as the firmware update can become corrupted. Do not attempt to perform the IDU firmware update while the MTX5000 system is actively transmitting. Attempts to program firmware updates into the IDU when the system is transmitting will interrupt broadcast operations. Note In the following steps, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 system is powered up per Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

236. Figure 5-236: Main Screen - Typical PA Operation Button Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 3. 4. 5. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. Connect the USB memory device containing the software update to a USB-A to USB-B adapter and connect the adapter to the IDU front panel USB 2.0 connector. See Figure 5-237. Figure 5-237: IDU Front Panel USB Connector MTX5000 Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 1 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9WXYZ

*Shift 0

#Space SEL USB 2.0 Connector 6. After a short delay, observe the Firmware Update screen is displayed. See Figure 5-238 on page 5-116. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-115 Figure 5-238: Firmware Update Screen - Typical Firmware Update Current Version New Version V.0.3.X V.0.4.Y Update Cancel CAUTION When the Update option button is selected in the following step, a progress bar will be displayed during the update process. Do not power the MTX5000 down for any reason while the progress bar is displayed, as the firmware upgrade will be corrupted. CAUTION To avoid corruption of the firmware update, do not remove the USB flash drive until the firmware update process is complete. Notes If the Current Version and New Version are different, go to step 7. If the Current Version and New Version are identical, go to step 10. 7. Select the Update option button and observe the Firmware Update screen is displayed and a progress bar is displayed during the update process. See Figure 5-239. Figure 5-239: Firmware Update Screen - Typical Firmware Update Firmware Update in Progress Please Wait 60 %

DO NOT POWER OFF RADIO UNTIL UPDATE COMPLETED!

8. When the firmware update is complete, the IDU will re-

boot, the Main screen will be displayed, and the Firmware Update screen will be displayed after a short delay. Note In the following step, if the versions shown in the Firmware Update screen Current Version and the New Version text boxes are identical, the firmware update was successful. 9. Observe the Current Version and New Version text boxes indicate the same version. See Figure 5-240 on page 5-117. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-116 Figure 5-240: Firmware Update Screen - Typical Firmware Update Current Version New Version V.0.4.Y V.0.4.Y Update Cancel 10. 11. 12. Disconnect the USB memory device and adapter from the IDU front panel USB 2.0 connector. Select the Cancel option button, and observe the Main screen is displayed after a short delay. Press the power switch to off, wait 10 seconds minimum, and press the power switch to on. License Manager 5.9 This section describes how to add factory licensed options to your MTX5000 IDU. Only licensed options applicable to the hardware options contained in your MTX5000 IDU can be installed in your radio. Your MTX5000 IDU does not have to be returned to the factory to add licensed options applicable to your MTX5000 IDU configuration. The internal software contains a license manager feature that allows you to add licensed options to your IDU that were not initially ordered with your radio. The license manager procedure can be performed with the MTX5000 IDU disconnected from the system or can be performed when the IDU is installed in its normal rack-mounted position. It is important, however, that the MTX5000 must not be transmitting when these procedures are performed. When performing procedures contained in this section, you must observe the following CAUTIONS to avoid corrupting software. CAUTION Avoid damage to the color LCD display panel!

The color LCD display panel touch screen may be damaged if a sharp, hard-pointed object, such as a pencil or a pen, is used to select the displayed options. Touch screen options must only be selected using your fingers, a soft-pointed stylus, or the front panel function keys. Damage to the color LCD display panel caused by using a hard-pointed object or other misuse may void your warranty on the MTX5000 IDU. CAUTION Do not power down the MTX5000 system when the software update progress bar is displayed, as the software update can become corrupted. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-117 CAUTION Do not attempt to perform this procedure while the MTX5000 system is actively transmitting. Attempts to program license manager features into the IDU when the system is transmitting will interrupt broadcast operations and may corrupt the software. In order to add a licensed option to your MTX5000 IDU, you must obtain a license key applicable to the option required. This license key is available only from MRC. Your IDU must also contain the hardware applicable to the licensed option. When ordering a license key from MRC, you must provide MRC with both the serial number of your MTX5000 IDU and the serial number of the main circuit board in the IDU. The IDU serial number is located on the right-hand side of the chassis. To identify the electronic serial number of the IDU Encoder/

Modulator board, perform step 1 thru step 7 of the following procedure and record the serial number listed in the Serial No. text box. The procedure required to install a new licensed option, after obtaining the license key from MRC, is contained in the following steps. This procedure is generic and can be used to install all licensed options in your MTX5000 IDU. Each licensed option contained in your MTX5000 IDU requires an individual license key. Note In the following steps, the color LCD display option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 1. 2. Verify the MTX5000 IDU is powered up. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

241. Figure 5-241: Main Screen - Typical PA Operation Button Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 3. 4. 5. Select the Main screen PA operation button for PA Off, as required. Select the L/R option button for L (local mode), as required. Select the Main screen Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

242 on page 5-119. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-118 Figure 5-242: Setup Screen Figure 5-244: License Setup Screen - Typical Setup License Setup User Radio Main Serial No. 123X45Y6 License Key Submit Main Cancel 6. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure 5-243 Figure 5-243: Radio Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 8. Select the License Key option button and observe the alphanumeric keyboard is displayed. See Figure 5-

245. Figure 5-245: Alphanumeric Keyboard 1 4 7 2 5 8 DEL CAN 3 6 9 0 0 A B C D E F ENT 7. Select the License Key option button and observe the License Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-

244. 9. Enter the 12-character license key obtained from MRC, select the ENT key, and observe the License Setup screen is displayed. See Figure 5-246 on page 5-120. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-119 Figure 5-246: License Setup Screen - Typical License Setup Serial No. 123ABCD8 License Key Submit Main Cancel Notes When the Submit option button is selected in the following step, the licensed option will be enabled if the correct license key was entered. If a typing error occurred when the license key was entered, no verification or error message will be displayed. Incorrect keys will be stored in the IDU memory. If the licensed option does not perform as expected during normal operation, repeat from step 7 to enter the correct license key. 10. 11. Select the Submit option button. Select the Main option button and observe the Main screen is displayed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Advanced Operations 5-120 6 Installation Chapter Overview 6.1 This chapter describes how to unpack and install your MTX5000 Transmitter System (MTX5000). The MTX5000 system consists of the MTX5000 Indoor Unit (IDU) and Outdoor Unit (ODU), also referred to as the RF Unit. The topics covered in this chapter are as follows:

Topic Unpacking Initial Inspection Damage in Shipment Installing the MTX5000 IDU Site Preparation Mounting the MTX5000 IDU Power Connections Power Requirements Power Supply and Distribution Grounding Defining the Wiring Harness Steps to Define the Harness Select the Type of RF/Power Cabling Select the Function Cables Required Determine the Size of Harness Required Cabling Requirements MTX5000 System Type N Connector Interface MTX5000 System TNC Connector Interface Page 6-1 6-2 6-2 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-5 6-5 6-5 6-7 6-9 6-9 6-11 6-12 Installing the Fabricated Harness Installing the Outdoor Unit Site Preparation Mounting the ODU Making the Connections Mast Top Connections IDU Connections Wayside Data Connections Wayside Connections Compatibility Audio Connections Audio Inputs Analog Audio Inputs Digital Audio Inputs ODU Power Remote Control Operations Powering Up Checks Before Power-Up Initial Power-Up Power Down 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-16 6-24 6-24 6-24 6-24 6-24 6-25 6-25 6-26 6-26 6-27 6-27 6-27 6-29 6-29 Unpacking Product Modifications 6.2 Each MTX5000 is shipped assembled, wired, and factory tested. Each unit is packaged in appropriate shipping containers. Here are some tips to help you with unpack your new equipment:

Unpack the equipment carefully to avoid accidental damage. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-1 Be sure to locate all parts and accessories. Verify that the items shipped agree with those listed on the packing list. DO NOT discard the container(s) or packing material until you have inspected the equipment and are sure there is no shipping damage. The container(s) and packing must be available in the event that a damage claim needs to be filed with the shipping carrier. Initial Inspection 6.3 After the equipment is unpacked, we recommend you inspect it using the following checklist:

Check for any dents or scratches. Check that the equipment is clean and dry. Check that no cables or connectors are broken, damaged, or loose. Check that no switch, keypad, or function keys are broken, damaged, or loose. Check that the LCD display has not been damaged. Damage in Shipment 6.4 Should any damage be discovered after unpacking the unit, use the following procedure:

Immediately file a claim with the shipping carrier. Forward a copy of the damage report to MRC Customer Service. Installing the MTX5000 IDU 6.5 For mobile applications, the MTX5000 is typically mounted in a bulkhead or compartment 19-inch (48.3 cm) rack and the cabling is permanently installed. Power comes from the mobile power source. Site Preparation 6.5.1 The following requirements are designed to make initial installation easier and to allow room for future access and servicing. Equipment Rack The MTX5000 mounts into the mounting rails of a standard 19-inch (48.3 cm) equipment rack. It occupies 2 rack units (2RU) of height. Make certain the rack and mounting rails are strong and rigid enough to support the MTX5000 and the rest of the equipment in the rack. It is recommended that a rack mount shelf be installed in the back of the rack to help support the MTX5000 during the high stresses of vehicle vibration. The rack should be securely attached to a solid surface such as a floor or wall to prevent movement or tipping over. Position the rack to allow easy access to the front and rear of the equipment. Be sure to allow room behind the equipment rack for the many cables required. The cables should not be pressed against the rear of the equipment when closing doors. This will stress the cables and may shorten their life. Contact MRC Customer Service to determine the disposition of the equipment. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-2 6.5.2 Mounting the MTX5000 IDU Mounting the MTX5000 IDU into an equipment rack is easier if one person holds the unit while another person installs the mounting screws. Ventilation CAUTION WARNING Follow instructions carefully. Exercise care to avoid equipment damage or personnel injury. 1. Lift the MTX5000 IDU into place, lining up its mounting holes with the holes in the rack mounting rails. See Figure 6-1. Figure 6-1: MTX5000 IDU Mounting MTX5000 1 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9WXYZ

*Shift 0

#Space SEL 2. 3. Install the two bottom screws first. Use lock washers to prevent loosening. Tighten securely. Install the top two screws. Use lock washers to prevent loosening. Tighten securely. Temperatures inside a closed mounting area can be significantly higher than the ambient temperature. Always allow adequate ventilation. If possible, install the MTX5000 IDU in a climate-

controlled area. Installation should allow adequate air flow around the equipment. Air flow should be circulated and mixed with room air, not trapped in a closed space. When mounting the MTX5000 IDU in an enclosed rack with other equipment, it is good practice to allow spaces at the top and bottom of the rack, and to fill those spaces with grillwork instead of blank panels. Moisture WARNING Indoor equipment is not designed to withstand water or moisture. If water does penetrate the chassis, it could cause equipment damage and/or create a safety hazard. Locate the equipment in an area protected from dripping water or excessive humidity. Cabling In mobile installations, wiring is subject to extremes of temperature, humidity, and vibration. MRC recommends the following general practices be performed in all installations. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-3 CAUTION Be sure the power being supplied matches the power required by the equipment. CAUTION Power supply cords and cables must be protected. Do not run cords where they can be walked upon. Protect cables against pinching and chafing. Pay special attention to locations where the cables enter or exit an enclosure or make a sharp bend. CAUTION Ensure that the electrical supply is protected by over current protection devices, as required by the applicable electrical codes. Secure all cables at close intervals along their entire lengths. Protect the cabling with additional sheathing or padding anywhere it passes through a hole or lays against an obstruction. Provide flex relief at any location where the cable must change direction sharply, to maintain a smooth bend and prevent kinking. Provide strain relief at each connector to absorb any pulling forces on the cable and prevent damage to the connector. Power Connections Power Requirements 6.6 6.6.1 The MTX5000 has the following power requirements. 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Supply Voltage:

IDU Power Consumption: 40 Watts Nominal Standard ODU Power Consumption: 65 Watts Nominal High Power ODU Power Consumption: 80 Watts Nominal Power Supply and Distribution 6.6.2 AC power is supplied externally, from the mobile power source. Power is distributed to the MTX5000 through the rear panel AC POWER IN connector. See Figure 6-2. Figure 6-2: AC POWER IN Connector IF MON ASI 1 HD-SDI ASI 2 RFU POWER OUT POWER IN AC-3 IF IN VID MON SDI/ASI SMPTE 302 ANT CONTROL

1

2 RFU 1 RFU 2 H V LCP ANT2 BAND2 GND

POWER IN Connector Power Connections MRC supplies an AC power cable with each MTX5000. Additional Powering Notes Check the electrical supply to be sure it can provide all the power needed at the site without overloading. Power ratings for equipment can be found on a rating plate, usually on the rear panel. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-4 CAUTION Be sure the power being supplied matches the power required by the equipment. CAUTION Power supply cords and cables must be protected. Do not run cords where they can be walked upon. Protect cables against pinching and chafing. Pay special attention to locations where the cables enter or exit an enclosure or make a sharp bend. CAUTION Ensure that the electrical supply is protected by overcurrent protection devices as required by the applicable electrical codes. 6.7 Grounding CAUTION Be sure the equipment grounding follows applicable electrical codes. CAUTION Never modify a grounded power plug to connect to an ungrounded receptacle. The MTX5000 must be connected to the common ground on the installation. This common ground is often the vehicle ground. The ground wire should be as short as possible, and follow the straightest path possible. Defining the Wiring Harness 6.8 This section describes how to define the wiring harness that connects the MTX5000 IDU to ODU. The wiring harness contains RF/Power cables and function cables. Supplying main power to the MTX5000 IDU is covered in Section 6.6 on page 6-4. Steps to Define the Harness 6.8.1 Perform the following steps to define the wiring harness between the IDU and the ODU. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the type of RF/power cabling required. See Select the Type of RF/Power Cabling . Select the function cables required. See Section 6.8.3 on page 6-7. Determine the size of the wiring harness required. See Section 6.8.4 on page 6-9. When the wiring harness is fabricated, go to Installing the Fabricated Harness on page 6-13. Select the Type of RF/Power Cabling 6.8.2 The first step is to determine what type of RF and DC power cabling you will be using to connect the IDU to the ODU. There are three different options:

Triax connectors (RF, control, and DC power in one cable). See Figure 6-3 on page 6-6. Type N connectors (RF and control on one cable, DC power in another cable). See Figure 6-4 on page 6-7. TNC connectors (RF and control in one cable, DC power in another cable). See Figure 6-4 on page 6-7. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-5 The MTX5000 system may be ordered with Triax, Type N, or TNC cable connectors. Existing installations may use Triax, Type N, or TNC cabling. Special Note - Triax Installations Over time, flexing and vibration can cause the connections inside the Triax connector to deteriorate, leading to high resistance in the DC circuit paths. This, in turn, can cause erratic and intermittent problems with the MTX5000 system. MRC recommends you avoid this possibility by performing the following:

Install the Triax connector carefully, following the steps in Installing Triax Connectors on page A-1. Support the Triax cable so that any movement of the cable does not apply stress to the Triax connector. Figure 6-3: Triax Cabling - Typical NOTE:

Connections from the ODU to the antenna are always Type N. RF UNIT 1 TRIAX CONNECTOR RF UNIT 2 TRIAX CONNECTOR RFU POWER OUT POWER IN ANT CONTROL

1

2 RFU 1 RFU 2 H V LCP ANT2 BAND2 GND

RF UNIT 1 TRIAX CONNECTOR RF UNIT 2 TRIAX CONNECTOR MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-6 Select the Function Cables Required 6.8.3 In addition to the RF signal and DC power, the wiring harness may include several other cables which are used to control functions at the top of the mast. What cables need to be included in the wiring harness are application dependent. You may choose to procure your own cables and Nycoil conduit and fabricate your own harness, or an ENG van integrator may procure or fabricate the harness for you. Selecting Function Cables Table 6-1 on page 6-8 provides the most commonly requested functions. To select the cables for your wiring harness, perform the following:

Select the functions you require. Read across the table to see what individual cables are applicable to your particular requirements. These are the cables that should be included in the harness. 1. 2. Figure 6-4: Type N and TNC Cabling - Typical NOTE:

Connections from the ODU to the antenna are always Type N. RF UNIT 1

"N" OR TNC CONNECTOR POWER CONNECTOR RF UNIT 2

"N" OR TNC CONNECTOR POWER CONNECTOR RFU POWER OUT RFU POWER OUT POWER IN ANTENNA CONTROL ANT CONTROL

1

2 RFU 1 RFU 2 H V LCP ANT2 BAND2 GND

RF UNIT 1

"N" OR TNC CONNECTOR RF UNIT 2

"N" OR TNC CONNECTOR MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-7 Table 6-1: Functions and Cables Required Function IF + DC Power to ODU IF signal + DC Power + ODU Control Antenna Functions Antenna Polarization Control - Single Band Operation Antenna Polarization Control - Dual Band Operation Existing Wiring IF Signal + ODU Control 2A20 POL CTL/PA200/PA700 Standard ODU Type N and TNC Connectors High Power ODU Type N Connector Nycoil Conduit Cable Description

(Vendor Part Number) Outside Diameter Inches [mm]

TRIAX

(Belden 8232) 6 Conductor 20 AWG stranded

(Manhattan M33406) 10 Conductor 20 AWG stranded

(Manhattan M33410) Coaxial, Type N Connectors

(RG-214) 5 Conductor 20 AWG Stranded

(Belden 9445) 9 Conductor 20 AWG Stranded

(Belden 9455) 7 Conductor 16 AWG Stranded

(Belden 8621)

(Recommended for both Standard and High Power ODU installations) Nycoil Conduit

(Nycoil 19081) Nycoil Conduit

(Nycoil 20001)

.315

[8.0 mm]

.255

[6.47 mm]

.335

[8.5 mm]

.425

[10.79 mm]

.239

[6.07 mm]

.317

[8.05 mm]

.458

[11.63 mm]

1

[25.4 mm]

1.25

[37.5 mm]

MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-8 6.8.4 Determine the Size of Harness Required Length The length of your harness is set by the length of the mast when fully raised. Refer to Table 6-2 to locate typical dimensions, as shown in Figure 6-5. Note these are only typical dimensions. Your harness may be different. Table 6-2: Harness Dimensions Mast Height Overall Length Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C 10

[3.0 M]

10

[3.0 M]

10

[3.0 M]

20

[6.0 M]

20

[6.0 M]

20

[6.0 M]

74

[22.5 M]

86

[26.2 M]

106

[32.3 M]

104

[31.7 M]

116

[35.4 M]

136

[41.5 M]

42

[12.8 M]

48

[14.6 M]

58

[17.7 M]

The formula used to determine theoretical end-to-end cable lengths (See Figure 6-5) is as follows:

Overall Length = (DIM A - 5 ft.) x 2 + DIM B + DIM C For example, with a mast height of 58 ft., minus 5 ft. inside the truck = 53 ft. x 2 = 106 ft. + 10 ft. + 20 ft. = 136 ft. Figure 6-5: Harness lengths DIM BDIM B Overall Length Overall Length DIM ADIM A DIM CDIM C IDU End IDU End Nycoil Conduit Nycoil Conduit ODU End ODU End A = Length of Nycoil only B = Length of cables outside Nycoil on IDU end C = Length of cables outside Nycoil on RFU (RFU) end 6.9 Cabling Requirements CAUTION CAUTION To avoid potential problems, existing wiring harnesses must be carefully examined for evidence of damage, corrosion, or broken wire strands, and any damage detected must be repaired before a new MTX5000 system is placed into service. Failure to provide sufficient current carrying capacity between the MTX5000 IDU and the ODU(s) may cause performance issues, including dropouts in transmission, and may cause damage to the equipment or to the installation. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-9 MRC strongly recommends using a 4-conductor, 16 AWG wire combination for DC power that supports Standard and High Power ODUs. Specifically, wiring should be in accordance with Table 6-3 for Standard ODU use and Table 6-4 on page 6-11 for High Power ODU use. MRC recommends that installations of the MTX5000 IDU and ODU be carefully considered, especially where the DC power to the ODU is concerned. All ODUs used to support digital

(COFDM) transmission require higher linearity and therefore require more input current to the power amplifiers to achieve acceptable levels of Modulation Error Ratio (MER) performance. This is especially true of the optional High Power ODUs. For new Nycoil installations where the cable length is 160 feet

(48.8 M) or less, MRC suggests two 16 AWG multi-strand conductors in parallel for both power and return. In a new installation, this is less likely an issue, however for an existing installation, other alternatives may be more appropriate. The following factory recommendation applies to existing installations. At the very least, all cabling in an existing installation must be inspected to ensure that no corrosion or broken strands are present, especially if new conductors are not used. The acceptable cable lengths for existing Standard power ODU installations, or alternatives to the recommendation, are provided in Table 6-3 as a function of mast height. The recommended lengths are end-to-end cable length vs. mast height. Table 6-3: Existing Installation Cable Lengths - Standard Power ODU Connector RF Type Minimum Wiring for Power and Return Assumed Maximum Cable Length Triax Triax Mast Height

< 58 Feet

< 58 Feet

< 58 Feet

< 58 Feet N N N

< 58 Feet TNC 160 ft.

(48.8.0 M) 160 ft.

(48.8 M) 140 ft.

(42.7 M) 160 ft.

(48.8 M) 160 ft.

(48.8 M) 4 Conductors of 16 AWG (2 Power, 2 Return) 4 Conductors of 20 AWG (2 Power, 2 Return) 7 Conductors of 20 AWG (4 Power, 3 Return) 8 Conductors of 20 AWG (4 Power, 4 Return) The acceptable cable lengths for high power ODU installations, or alternatives to the recommendation, are provided in Table 6-4 on page 6-11 as a function of mast height. The recommended lengths are end-to-end cable length vs. mast height. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-10 Table 6-4: Existing Installation Cable Lengths - High Power ODU CAUTION RF Connector Type Minimum Wiring for Power and Return Assumed Maximum Cable Length Mast Height

< 42 Feet

< 58 Feet Triax Triax N To avoid potential problems, existing wiring harnesses must be carefully examined for evidence of damage, corrosion, or broken wire strands. Any damage detected must be repaired before a new MTX5000 system is placed into service.

< 20 Feet N, TNC

< 52 Feet N

< 52 Feet TNC 104 ft.

(31.7 M) 160 ft.

(48.8 M) 60 ft.

(18.3 M) 124 ft.

(37.8 M) 124 ft.

(37.8 M) 4 Conductors of 16 AWG (2 Power, 2 Return) 4 Conductors of 20 AWG (2 Power, 2 Return) 7 Conductors of 20 AWG (4 Power, 3 Return) 8 Conductors of 20 AWG (4 Power, 4 Return) Contact MRC for assistance to determine the effective maximum cable length for any desired configuration, as required. 6.9.1 MTX5000 System Type N Connector Interface Note The MTX5000 IDU is available with either the RFU 1 or with both RFU 1 and RFU 2 rear connectors. If you have only one ODU, disregard connections and references to the second ODU (RFU 2). If your MTX5000 IDU and ODU contains the Type N connector RFU 1 and RFU 2 option, the IDU and ODU can be connected using an existing wiring harness after inspection, subject to the limits called out in Cabling Requirements on page 6-9. ODU Connections The existing connector(s) at the ODU end of the wiring harness will connect directly to your MTX5000 ODU(s). Verify that all connections have been completed, as shown in Figure 6-6 on page 6-12. IDU Connections At the IDU end of the wiring harness, verify the connections are as shown in Figure 6-6 on page 6-12. Connections for ODU 2 (RFU 2) are identical to those for ODU 1

(RFU 1). The ITT Cannon KPT06F14-12SX connector is utilized on MTX5000 IDU/ODU configurations that contain the Type N RFU 1 and RFU 2 connector option. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-11 Figure 6-6: ODU Wiring 6.9.2 MTX5000 System TNC Connector Interface Note If only two conductors each for power and return are used, contacts J, K, L, and M must be used. Contacts J, K, L, and M will accommodate up to 16 AWG single conductor wiring; all other contacts will accommodate 20 AWG single conductor wiring. CAUTION To avoid potential problems, existing wiring harnesses must be carefully examined for evidence of damage, corrosion, or broken wire strands. Any damage detected must be repaired before a new MTX5000 system is placed into service. BRN N/C N/C N/C N/C BLU YEL N/C RED VIO GRN BLK A B C D E F G H J K L M

+12V GND

+12V

+12V

+12V GND GND H J A M G B K F C E L D ITT CANNON KPT06F14-12SX RFU POWER OUT ANT CONTROL

1

2 RFU 1 RFU 2 Harness Connections for ODU 2 (RFU 2) H V LCP ANT2 BAND2 GND

Harness Connections for ODU 1 (RFU 1) If your MTX5000 IDU and ODU contain the TNC RFU 1 and RFU 2 connectors, the IDU and ODU can be connected using an existing harness, ODU End The existing power connector at the ODU end will plug in directly to your ODU. IDU End At the IDU end, the harness connector will not plug directly into your IDU. You must cut off the terminal block at the IDU end and must connect the wiring harness to the Weidmuller connector supplied with the IDU. Verify the new connections are as shown in Figure 6-7 on page 6-13. Connections for ODU 2

(RFU 2) are identical to ODU 1 (RFU 1). The actual number of wires in your harness, and their gauges, may differ from the standard harness. To provide enough current to the RFU, MRC recommends the minimum power and ground connections specified in Cabling Requirements on page 6-9 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-12 Figure 6-7: TNC Connector Option Wiring Note All contacts will accommodate 20 AWG single conductor wiring only. S T A R B C U D E V b P a N M Z L Y K c J X F W G H ITT CANNON KPT06F16-26S X W V U T S R P

+12V

+12V

+12V

+12V GND GND GND GND RFU POWER OUT ANT CONTROL

1

2 RFU 1 RFU 2 Harness Connections for ODU 2 (RFU 2) H V LCP ANT2 BAND2 GND

Harness Connections for ODU 1 (RFU 1) 6.10 Installing the Fabricated Harness Wiring mounted in a moving vehicle is subject to extremes of temperature, humidity, and vibration. MRC recommends the following good general practices:

Secure the cabling at close intervals along its entire length. Protect the cabling with additional sheathing or padding anywhere it passes through a hole or lays against an obstruction. Provide flex relief at any location where the cable must change direction sharply, to maintain a smooth bend and prevent kinking. Provide strain relief at each connector to absorb any pulling forces on the cable and prevent damage to the connector. 6.11 Installing the Outdoor Unit This section provides the steps required to mount the ODU to a QuikSet QPT-90 Pan & Tilt Assembly, using the Mounting Plate that was provided with your MRC antenna. The mounting hardware is provided with the RFU. The Mounting Plate is designed to fit the following antennas:

MRC 2A20/7A30 MRC 2A20SS/7A30SS MRC Ellipse 2000 Details on attaching these antennas to the Mounting Plate can be found in the installation manual that came with your MRC antenna. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-13 If you are installing the RFU in a different configuration, consult the installation instructions that came with your hardware. When you have installed the RFU, go to Making the Connections on page 6-15. Figure 6-8: Alignment of Mounting Plate to Pan and Tilt 6.11.1 Site Preparation Each installation will be different. In general, MRC recommends the following sequence:

Install the mast. Lower the fabricated wiring harness over the mast. Mount the Pan & Tilt to the mast. Mount the RFU(s) to the Pan & Tilt. See Mounting the ODU . Mount the antenna to the Pan & Tilt. 6.11.2 Mounting the ODU The following instructions describe mounting one ODU (RFU). To mount a second ODU, repeat the steps. 1. Attach the Mounting Plate to the Pan & Tilt Assembly.

- Align the Mounting Plate to the Pan & Tilt mount as shown in Figure 6-8.

- Attach the Mounting Plate to the Pan & Tilt mount using #10-32 screws, lock washers, and flat washers supplied. See Figure 6-9. Attach the ODU to the Mounting Plate. 2. Pan and Tilt Assembly Mounting Plate Figure 6-9: Mounting Plate Attachment to Pan and Tilt

#10 SCREW

#10 LOCKWASHER

#10 FLAT WASHER MOUNTING PLATE PAN & TILT MOUNT MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-14 Figure 6-10: Attaching ODU(s) to Mounting Plate CAUTION Screws must not penetrate into the holes on the ODU housing more than .25 in. (6.35 mm). DO NOT substitute longer screws unless your installation requires the additional length. Over-length screws can crack the housing when tightened.

#10 SCREW

#10 LOCKWASHER

#10 FLAT WASHER OUTDOOR UNIT OUTDOOR UNIT MOUNTING PLATE PAN & TILT MOUNT CAUTION To ensure proper cooling of the ODU, the unit must always be mounted so that the cooling fins are vertical and are not blocked from free air flow. 3. 4. Align the holes in the ODU with the 3 elongated holes at one end of the Mounting Plate. Attach the ODU to the mounting plate using the

#10-32 screws, lock washers, and flat washers supplied. See Figure 6-10. 6.12 Making the Connections Now that the IDU and ODU(s) are in place and the harness is installed, make the connections at each end of the harness. While every installation is different, here are some general guidelines:

When youre done making all connections, re-check all connections before powering up the MTX5000. If you need to install the Triax connector(s) onto the cable, refer to Appendix A, Installing Triax Connectors on page A-1. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-15 6.12.1 Mast Top Connections For connections at the top of the mast, refer to Figure 6-11 on page 6-17 which shows a typical installation with a parabolic antenna and an RF switch. Refer to Figure 6-12 on page 6-18 which shows a typical installation with a Parabolic antenna without an RF switch. Additional resources are as follows:

For details on connections at the ODU, refer to Figure 6-

11 on page 6-17 and Figure 6-12 on page 6-18. For details on connections to the antenna(s) refer to the Installation Guide that came with the antenna. If you are using an MRC RF Switch, refer to the Installation Guide that came with the Switch. 6.12.2 IDU Connections Refer to Figure 6-13 on page 6-19 and Table 6-5 on page 6-20 for connections to the IDU. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-16 Figure 6-11: Typical Installation with RF Switch and Triax Output of ODU to Input of RF Switch Power and Polarization Control to Parabolic Power and Control to RF Switch Pan & Tilt Control Parabolic Antenna Omnidirectional Antenna Output of RF Switch to Omni Output of RF Switch to Parabolic IF Feed from IDU to ODU Nycoil Conduit MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-17 Figure 6-12: Typical Installation with Parabolic and Triax Parabolic Antenna Power and Polarization Control to Parabolic Pan & Tilt Control IF Feed from IDU to ODU Nycoil Conduit MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-18 Figure 6-13: IDU Rear Panel Connections AUDIO 3 and 4

(Not Currently Active) ASI 1 (Not Currently Active) ETHERNET WAYSIDE AUDIO 1 and 2 BB IN IF MON HD-SDI ASI 2 (Not Currently Active) AUDIO 1 2 WAYSIDE 3 4 BB IN IF MON ASI 1 HD-SDI ASI 2 RFU POWER OUT POWER IN ETHERNET RTN DATA

+ G - + G -

+ G - + G -

ATPC SUM AES/EBU 2 1 VIDEO IN AC-3 IF IN VID MON SDI/ASI ANT CONTROL

1

2 RFU 1 RFU 2 H V LCP ANT2 BAND2 GND

RTN DATA

(Not Currently Active) ATPC (Not Currently Active) SUM ALARM (Not Currently Active) ALARM

+ G - + G -

SMPTE 302 AES/EBU 1 and 2 VIDEO IN AC-3 SMPTE 302

(Not Currently Active) IF IN VID MON SDI/

ASI ANT CONTROL RFU 1 (Triax Option) RFU 2 (Triax Option) AC Power Fuse

(Behind Cover) POWER IN RFU POWER OUT (With Type N or TNC RFU 1 and RFU 2 Connector Options Only) RFU 1 (Type N or TNC Options) RFU POWER OUT ANT CONTROL

1

2 RFU 1 RFU 2 H V LCP ANT2 BAND2 GND

RFU 2 (Type N or TNC Options) MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-19 Table 6-5: IDU Rear Panel Connections Connector Type ETHERNET RJ-45 connector WAYSIDE 9-Pin male D-connector AUDIO 1 thru AUDIO 4 AUDIO 1 - 3 pin Weidmuller AUDIO 2 - 3 pin Weidmuller AUDIO 3 - 3 pin Weidmuller AUDIO 4 - 3 pin Weidmuller 75 ohm BNC female connector BB IN IF MON ASI 1 HD-SDI 75 ohm BNC female connector 75 ohm BNC female connector 75 ohm BNC female connector Function Comments Provides connection via your web browser to a PC at a remote location for remote control of the MTX5000 IDU. See Remote Control Operations on page 6-26 The WAYSIDE connector provides Wayside data output from the MPEG module. The AUDIO 1 thru AUDIO 4 male 3-pin Weidmuller connectors provide analog/

digital switchable stereo audio signal inputs to the FMT or MPEG modules.

(AUDIO 3 and 4 are currently inactive.) The BB IN connector provides baseband input video from an external baseband source. The IF MON connector provides a 70 MHz IF output for external signal monitoring purposes.

(Currently inactive.) The HD-SDI connector provides the HD/

SDI data stream input to the IDU. Also provides connection to the optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC for mobile operation remote control. See Remote Control Operations on page 6-26. See Wayside Data Connections on page 6-24 for pinouts. See Analog Audio Inputs on page 6-25 for pinouts. Composite analog signal - video +

audio subcarriers 70 MHz IF output

(Currently inactive.) The MTX5000 meets SMPTE 292M specifications for HD-SDI. The user is responsible for using cables that meet SMPTE 292M specifications.

(Currently inactive) ASI 2 75 ohm BNC female connector

(Currently inactive.) MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-20 Table 6-5: IDU Rear Panel Connections (Continued) Connector RFU POWER OUT Type Function Comments 8-pin Weidmuller male connector The RFU POWER OUT connector provides DC power to the ODU(s). RTN DATA ATPC SUM ALM AES/EBU RJ-45 connector 9-pin male D-connector 2-pin Weidmuller male connector Two 3-pin male Weidmuller connectors VIDEO IN 75 ohm BNC female connector AC-3 SMPTE 302 IF IN 75 ohm BNC female connector 75 ohm BNC female connector VID MON 75 ohm BNC female connector SDI 75 ohm BNC female connector

(Currently inactive.)

(Currently inactive.)

(Currently inactive.) The two AES/EBU 3-pin Weidmuller connectors provide external AES/EBU digital audio inputs to the unit. Input for analog video. Signal is connected to both the analog video modulator module and to the MPEG/

COFDM module.

(Currently inactive.) The IF IN connector provides a 70 MHz IF input to the unit. Analog video output to monitor the analog color bar generator. Does not contain program video. Used for setting characters generated by color bar generator. The SDI connector provides SDI inputs to the unit. The RFU POWER OUT connector is present only if the RFU 1 and RFU 2 connectors are type N or TNC connectors. See ODU Power on page 6-26 for pinouts.

(Currently inactive.)

(Currently inactive.)

(Currently inactive.) See Digital Audio Inputs on page 6-25 for pinouts. Input level = 1Vpp Input impedance = 75 ohms

(Currently inactive.) Input level = 0 to -10dBm Input impedance = 75 ohms

(70 MHz IF with analog or digital modulation) Output is only available if analog color bar generator is installed. The MTX5000 meets SMPTE 259M specifications for SDI. The user is responsible for using cables that meet SMPTE 259M specifications. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-21 Table 6-5: IDU Rear Panel Connections (Continued) Connector ANT CONTROL Type 7-pin Weidmuller connector Function Comments The ANT CONTROL connector provides control for antenna polarization, antenna band selection, the RF switch, and also provides DC power for the antenna and the RF switch. A 7-pin Weidmuller female connector is provided for new system applications. For retrofit applications, the existing 5-pin and 2-pin Weidmuller female connectors may be retained. See Table 6-6 on page 6-22 for pinouts. Connector type depends on which connector ordered. RFU 2 connector present only if 2 band option ordered. 110 - 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz RFU 1 and RFU 2 Triax N or TNC (optional) IF + DC Power + Control to RFU IF + Control to RFU (optional) POWER IN Grounding Lug Table 6-6: Antenna Control - Feed and Relay Connections AC - IEC 3 prong recessed male

#8-32 threaded post Supplies power to the MTX5000 system. Connection to chassis ground Pin (New Applications) Pin (Retrofit Applications) Function Description Comments 1 2 3 1 2 3 Antenna Control H V LCP Selects horizontal polarization. Selects vertical polarization. Selects left circular polarization. Connect pins 1, 2, or 3 to GND (pin 6 or 1 in Feed/Relay Power below) to select desired polarization. If all are left ungrounded, antenna defaults to right circular (RC) polarization. Selecting Ant. Pol. option button options on color LCD display panel causes each pin, in turn, to be grounded or all to be ungrounded. When ungrounded, should have +24 volts DC returning from antenna. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-22 Table 6-6: Antenna Control - Feed and Relay Connections (Continued) Pin (New Applications) Pin (Retrofit Applications) Function Description Comments 4 5 6 7 4 5 1 2 ANT 2 Selects second antenna using RF switch. BAND 2 Selects second band on dual band systems. Feed/Relay Power GND

Ground Supplies +24 VDC to antenna and RF switch. Connect GND from RF switch here. Selecting Antenna option button options on color LCD display panel to select Direct grounds this pin and causes RF switch to select the directional antenna. Selecting the Omni option ungrounds this pin and switches back to the omnidirectional antenna. When ungrounded, should have +24 volts DC returning from RF switch. Selecting RF Band option button options on color LCD display panel grounds this pin and causes band switch inside ODU to operate. Selecting the alternate band from the RF Band option button options ungrounds this pin and switches back to Band 1. When ungrounded, should have +24 volts DC returning from antenna. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-23 6.13 Wayside Data Connections 6.13.1 Wayside Connections The Wayside channel is a simplex data channel transmitting data from the MTX5000 system to a receiver system. For pinouts, see Table 6-7. Table 6-7: WAYSIDE Data Connections Connector Information 9-Pin, Male, D Connector. Pin Signal Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 UART_TX UART_RX Return NC NC NC NC NC NC 6.13.2 Compatibility MRC has verified that the Wayside channel is compatible with the following receivers:

STRATA Receiver Unit (RXU) with MPEG decoding STRATA Receiver Control Unit (RCU) with MPEG decoding. Tandberg Alteia IRD (Integrated Receiver Decoder) 6.14 Audio Connections 6.14.1 Audio Inputs The MTX5000 IDU provides inputs for both analog or digital audio, depending on how the MTX5000 is configured. The IDU configurations all use 3-pin Weidmuller connectors. The analog AUDIO 1 thru AUDIO 4 and digital AES/EBU connectors are mounted on the rear panel of the IDU. (The AUDIO 3 and 4 and AES/EBU connectors are currently inactive.) The MTX5000 provides options for separate audio and video outputs, as well as analog composite and embedded digital formats. Analog audio inputs are factory-configured for each customers requirements. Each MTX5000 is shipped with pre-installed factory Presets, as specified and ordered by the customer. Hardware - Internal cabling connections from the MTX5000 AUDIO connectors to the FMR and/or MPEG/

COFDM modules are factory-configured for each MTX5000 ordered. The MTX5000 provides a maximum of four analog audio circuits. Each audio circuit is a 3-wire balanced circuit capable of carrying one tone or voice signal. An audio circuit can carry one analog balanced channel or two digital AES/EBU channels. Analog - Four monaural or two stereo channels carried on two AUDIO connectors (AUDIO 3 and 4 connectors are currently inactive.) Digital AES/EBU - Two digital channels carried on each AES/EBU connector. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-24 6.14.2 Analog Audio Inputs The pinouts of the AUDIO 1 thru 4 analog connectors are shown in Figure 6-14 and in Table 6-8. Figure 6-14: AUDIO 1 thru 4 Connectors AUDIO 1 2 3 4

+ G - + G -

+ G -

+ G -

Table 6-8: AUDIO 1 thru AUDIO 4 Connections Pin Function Comments

G

G

G

AUDIO 1 Audio (+) GND Audio (-) AUDIO 2 Audio (+) GND Audio (-) AUDIO 3 (Currently inactive) Audio (+) GND Audio (-) AUDIO 4 (Currently inactive) Input impedance = 600 ohms Input impedance = 600 ohms Input impedance = 600 ohms Table 6-8: AUDIO 1 thru AUDIO 4 Connections (Continued) Pin

G

Function Comments Audio (+) GND Audio (-) Input impedance = 600 ohms 6.14.3 Digital Audio Inputs The pinouts of the AES/EBU channel 1 and 2 digital connectors are shown in Figure 6-15 and in Table 6-9. Figure 6-15: AES/EBU 1 and 2 Connectors A E S /E B U 2 1

+ G -

+ G -

Table 6-9: AUDIO 1 thru AUDIO 4 Connections Pin Function Comments AES/EBU 1 Audio (+) GND Audio (-) AES/EBU 2 Audio (+) GND Audio (-)

G

G

Input impedance = 600 ohms Input impedance = 600 ohms MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-25 6.16 Remote Control Operations The MTX5000 system may be controlled remotely using either the optional Windows-based Remote Access Subnotebook PC or a Windows-based laptop PC. The optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC is a rugged, low cost, remote control option. Using either laptop eliminates the need for a separate panel-

mounted remote control panel to control the MTX5000 system. An RJ-45 crossover cable is required for connection to either PC for mobile remote control operations. See Figure 6-17 on page 6-27. The RJ-45 crossover cable is connected between the MTX5000 IDU rear panel ETHERNET connector and the RJ-

45 connector on the optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC or Windows-based laptop PC. An RJ-45 crossover cable is provided with each optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC. If you use a Windows-based PC in lieu of the optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC, the RJ-45 crossover cable may be obtained from MRC or from local electronics stores. 6.15 ODU Power DC power is supplied to the ODU(s) from the IDU RFU POWER OUT 8-pin Weidmuller male connector. This connector is present only on MTX5000 systems with the optional RFU 1 and RFU 2 type N or TNC connectors. RFU POWER OUT connector pinouts are shown in Figure 6-16 and Table 6-10. If you only have one ODU (RFU), power must be provided from the RFU 1 section of the connector. Figure 6-16: RFU POWER OUT Connector RFU POWER OUT 1

1

2 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 Table 6-10: RFU POWER OUT Connections Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Comments GND GND

+12 VDC

+12 VDC GND GND

+12 VDC

+12 VDC ODU 1 Ground ODU 1 Ground ODU 1 DC Power ODU 1 DC Power ODU 2 Ground ODU 2 Ground ODU 2 DC Power ODU 2 DC Power MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-26 Figure 6-17: Mobile Operations Remote Control - Typical RJ-45 Crossover Cable ETHERNET Connector AUDIO WAYSIDE 1 2 3 4 BB IN ETHERNET RTN DATA

+ G - + G -

+ G - + G -

ATPC SUM AES/EBU 2 1 VIDEO IN ALARM

+ G - + G -

S Optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC or Windows-Based Laptop The MTX5000 system may also be controlled using a Remote Access Subnotebook or a Windows-based laptop PC from a remote location. When controlling the MTX5000 system from a remote location, the remote PC is connected to the MTX5000 system via the Ethernet. A standard RJ-45 cable is used when connecting to the MTX5000 system via the Ethernet. A crossover cable may not be used from a remote location for connection to the Ethernet. 6.17 Powering Up When the wiring and installations are completed, it is time to power up the MTX5000 system. As good practice, you should make a final check of all wiring and hardware installations before power is applied. 6.17.1 Checks Before Power-Up CAUTION Be sure the power being supplied matches the power required by the equipment. Here are your final pre-power-up checks:

Double check to verify all wiring harnesses and cables are connected to the correct connectors. Make sure all connections are fully mated, properly mated, and are secured. Verify an ODU is properly connected to the IDU. Verify all assemblies are properly installed and all mounting hardware is properly tightened. 6.17.2 Initial Power-Up CAUTION If power is accidentally lost or if the power switch is pressed to off, do not immediately power up the MTX5000 again. Internal software corruption may occur if power is applied immediately after a power loss or if the power switch is pressed to off and immediately back to on. To avoid possible software corruption, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before applying power or before pressing the power switch to on. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-27 The procedure required to apply power to the MTX5000 system is contained in the following steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Note Verify the power cable is properly connected to the MTX5000 IDU rear panel POWER IN AC power connector. Verify all coaxial cables and cable connectors are properly connected to the rear panel connectors and verify the ODU is properly connected. Verify the MTX5000 power cable is connected to AC power of the correct type and voltage. Verify the AC power source is turned on. Raise the power switch protective switch cover, press the power switch, observe the symbol on the switch illuminates green, and close the protective switch cover. When power is applied to the MTX5000, it will automatically enter the local normal user mode of operation. The MTX5000 will return to the last settings that were in use when the unit was powered down, but the MTX5000 will not resume transmitting if the unit was transmitting when it was powered down. If the MTX5000 was in the remote mode when power was removed, the IDU will not return to the remote mode. 6. The normal power-up sequence is as follows:

- After a short delay (approximately 30 seconds), the introduction screen will be displayed on the color LCD display panel. See Figure 6-18.

- After another short delay (approximately 30 seconds), the Main screen will be displayed on the color LCD display panel. See Figure 6-19. Figure 6-18: Introduction Screen Figure 6-19: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 7.

If everything appears to be normal, test the performance of your MTX5000 by setting up a link and transmitting video and audio. If you have any problems, refer to the Troubleshooting Chapter on page 4-1. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-28 6.18 Product Modifications The product you purchased has been carefully designed and tested, and is warranted to meet specifications when connected and operated as described in this manual. Note If you modify a product without authorization from MRC, you will void the warranty. For a complete Warranty statement, refer to the Notices section at the front of this manual. 6.17.3 Power Down CAUTION To allow proper shutdown of MTX5000 internal software, the Main screen must always be displayed when the power switch is pressed to off. Failure to properly power down the MTX5000 with the Main screen displayed may corrupt the internal software. 1. Verify the Main screen is displayed on the color LCD display panel. See Figure 6-20. Figure 6-20: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU2 7US RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 V PA On

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF H ODU IDU SUM L/R L 2. 3. Raise the power switch protective switch cover, press the power switch, observe the symbol on the switch goes off, and close the protective switch cover. Set the power source off, as required. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-29 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installation 6-30 7 Replacement Parts and Supported Repairs AC Power Fuses 7.3 The MTX5000 Indoor Unit (IDU) operates on the following AC power:

Chapter Overview 7.1 This chapter identifies replacement parts and supported repairs applicable to the MTX5000 Transmitter System (MTX5000). Since there are no supported field repairs on the MTX5000, the only parts available are external cables and power fuses. 7.2 The external cables and test cables for the MTX5000 are listed in Table 7-1. If you need something that is not listed, ask your Sales Representative or consult the factory. External Cables and Adapters Table 7-1: MTX5000 System Cables Description AC Power Cable (120/240 VAC) Triax Cable Kit Color Bar Generator Test Cable USB-A to USB-B Adapter Comments Connects AC power to the MTX5000 IDU. Connects MTX5000 IDU to the ODU.

(IDU Triax RFU 1 and RFU 2 connector option only.) Connects optional Analog Color Bar Generator Connects USB memory stick to MTX5000 IDU front panel USB-B connector 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Fuse ratings for the AC power sources are listed in Table 7-2. Table 7-2:

Operating Voltage Fuse Rating 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 3.0A SB 250V 3AG or 5 x 20 mm 1.5A SB 250V 3AG or 5 x 20 mm Supported Repairs 7.4 There are NO supported field repairs to the MTX5000 IDU or the ODU. Return the unit(s) for factory repair. If you attempt field repair, you risk damaging your equipment. If your equipment is under warranty, you may also affect your warranty coverage. The MTX5000 is designed to be compact, rugged and reliable. The MTX5000 Indoor Unit (IDU) and the Outdoor Unit (ODU) require specialized test equipment and software to calibrate amplitude and frequency characteristics after repair. In addition, sealing the ODU enclosure after repair requires exacting techniques and special fixtures to ensure weather resistance of the unit. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Replacement Parts and Supported Repairs 7-1 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Replacement Parts and Supported Repairs 7-2 8 Theory of Operation Chapter Overview 8.1 This chapter provides additional details about the design and function of the MTX5000 Transmitter System (MTX5000). This chapter is intended to complement information contained in the Product Description Chapter on page 2-1. The descriptions in this chapter assume you are already familiar with the information contained in Chapter 2. We recommend you review that chapter before beginning to read this one. Here are the topics covered:

Topic System Architecture General Architecture MPEG Encoding and COFDM Transmission Analog Video Encoding and FM Modulation MTX5000 User Interface ODU RF Output MTX5000 Internal Software Outdoor Unit Details Page 8-1 8-1 8-1 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-3 8-3 8-5 System Architecture General 8.2 8.2.1 The MTX5000 is a van-mounted, High Definition (HD) ready, video transmission system capable of both analog and digital operation in different formats. The MTX5000 system provides a sophisticated user interface with an intuitive keypad scheme, touch screen, and an adjustable color LCD display. The MTX5000 system consists of the MTX5000 Indoor Unit (IDU) and the mast-mounted Outdoor Unit(s) (ODU). A fully equipped MTX5000 package is HD ready and provides a robust HD link from field to studio. Several digital video input formats are accepted, as well as analog composite for Digital Video Broadcasting - Terrestrial (DVB-T) and analog FM transmission. In addition, the MTX5000 can accept several digital audio input formats and up to four analog audio inputs for analog or digital transmission. The MTX5000 has several mast-mounted ODU configurations available. These ODUs contain integrated RF up conversion circuitry and high power RF amplifiers for maximum power and signal quality. With the demands of digital modulation, the ODUs have been optimized for improved Modulation Error Ratio/Error Vector Magnitude (MER/EVM) performance with digital transmissions. Architecture 8.2.2 The MTX5000 system consists of the IDU and the ODU(s). The IDU is responsible for video encoding, modulation, system control, and power distribution. The ODU contains RF up conversion circuitry and a power amplifier. The ODU is mounted at the top of the van mast and is responsible for all aspects of the RF transmission. Modulated signals are passed from the IDU to the ODU using a 70MHz IF signal. In addition, the IDU and ODU communicate through a bidirectional Frequency-Shift Keying (FSK) modem. This FSK link allows the IDU to control, calibrate, and monitor the state of the mast-mounted ODU. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Theory of Operation 8-1 A digital attenuator in the ODU RF chain allows you to transmit at high or low power or to increment the power in single dB steps for advanced fine tuning. Inside the IDU, a control processor is responsible for configuring the various sub-systems within the radio. The main processor stores radio information in selectable presets that can be recalled by the user. The MTX5000 employs an advanced MPEG video encoder and digital modulator. The MTX5000 includes the FMT modulator, COFDM modulator and MPEG encoder, DC power supply, and signal control and distribution boards, depending upon the options contained in your MTX5000. A typical functional block diagram of the MTX5000 is shown in Figure 8-1 on page 8-4. 8.2.3 MPEG Encoding and COFDM Transmission The MTX5000 is capable of encoding both Standard Definition and High Definition video (depending on license). Available inputs include SD Serialized Digital Interface video (SD-SDI), HD-SDI, and Composite Video (CV). Audio input formats include analog, AES/EBU, and AC-3 SMPTE-302. The encoder is also capable of encoding an RS-232 signal as Wayside data. The MTX5000 is capable of generating a fully DVB-T compliant output signal. This provides a robust digital link in any hostile transmission environment. Analog Video Encoding and FM Modulation 8.2.4 When in the analog FM mode, the MTX5000 will accept a standard composite video input. It will also accept up to four analog audio inputs. The FM analog signal is useful when working with older legacy equipment or when an analog transmission is desired. 8.2.5 MTX5000 User Interface Local Mode Operation The MTX5000 IDU front panel provides monitoring and control of the MTX5000 system. The color LCD display panel with touch screen and the function keys are used to select control and diagnostic menu screens for both the IDU and the ODU. The user interacts with the system through the touch-screen or function keys. The user interface is broken into a normal user mode and a system setup or advanced features mode. Normal user mode menus permit basic radio control without exposing you to the more complicated setup features available in the advanced features sections. The advanced features can be password protected to prevent an unwitting user from changing critical settings. Option buttons displayed on the IDU color LCD display panel are used to control Preset selection, RF band selection, channel selection, offset selection, antenna selection, antenna polarization, transmitter operation (on or off), power (low or high), and to monitor the status of the IDU and ODU. For additional information, see the Routine Operation Chapter on page 3-1. The front panel color LCD display panel is also used to select local or remote control operation of the MTX5000 system. Remote Mode Operation The MTX5000 system may also be operated from a remote location via the ETHERNET connector mounted on the rear panel of the IDU. The IDU can be connected to a PC at a remote location via your web browser. The remote mode allows you to control the MTX5000 in the normal user mode from the remote location using the PC display, mouse, and keyboard. You cannot perform system setup advanced features from the remote location. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Theory of Operation 8-2 Control of the local/remote mode of operation can only be controlled from the IDU. You cannot change the local/remote operating mode from the remote location. For more information on remote operation, see Using the MTX5000 in Remote Mode on page 3-60. ODU RF Output 8.2.6 The MTX5000 communicates with the ODU to set operating frequencies and power levels. A 70 MHz IF signal is up-

converted to the RF band of operation. Before up conversion, a digital attenuator adjusts the signal output power based on calibration data and user input. 8.2.7 MTX5000 Internal Software The MTX5000 internal software package consists of an embedded controller software package. For additional information on user interface through use of the front panel color LCD display screen with touch screen and function keys, see the Routine Operation Chapter on page 3-1. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Theory of Operation 8-3 Figure 8-1: MTX5000 Functional Block Diagram - Typical User Inputs ETHERNET EXT IF WAYSIDE AES/EBU AC-3 SMPTE 302 AUDIO 1 - 4 SDI/ASI HD-SDI VIDEO IN BB IN POWER IN Keypad/LCD Display External IF Input Wayside Data Analog Audio

(4 Channels) SDI Input HD SDI Input Composite Video Baseband Input SYSTEM CONTROL Switch Control ODU Control MPEG Control FMT Control IF SWITCH 70 MHz IF 70 MHz IF 70 MHz IF 70 MHz IF MPEG ENCODER AND COFDM MODULATOR ANT CONTROL RFU 1 RFU 2 OUTDOOR UNIT (ODU) IF MON 70 MHz IF FMT Composite Video VID MON 110/220 VAC, 50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY DC Power Distribution OPTIONAL ANALOG COLOR BAR GENERATOR MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Theory of Operation 8-4 Outdoor Unit Details 8.3 The MTX5000 ODU processes the IF signal from the MTX5000 IDU and generates the higher power microwave signal that is fed to the antenna. The ODU contains the following components:

An IF interface module, containing a 2 FSK modem. The modem communicates with the IDU modem to send and receive alarms and operating data. A power supply, which converts the 12 VDC from the IDU into +15 VDC, -15 VDC, and +5 VDC for use by the other RFU modules. A UHF up-convertor, which converts the 70 MHz IF signal to 900 MHz. A 3 GHz local oscillator, whose frequency is set by a control voltage from the interface module (a Voltage-

Controlled Oscillator, or VCO). A microwave mixer/up-convertor that mixes the 3 GHz with the the 900 MHz signal, to produce the frequency desired. For the 7 GHz and 13 GHz bands, this also includes a frequency doubler or tripler. A bandpass filter to eliminate unwanted frequency components. A Power Amplifier (PA) that amplifies the resulting signal to the power level desired. A functional block diagram of the ODU is shown in Figure 8-2. Figure 8-2: ODU Block Diagram 70 MHz IF +

DC POWER +

CONTROL INTERFACE BOARD UHF UPCONVERTER MICROWAVE UPCONVERTER FILTER POWER AMP FSK MODEM MICRO PROCESSOR POWER SUPPLY 3 GHz VCO RF OUTPUT TO ANTENNA MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Theory of Operation 8-5 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Theory of Operation 8-6 Installing Triax Connectors A A.1 Appendix Overview Installing Triax connectors on a Triax cable is an exacting job. If not performed correctly, it can lead to intermittent or permanent failures due to vibration, moisture, etc. As a service to our customers, MRC is providing a copy of our Triax Cable Assembly Instructions. We have found this procedure to work well and the results to be reliable. A.2 For any outdoor application, such as mast top connections, we recommend you seal all connections with self-fusing butyl rubber or silicone tape. Ordinary plastic electrical tape and cloth friction tape are not recommended. A good general practice is as follows:

Sealing Connect and tighten the connector Begin wrapping the tape tightly against the enclosure, and wrap in a spiral back toward the cable Overlap each turn with the next turn by about half its width Continue wrapping and overlapping until the tape extends at least 2 inches beyond the connector. Self-fusing tape can be purchased from industrial supply companies such as Grainger (www.grainger.com) and McMaster-Carr (www.mcmaster.com). Self-fusing tape is also available at larger hardware stores such as DoitBest.com

(www.doitbest.com). MICROWAVE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installing Triax Connectors A-1 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installing Triax Connectors A-2 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installing Triax Connectors A-3 This page intentionally left blank. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Installing Triax Connectors A-4 B Analog Color Bar Generator Appendix Overview B.1 This appendix describes how to set up the optional Analog Color Bar Generator (CBG). The optional CBG is available in either NTSC or PAL versions. The topics covered in this chapter are listed below. Topic Description Functions Operating Modes Configuration Technical Background Configuration General Entering Characters Preliminary Setup Procedure Configure Text Line A Configure Text Line B Configure Control Line Check the Configuration Configuration Reference Button Functions Full Character Set Character Subsets Delay Values Page B-1 B-1 B-1 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-4 B-4 B-8 B-9 B-9 B-13 B-16 B-16 B-17 B-18 B-18 Description Functions B.2 B.2.1 The CBG provides the following functions:

Inserts a color bar pattern conforming to SMPTE Engineering Guideline EG 1-1990 for SMPTE Color Bars Inserts test tones of 440 Hz and 1 kHz Lets you create and edit two lines of text that can be added to the color bar display, at locations you select Allows you to control when the color bars and tones are added to the transmitted signal and when to automatically place the MTX5000 IDU into the standby mode. B.2.2 Operating Modes The CBG has four operating modes that are selected using the MTX5000 IDU color LCD display panel touch screen and/or function keys. The four operating modes are displayed on the color LCD display panel Color Bars screen and are identified as follows:

Off - Color bars and audio test tones are turned off. On - Color bars and/or audio test tones are continuously on. A Gen (Auto Generated) - If a loss of video signal occurs, color bars and/or audio test tones are transmitted after a programmable delay. A Stby (Auto Standby) - If a loss of video signal occurs, the transmitter is automatically placed into standby (PA turned off). MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-1 Configuration B.2.3 Each of the four operating modes can be configured to meet your needs. Configuration is accomplished using four push button switches mounted on the CBG board. Configuration is normally performed only when the MTX5000 IDU is first installed, or if the CBG has been replaced by the factory. Configuring the CBG will include specifying the following:

If the CBG will generate audio tones, video color bars, or both What text will be displayed on screen whenever the color bars are displayed. There are two lines of text: Text Line A and Text Line B. Each line contains 16 character fields. Each character field can display any character in the full character set. Where each text line is displayed on the screen Which characters in a text line are visible on the default screen and which are hidden The foreground and background colors of the text lines The length of time (delay) the CBG will wait after loss of video signal before it begins generating tones and/or bars. Configuration of the CBG consists of selecting the characters for each of the two lines of text and for a seven-character control line. Technical Background B.2.4 The CBG includes circuits that provide both a video signal, and audio test tones of 1 kHz and 400 Hz on separate audio channels (1 kHz on Audio 1, 440 Hz on Audio 2). Text lines and parameters are stored in memory and are controlled by a microprocessor. A video detection circuit notifies Configuration the processor whenever a valid external video signal is present. Non-volatile memory preserves parameters and transmitter ID information. Once set, no battery or other power is required to save these parameters. B.3 B.3.1 General Configuration of the CBG involves using the MTX5000 IDU color LCD display panel touch screen or function keys, four control switches on the CBG board (See Figure B-1 on page B-3), and an external monitor to enter text for the text lines and the numerical parameters for the control line. The MTX5000 IDU must be removed from its mounting rack (if installed). The top cover panel must then be removed to allow connection between the external monitor and the CBG and to allow access to the four control switches. Steps are provided in the following procedures to set all parameters in the CBG. To avoid potential operator problems that could impact operation of the MTX5000 System, the IDU color LCD display panel Color Bars screen Off option must be selected when procedures contained in this Appendix are completed. When performance of these procedures is complete, perform Select Color Bar Generator Mode on page 3-52 to select the CGB operating mode required for Analog Preset operations. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-2 Figure B-1: MTX5000 IDU Analog Color Bar Generator Top View - Cover Panel Removed MTX5000 IDU -

Front Panel Video Monitor Connector J4 Analog Color Bar Generator 2 J 3 J 4 J 4 W S 3 W S 1 W S 2 W S Control Switches MTX5000 IDU -

Rear Panel MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-3 Entering Characters B.3.2 Entering characters utilizes the four CBG control switches in a similar way to the four arrow keys on a standard computer keyboard. See Figure B-2. In order to maximize your control using only four switches, each switch has multiple functions depending on whether the CBG is in character mode or subset mode. Figure B-2: Button Functions UP LEFT 2 3 1 DOWN 4 RIGHT Character Mode In the character mode, scrolling up or down with switches 1 and 3 will change the highlighted character one character up or down in the full character set. See Table B-3 on page B-17. Subset Mode To make editing the text lines faster, the full character set is divided into subsets. You can jump from one subset to the next instead of scrolling through the full character set one character at a time. In subset mode, scrolling up or down with switches 1 and 3 will change the highlighted character one subset up or down within the list of subsets. See Table B-4 on page B-18. Hiding Characters If you wish to hide any characters in the default display, press switches 1 and 3 simultaneously while the CBG is in subset mode. That character will show in inverse video and will be hidden from the default display. That character can still be viewed and changed in the editing mode. A black background is a hidden character; a white background is a character that is not hidden. Preliminary Setup Procedure B.3.3 The procedure required to set up the optional Analog Color Bar Generator is contained in the following steps. This procedure must be performed prior to performing any or all of the following procedures. Configure Text Line A on page B-8 Configure Text Line B on page B-9 Configure Control Line on page B-10 Check the Configuration on page B-13 WARNING There are electrical conditions of voltage and current in this equipment which can cause death or injury. Use extreme care when performing this procedure. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-4 WARNING WARNING WARNING Remove all jewelry before beginning work on the equipment. Jewelry can conduct electrical current. Accidental contact can result in electrocution or severe burns. Rotating equipment (cooling fans) is used in the operation of this equipment. When performing this procedure, know the location of the rotating equipment. Remove all jewelry before beginning work on the equipment. Jewelry can be caught in rotating equipment or on protruding parts, resulting in injury. CAUTION Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) The MTX5000 IDU and the CBG contain components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Observe static precautions when configuring the CBG. Perform all work on a static free work surface. Use a conductive mat that is properly grounded or ensure the MTX5000 IDU is electrically connected to earth ground. Use a grounded wrist strap, and ensure the strap makes good skin contact. The wrist strap must be electrically grounded to the bench or MTX5000 IDU chassis at all times. 1. If you have not already done so, perform the following:

- Power down the MTX5000 System. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7.

- Disconnect all cables and remove the MTX5000 IDU 2. 3. from its rack (if already mounted). Remove 8 screws from the top of the unit, remove 2 screws at the rear of the unit, and remove the MTX5000 IDU cover panel. Position the MTX5000 IDU with its front panel to your left. This will orient the four control switches, as shown in Figure B-3 on page B-6. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-5 Figure B-3: Control Switch Locations 2 W S 4 W S 4 3 W S 2 1 W S 3 1 4. 5. 6. Connect an AC power cable to the MTX5000 IDU rear panel AC POWER IN connector. Connect the MTX5000 IDU power cable to AC power of the correct type and voltage. Verify the power source is turned on. CAUTION Exercise care to avoid damage to exposed circuitry in the MTX5000 IDU. When connecting test cables in the following steps, do not allow the test cable BNC connector and the BNC connector on the cable connected to the external monitor to come in contact with any circuit boards contained in the MTX5000 IDU. 10. Raise the MTX5000 IDU power switch protective cover, press the power switch, observe the symbol on the power switch illuminates green, and close the protective cover. Notes When power is applied to the MTX5000 IDU, it will automatically enter the local mode of operation. The MTX5000 will return to the last settings that were in use when the unit was powered down, but the unit will not resume transmitting if the unit was transmitting when it was powered down. 11. The normal power-up sequence is as follows:

- After a short delay, the introduction screen will be displayed on the color LCD display panel. See Figure B-4. A progress bar will also be displayed indicating power up progress.

- When the power up sequence is complete, the Main screen will be displayed on the color LCD display panel. See Figure B-5 on page B-7. Figure B-4: Introduction Screen 7. 8. 9. Connect the CBG test cable supplied with your MTX5000 IDU to the CBG video monitor connector J4. See Figure B-1 on page B-3. Connect a BNC cable between an external monitor and the CGB test cable BNC connector. Verify the external monitor is powered up. Progress Bar (Typical) MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-6 Figure B-5: Main Screen - Typical Figure B-6: Main Screen - Typical Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L CAUTION Always wait a minimum of 5 seconds after the Main screen is displayed following power up before selecting a Preset. Note In order to set up the analog CBG, an analog Preset must be selected in the following step. Any analog Preset may be selected. 12. Select any analog Preset per Select Preset on page 3-24. Note When performing steps at the MTX5000 IDU in the following steps, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 13. Observe the Main screen is displayed. See Figure B-

6. 14. Select the Setup option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure B-7. Figure B-7: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main 15. Select the Radio option button and observe the Radio screen is displayed. See Figure B-8 on page B-8. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-7

- The Color Bar Generator default screen shown in Figure B-10 will be displayed when the Color Bar Generator is active (On). Figure B-10: Color Bar Generator Default Screen Text Line A

(16 Characters Maximum) Text Line B

(16 Characters Maximum) MRC - BOSTON REMOTE 1 Configure Text Line A B.3.4 The procedure required to configure Text Line A of the color bar generator display is contained in the following steps. 1. 2. Verify the Preliminary Setup Procedure on page B-4 has been performed. Verify the Color Bar Generator default screen is displayed. See Figure B-11 on page B-9. Figure B-8: Radio Screen Radio Network Config Level Adjust Color Bars Calibration License Key Change Pwd Time & Date Diagnostics System Info Back Main Next 16. Select the Color Bars option button and observe the Color Bars screen is displayed. See Figure B-9. Figure B-9: Color Bars Screen Color Bars Off On A Gen A Stby Back Main 17. Select the On option button and observe the external monitor display.

- The video display should now have color bars similar to Figure B-10. The text lines will contain different characters than those shown, and may be in different positions on the screen. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-8 Figure B-11: Color Bar Generator Default Screen Text Line A

(16 Characters Maximum) Text Line B

(16 Characters Maximum) MRC - BOSTON REMOTE 1 3. Press control switches 2 and 3 simultaneously for approximately 5 seconds.

- The video display should now look like Figure B-12.

- The cursor will be positioned at the first character field of Text Line A. The first character field will be highlighted in inverse video.

- Note that the second line (TEXT LINE B) is for editing reference only and cannot be changed. Figure B-12: Text Line A Display Text Line A

(16 Characters Maximum) Inverse Video Highlight Not Editable WRC - BOSTON M TEXT LINE B 4. 5. The Color Bar Generator will now be in the Subset Mode. To use the Character Mode, go to step 6. To move up or down in the list of subsets, press control switches 1 or 3 until the you reach the desired subset. See Table B-4 on page B-18. Note Perform step 6 thru step 8 for each character field you wish to change. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Press control switch 4 to enter the Character Mode. Press control switches 1 or 3 to scroll up or down in the full character set until you reach the desired character. See Table B-3 on page B-17. Press control switch 4 to move to the next character field. The next character field will be highlighted in inverse video. When all of Text Line A is correct, press any 3 control switches simultaneously to save Text Line A into memory. Observe the screen flashes briefly as Text Line A is stored. This is normal. Configure Text Line B B.3.5 The procedure required to configure Text Line B of the color bar generator display is contained in the following steps. 1. 2. Verify the Preliminary Setup Procedure on page B-4 has been performed. Verify the Color Bar Generator default screen is displayed. See Figure B-13 on page B-10. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-9 Figure B-13: Color Bar Generator Default Screen Text Line A

(16 Characters Maximum) Text Line B

(16 Characters Maximum) MRC - BOSTON REMOTE 1 3. Press control switches 3 and 4 simultaneously for approximately 5 seconds.

- The video display should now look like Figure B-14.

- The cursor will be positioned at the first character field of Text Line B. The first character field will be highlighted in inverse video.

- Note that the second line (TEXT LINE B) is for editing reference only and cannot be changed. Figure B-14: Text Line B Display Text Line B

(16 characters Maximum) Inverse Video Highlight Not Editable Remote 1 R TEXT LINE B 4. 5. The Color Bar Generator will now be in the Subset Mode. To use Character Mode go to step 6. To jump up or down in the list of subsets, press control switches 1 or 3 until the you reach the desired subset. See Table B-4 on page B-18. Note Perform step 6 thru step 8 for each character field you wish to change. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Press control switch 4 to enter Character Mode. Press control switches 1 or 3 to scroll up or down in the full character set until you reach the desired character. See Table B-3 on page B-17. Press control switch 4 to move to the next character field. The next character field will be highlighted in inverse video. When all of Text Line B is correct, press any 3 control switches simultaneously to save Text Line B into memory. Observe the screen flashes briefly as Text Line A is stored. This is normal. Configure Control Line B.3.6 The Control Line contains seven character fields. Each character field controls a particular aspect of the Color Bar Generators operation. Each character field can have a value of 0 through 7 only. Alphabetic characters and character subsets are not used. See Figure B-15 on page B-11 and Table B-1 on page B-11. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-10 Figure B-15: Control Line Display Character Fields 1 7 Table B-1: Control Line Parameters Character Field Function Control Line

(7 Characters Maximum) Inverse Video Highlight Not Editable 2 2 1 3 3 4 7 0 Control Line 0 3 Color settings (fields 6 and 7) 7 1 2 3 4 When CBG is set to A GEN or A Stby, sets the delay before the CBG will generate bars/tones

(Auto Generated) or places the MTX5000 IDU into standby (Auto Standby). Delays can be set from 1 to 32 seconds. See Table B-5 on page B-18 for delay values. Sets whether the CBG will generate bars, tones, or both. 0 = no tones, no bars 1 = tones, no bars 2 = no tones, bars 3 = tones and bars Sets the position of Text Line A on the screen. Each increment in value moves the text line down a small amount. 0 = top of screen 7 = bottom of screen NOTE - If the position values for Text Line A and Text Line B are the same, Line A and Line B are in the same location. In this case only Line A will be visible. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-11 Table B-1: Control Line Parameters Figure B-16: Color Bar Generator Default Screen 5 6 7 Sets the position of Text Line B on the screen. Each increment in value moves the text line down a small amount. 0 = top of screen 7 = bottom of screen NOTE - If the position values for Text Line A and Text Line B are the same, Line A and Line B are in the same location. In this case only Line A will be visible. Sets the foreground color of both text lines. 0 = white 7 = black See Figure B-15 on page B-11 for which value sets which color. Sets the foreground color of both text lines. 0 = white 7 = black See Figure B-15 on page B-11 for which value sets which color. The procedure required to configure the Color Bar Generator display control line is contained in the following steps. 1. 2. Verify the Preliminary Setup Procedure on page B-4 has been performed. Verify the Color Bar Generator default screen is displayed. See Figure B-16. Text Line A

(16 Characters Maximum) Text Line B

(16 Characters Maximum) MRC - BOSTON REMOTE 1 3. 4. Press control switches 2 and 4 simultaneously. The video display should now look like Figure B-17 on page B-13. The cursor will be positioned at the first character field of the Control Line.

- The first character field will be highlighted in inverse video.

- Note that the second line Control Line is for editing reference only and cannot be changed. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-12 Figure B-17: Control Line Display 1 Character Fields 7 Control Line

(7 Characters Maximum) Inverse Video Highlight Not Editable 2 2 1 3 3 4 7 0 Control Line 0 3 Color settings (fields 6 and 7) 7 Note Repeat step 5 and step 6 for each character field you wish to change. 5. 6. 7. 8. Press control switches 1 or 3 to scroll up or down through numbers 0 through 7 until you reach the desired number. Press control switch 4 to move to the next character field. The next character field will be highlighted in inverse video. When the Control Line is correct, press any 3 control switches simultaneously to save the Control Line into memory. Observe the screen flashes briefly as Text Line A is stored. This is normal. Check the Configuration B.3.7 When all the characters and parameters have been entered, check to be sure the Color Bar Generator is operating the way you want it to. Perform this check before you install the MTX5000 IDU in its rack. Check Text Lines 1. 2. Verify the Preliminary Setup Procedure on page B-4 has been performed. Verify the Color Bar Generator default screen is displayed. See Figure B-18. Figure B-18: Color Bar Generator Default Screen Text Line A

(16 Characters Maximum) Text Line B

(16 Characters Maximum) MRC - BOSTON REMOTE 1 3. Verify the Color Bars screen is displayed on the MTX5000 IDU color LCD display panel and verify the Color Bars screen On option button is selected. See Figure B-19 on page B-14. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-13 Figure B-19: Color Bars Screen Figure B-21: Color Bars Screen Color Bars Off On A Gen A Stby Color Bars Off On A Gen A Stby Back Main Back Main 4. The video display should display color bars similar to Figure B-20. The text lines should be displayed where you intended, and should contain the characters you entered. Figure B-20: Color Bar Generator Default Screen Text Line A

(16 Characters Maximum) MRC - BOSTON 2. 3. Apply a video input to the MTX5000 IDU. If A Gen is correctly configured, the color bars and text lines should disappear from the video display. Disconnect the video input while watching the video monitor. After the A Gen delay you configured, the bars and text should appear. Check Auto Standby 1. Connect external antennas or RF dummy loads to the MTX5000 IDU RFU 1 and RFU 2 output connectors. Text Line B

(16 Characters Maximum) Check Auto Generate REMOTE 1 1. Select the MTX5000 IDU color LCD display panel A Gen option using the touch screen or the function keys. See Figure B-21. Note When performing the following steps at the MTX5000 IDU color LCD display panel, option buttons may be selected using either the touch screen or the function keys and the SEL key. 2. Select the MTX5000 IDU color LCD display panel Color Bars screen A Stby option button. See Figure B-22 on page B-15. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-14 Figure B-22: Color Bars Screen Figure B-24: Main Screen - Typical Color Bars Off On A Gen A Stby Back Main 3. Select the Color Bars screen BACK option button and observe the Setup screen is displayed. See Figure B-23. Figure B-23: Setup Screen Setup User Radio Main 4. 5. Select the Setup screen Back option button and observe the Main page is displayed. See Figure B-24. Apply a video input to the MTX5000 IDU. If A Stby is correctly configured, the color bars and text lines should disappear from the video display. Preset A Analog 4.83 & 5.8, 3MHz Vid Dev RF Band RFU1 No RF RF Output Channel 1 Offset Antenna Antenna1 Ant. Pol. XX dBm 0 H PA Off

<- Status Setup Status ->

RF L ODU IDU SUM L/R L 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Select the PA operation button and observe the status indicator changes to green. Disconnect the video input from the MTX5000 IDU. The PA status indicator should now change to inactive

(grey). Perform Select Color Bar Generator Mode on page 3-52 to select the CGB operating mode required for Analog Preset operations. Power down the MTX5000 System. See Powering the MTX5000 System on page 3-7. Disconnect the external antennas or RF dummy loads from the RFU 1 and RFU 2 connectors. Disconnect the BNC cable from the external monitor and the test cable and disconnect the test cable from the CBG video monitor connector J4. Set the power source to off and disconnect the AC power cable from the MTX5000 IDU rear panel AC POWER IN connector. Install the MTX5000 IDU cover panel and secure with 8 screws on the top of the unit and 2 screws at the rear of the unit. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-15 15. Connect all cables and install the MTX5000 IDU in its mounting rack. See Installation on page 6-1. Configuration Reference B.4 The following tables provide additional configuration information, including button functions, character sets, and delay values. Button Functions B.4.1 Table B-2 provides details of how the buttons on the Color Bar Generator board work:

Table B-2: CBG Button Functions Switch #

Switch Location Function First Press Second press Single Button Functions 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 3 1 3 1 4 4 4 Scroll down Scroll down one character or character subset Cursor left Switches Scroll up to character mode Scroll up one character or character subset SW2 &

SW3 SW3 &

SW4 SW2 &

SW4 SW1 &

SW3 2 2 2 2 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 4 4 4 4 moves cursor to next character field to left Three Key Functions Press any 3 keys 2 3 1 4 Table B-2: CBG Button Functions (Continued) Switch #

Switch Location Function 4 Cursor right 2 3 1 4 First Press Switches to character mode Second press Moves cursor to next character field to right Two Button Functions Moves cursor to first character in Text Line A Moves cursor to first character in Text Line B Moves cursor to first character in Control Line Hides/unhides characters. CBG must be in subset mode first. Saves the current configuration to memory. Video flashes briefly when configuration is stored. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-16 Full Character Set B.4.2 Table B-3 contains all of the characters the Color Bar Generator can display. Table B-3: Full Character Set Note space Character Subset #

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 Table B-3: Full Character Set (Continued) Character Subset #

Note Y Z

l

1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 exclamation period comma equals caret left parenthesis right parenthesis hyphen underline plus less than greater than vertical bar forward slash apostrophe back slash colon semicolon half height bullet full height bullet solid block space MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-17 Table B-3: Full Character Set (Continued) Character Subset #

Note 4 5 6 7 8 9

4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 T above a V number dollars percent ampersand (and) asterisk Character Subsets B.4.3 Table B-4 provides the character subsets the Color Bar Generator uses. Note: the subsets are also shown in Table B-3 on page B-17. Table B-4: Character Subsets Subset #

Character 0 1 2 3 4 5

, 8

(space), H, P, X, [(], /, A, I, Q, Y, (, [], 1, 9 B, J, R, Z,), \, 2, C, K, S,!, _, [:], 3, #

D, L, T, [.], _, [;], 4, $

E, M, U, [,], +,

, 5,%

6 7 F, N, V, =, <, G, O, W, ^, |,

, 6, &

, 7, *

Delay Values B.4.4 Table B-5 provides the delay in seconds corresponding to each value in Control Line fields 1 and 2. Note that the delay values repeat themselves so that a setting of 4,0 results in the same delay as a setting of 0,0 (1 second). Table B-5: Delay Values Field Position 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Field Position 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Delay in Seconds 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-18 Table B-5: Delay Values (Continued) Table B-5: Delay Values (Continued) Field Position 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 Field Position 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 Delay in Seconds 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Field Position 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Field Position 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Delay in Seconds 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-19 This page intentionally left blank. MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Analog Color Bar Generator B-20 Index A About This Manual . Notices-i AC power MTX5000 IDU . 2-7 AC power cable . 6-4 advanced features . 8-2 Advanced Operations . 5-1 Advanced operations add licensed options . 5-117 configuring your MTX5000 IDU . 5-3 create a new custom analog Preset . 5-7, 5-73 create a new custom digital ASI Preset . 5-82 create a new custom digital COFDM Preset . 5-77 create a new custom digital COFDM Preset configuration 5-17 5-47 create a new custom digital DVB-S Preset . 5-91 create a new custom digital DVB-S Preset configuration create a new custom digital IP Preset . 5-96 create a new custom digital LMS-T Preset . 5-86 default password . 5-4 Firmware updates . 5-114 license manager . 5-117 load custom Preset configuration settings from file 5-106 local mode password control . 5-4 password control . 5-1 restore custom Presets to factory defaults . 5-102 save current Preset configuration settings to a file .5-104 set network addresses for remote operation . 5-109 Software updates factory licensed options . 5-117 memory stick . 5-102, 5-114 thumb drive . 5-102, 5-114 USB flash drive . 5-114 System Rules . 5-2 update an existing analog Preset configuration . 5-73 update an existing digital ASI Preset configuration . 5-82 update an existing digital COFDM Preset configuration 5-

17, . 5-77 update an existing digital DVB-S Preset configuration 5-

47, . 5-91 update an existing digital IP Preset configuration . 5-96 update an existing digital LMS-T Preset configuration 5-

update an existing Preset configuration . 5-7 86 analog CBG Text lines and parameters . B-2 Analog Color Bar Generator . B-1 Audio Connections . 6-24 C Cabling mobile installations . 6-3 CAUTIONS . Notices-iv Character Set, CBG . B-17 Character Subsets, CBG . B-18 Color Bar Generator Button Functions . B-16 Character Subsets . B-18 Check AUTOGEN . B-14 Check AUTOSTDBY . B-14 Check Text Lines . B-13 Check the Configuration . B-13 Configuration . B-2 Character Mode . B-4 character mode . B-4 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Index Index-1 Control Line . B-10 Entering Characters . B-4 Hiding Characters . B-4 Setup . B-4 Text Line A . B-8 Text Line B . B-9 Configuration Reference . B-16 Button Functions . B-16 Character Subsets . B-18 Full Character Set . B-17 Configure Text Line A . B-8 Configure Text Line B . B-9 Configure the Control Line . B-10 control switches . B-4 Delay Values . B-18 Full Character Set . B-17 Functions . B-1 functions . B-1 hide characters . B-4 Operating Modes . B-1 operating modes . B-1 subset mode . B-4 Technical Background . B-2 Composite Video (CV) . 8-2 Connections IDU Rear Panel . 6-19 Control Line . B-10 Conventions . Notices-iv Copyright . Notices-i D Damage in Shipment . 6-2 default password . 5-4 Documents Ordering . 1-1 E E-mail Feedback . 1-2 Technical Support team . 1-2 F factory default analog Presets . 5-7, 5-74 factory default digital ASI Presets . 5-82 factory default digital COFDM Presets . 5-77 factory default digital DVB-S Presets . 5-91 factory default digital IP Presets . 5-96 factory default digital LMS-T Presets . 5-86 factory default Presets . 5-3 Feedback . 1-2 G Grounding . 6-5 H How to Use This Manual . 1-2 I Installation . 6-1 AES/EBU connections . 6-24 AUDIO 1 thru AUDIO 4 connections . 6-24 Cabling . 6-3, 6-4 Checks before power-up . 6-27 connections to the IDU . 6-16 define wiring harness . 6-5 Defining the Wiring Harness Determine the Size of Harness Required . 6-9 Equipment Rack . 6-2 Ethernet . 6-27 function cables . 6-7 grounding . 6-5 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Index Index-2 Initial power-up . 6-27 mobile applications . 6-2 Moisture . 6-3 moisture . 6-3 mount ODU . 6-13 mounting one ODU . 6-14 Mounting the MRX4000 . 6-3 optional Remote Access Subnotebook PC . 6-26 pinouts of AES/EBU channel 1 and 2 digital connectors 6-25 pinouts of AUDIO 1 thru 4 analog connectors . 6-25 remote control option . 6-26 RF and DC power cabling . 6-5 RFU POWER OUT connector pinouts . 6-26 RJ-45 crossover cable . 6-26 Site Preparation . 6-2 Triax connectors . 6-6, A-1 Ventilation . 6-3 ventilation . 6-3 Installing the MRX4000 . 6-2 L license manager . 5-117 licensed options . 5-117 M Mast Top Connections . 6-16 Mounting the MTX5000 IDU . 6-3 Mounting the ODU . 6-14 MRC Customer Service . 1-1, 6-2 Business Hours . 1-1 Telephone . 1-1 MRC Technical Support Business Hours . 1-1 E-mail . 1-1 Telephone . 1-1 MTX5000 O ODU components and capabilities . 2-1 configurations . 2-1 Menu Screens . 3-10 Mounting . 6-14 On-Line Viewing . Notices-v ordering a license key from MRC . 5-118 P passwords . 5-4 personal password . 5-4 Power Connections . 6-4 Additional Powering Notes . 6-4 Power Requirements . 6-4 IDU Power Consumption . 6-4 ODU Power Consumption (Dual ODU System) . 6-4 Standard ODU Power Consumption . 6-4 Supply Voltage . 6-4 power requirements . 6-4 Preparing for Operation . 3-7 Proprietary Material . Notices-i Q Quality Certification . Notices-i R Radio IP, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server addresses Replacement Parts . 7-1 External Cables . 7-1 S SD Serialized Digital Interface video . 8-2 site power requirements . 6-4 5-109 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Index Index-3 Site preparation . 6-14 Symbols Used . Notices-v T Technical Support . 1-1 Text Line A . B-8 Text Line B . B-9 Theory of Operation . 8-1 analog FM transmission . 8-1 Digital Video Broadcasting - Terrestrial (DVB-T) . 8-1 encoding SD and HD video . 8-2 Frequency-Shift Keying (FSK) modem . 8-1 IDU and the ODU . 8-1 Modulation Error Ratio/Error Vector Magnitude (MER/

EVM) . 8-1 MRX4000 internal software . 8-3 MTX5000 ODU . 8-5 MTX5000 system architecture . 8-1 MTX5000 user interface . 8-2 ODU functional block diagram . 8-5 ODU output . 8-3 remote operation . 8-2 RF transmission . 8-1 user interface . 8-1 Troubleshooting . 4-1 U Unpacking . 6-1 update firmware . 5-114 W WARNINGS . Notices-iv Warranty statement . 6-29 Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment . Notices-v Wayside Data Compatibility . 6-24 What This Manual Covers . 1-2 Wiring Harness Determine Size . 6-9 MTX5000 User and Technical Manual Index Index-4